3Com SuperStack 3 Switch 4500 network switch Command Reference Guide

The SuperStack 3 Switch 4500 is a high-performance network switch designed for use in enterprise and campus networks. It offers a variety of features to help you manage your network effectively, including VLANs, QoS, and security.

PDF

Document

SuperStack&reg; 3 Switch 4500 Family
Command Reference Guide
Version 3.1.x
http://www.3com.com/
Part number: DUA1756-1CAA01
Published: September 2005
3Com Corporation
350 Campus Drive
Marlborough, MA
USA 01752-3064
Copyright &copy; 2005, 3Com Corporation. All rights reserved. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or by any means or used to make any derivative
work (such as translation, transformation, or adaptation) without written permission from 3Com Corporation.
3Com Corporation reserves the right to revise this documentation and to make changes in content from time to time without obligation on the part of 3Com Corporation
to provide notification of such revision or change.
3Com Corporation provides this documentation without warranty, term, or condition of any kind, either implied or expressed, including, but not limited to, the implied
warranties, terms or conditions of merchantability, satisfactory quality, and fitness for a particular purpose. 3Com may make improvements or changes in the product(s)
and/or the program(s) described in this documentation at any time.
If there is any software on removable media described in this documentation, it is furnished under a license agreement included with the product as a separate document,
in the hard copy documentation, or on the removable media in a directory file named LICENSE.TXT or !LICENSE.TXT. If you are unable to locate a copy, please contact
3Com and a copy will be provided to you.
UNITED STATES GOVERNMENT LEGEND
If you are a United States government agency, then this documentation and the software described herein are provided to you subject to the following:
All technical data and computer software are commercial in nature and developed solely at private expense. Software is delivered as “Commercial Computer Software” as
defined in DFARS 252.227-7014 (June 1995) or as a “commercial item” as defined in FAR 2.101(a) and as such is provided with only such rights as are provided in 3Com’s
standard commercial license for the Software. Technical data is provided with limited rights only as provided in DFAR 252.227-7015 (Nov 1995) or FAR 52.227-14 (June
1987), whichever is applicable. You agree not to remove or deface any portion of any legend provided on any licensed program or documentation contained in, or
delivered to you in conjunction with, this User Guide.
Unless otherwise indicated, 3Com registered trademarks are registered in the United States and may or may not be registered in other countries.
3Com and the 3Com logo are registered trademarks of 3Com Corporation.
Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Microsoft, MS-DOS, Windows, and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Novell and NetWare are registered trademarks of Novell, Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open
Company, Ltd.
IEEE and 802 are registered trademarks of the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.
All other company and product names may be trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated.
ENVIRONMENTAL STATEMENT
It is the policy of 3Com Corporation to be environmentally-friendly in all operations. To uphold our policy, we are committed to:
Establishing environmental performance standards that comply with national legislation and regulations.
Conserving energy, materials and natural resources in all operations.
Reducing the waste generated by all operations. Ensuring that all waste conforms to recognized environmental standards. Maximizing the recyclable and reusable content
of all products.
Ensuring that all products can be recycled, reused and disposed of safely.
Ensuring that all products are labeled according to recognized environmental standards.
Improving our environmental record on a continual basis.
End of Life Statement
3Com processes allow for the recovery, reclamation and safe disposal of all end-of-life electronic components.
Regulated Materials Statement
3Com products do not contain any hazardous or ozone-depleting material.
Environmental Statement about the Documentation
The documentation for this product is printed on paper that comes from sustainable, managed forests; it is fully biodegradable and recyclable, and is completely
chlorine-free. The varnish is environmentally-friendly, and the inks are vegetable-based with a low heavy-metal content.
CONTENTS
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
About This Software Version 17
How This Guide is Organized 17
Intended Readership 18
Conventions
18
Related Documentation 19
1
USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
Logging in Commands 22
authentication-mode 22
auto-execute command 23
command-privilege level 23
databits 24
display history-command 25
display user-interface 25
display users 27
flow-control 28
free user-interface 28
header 29
history-command max-size 31
idle-timeout 31
language-mode 32
lock 32
parity 33
protocol inbound 33
quit 34
return 35
screen-length 35
send 36
service-type 36
View 36
set authentication password 37
shell 38
speed 39
stopbits 39
super 40
super password 41
sysname 41
system-view 42
telnet 42
user-interface 43
user privilege level 44
2
USING PORT COMMANDS
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands 47
copy configuration 47
broadcast-suppression 47
description 48
display interface 49
display loopback-detection 51
display port 52
display unit 52
duplex 53
flow-control 54
interface 54
loopback 55
loopback-detection control enable 56
loopback-detection enable 56
loopback-detection interval-time 57
loopback-detection per-vlan enable 58
mdi 58
multicast-suppression 59
port access vlan 60
port hybrid pvid vlan 60
port hybrid vlan 61
port link-type 62
port trunk permit vlan 63
port trunk pvid vlan 63
reset counters interface 64
shutdown 65
speed 65
unicast-suppression 66
Ethernet Port Link Aggregation Commands 68
debugging link-aggregation error 68
debugging link-aggregation event 68
debugging lacp packet 68
debugging lacp state 69
display link-aggregation summary 70
display link-aggregation verbose 71
display link-aggregation interface 72
display lacp system-id 73
lacp enable 73
lacp port-priority 74
lacp system-priority 74
link-aggregation group agg-id description 75
link-aggregation group agg-id mode
port link-aggregation group 76
reset lacp statistics 77
3
USING VLAN COMMANDS
VLAN Configuration Commands 80
description
80
display interface VLAN-interface
display vlan 81
interface VLAN-interface
82
port 83
shutdown 84
vlan
85
Voice VLAN Configuration Commands
display voice vlan oui 85
display voice vlan status 86
voice vlan aging 87
voice vlan enable 87
voice vlan 88
voice vlan mac_address 88
voice vlan mode 89
voice vlan security enable 90
4
75
80
85
USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE) COMMANDS
PoE Configuration Commands 92
display poe interface 92
display poe power 93
display poe powersupply 94
poe enable 95
poe legacy enable 95
poe max-power 96
poe mode 97
poe power-management 97
poe priority 98
poe update 99
5
USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
IP Address Configuration Commands 103
display ip host 103
display ip interface vlan 103
ip address
104
ip host 105
ARP Configuration Commands 105
arp check enable 105
arp static 106
arp static 107
debugging arp packet 108
display arp 109
display arp timer aging 110
reset arp 111
DHCP Client Configuration Commands 112
debugging dhcp client 112
debugging dhcp xrn xha 112
display dhcp client 113
ip address dhcp-alloc 113
DHCP Relay Configuration Commands 114
debugging dhcp-relay 114
dhcp-server 115
dhcp-server ip 116
display dhcp-server 116
display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface 117
Access Management Configuration Commands 118
am enable 118
am ip-pool 118
am trap enable 119
display am 120
display isolate port 121
port isolate 121
UDP Helper Configuration Commands 122
debugging udp-helper 122
display udp-helper server 123
udp-helper enable 123
udp-helper port 123
udp-helper server 124
IP Performance Configuration Commands 125
display fib 125
display fib ip_address 126
display fib acl 126
display fib 127
display fib ip-prefix 127
display fib statistics 128
display icmp statistics 128
display ip socket 129
display ip statistics 130
display tcp statistics 132
display tcp status 133
display udp statistics 133
reset ip statistics 134
reset tcp statistics 134
reset udp statistics 135
tcp timer fin-timeout 135
tcp timer syn-timeout 135
tcp window 136
6
USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Routing Table Display Commands 140
display ip routing-table 140
display ip routing-table acl 141
display ip routing-table ip_address 143
display ip routing-table ip_address1 ip_address2
display ip routing-table ip-prefix 145
display ip routing-table protocol 147
display ip routing-table radix 148
display ip routing-table statistics 148
display ip routing-table verbose 149
Static Route Configuration Command 150
delete static-routes all 151
ip route-static 151
RIP Configuration Commands 153
checkzero 153
default cost 153
display rip 154
filter-policy export 155
filter-policy import 156
host-route 157
import-route 157
network 158
peer 159
preference 160
reset 160
rip 161
rip authentication-mode 161
rip input 163
rip metricin 163
rip metricout 164
rip output 164
rip split-horizon 165
rip version 166
rip work 167
summary 167
timers 168
IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands 170
apply cost
170
display ip ip-prefix 170
display route-policy 171
if-match { acl | ip-prefix } 172
if-match cost 172
if-match interface 173
if-match ip next-hop 174
ip ip-prefix 174
route-policy 176
145
7
USING MULTICAST PROTOCOL COMMANDS
IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands 180
display igmp-snooping configuration 180
display igmp-snooping group 180
display igmp-snooping statistics 181
igmp-snooping 182
igmp-snooping host-aging-time 182
igmp-snooping max-response-time 183
igmp-snooping router-aging-time 184
reset igmp-snooping statistics 184
8
USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
ACL Commands List 188
acl 188
display acl
189
display packet-filter 189
packet-filter 190
reset acl counter 191
rule 191
QoS Configuration Commands List 194
display mirror 194
display qos cos-local-precedencemap 195
display qos-interface all 195
display qos-interface line-rate 196
display qos-interface mirrored-to 196
display qos-interface traffic-limit 197
line-rate 198
mirrored-to 198
mirroring-port 199
monitor-port 200
priority 201
priority trust 201
qos cos-local-precedence -map 202
traffic-limit 203
wred 204
Logon User’s ACL Control Command 205
acl 205
ip http acl 206
snmp-agent community 206
snmp-agent group 207
snmp-agent usm-user 208
9
USING STACK COMMANDS
Stack Commands 211
change self-unit 211
change unit-id 212
display ftm 213
display xrn-fabric 213
fabric save-unit-id 214
fabric-port enable 215
ftm stacking-vlan 215
xrn-fabric authentication-mode
set unit name 216
sysname 217
10
216
USING RSTP COMMANDS
RSTP Configuration Commands 220
display stp 220
reset stp 221
stp 222
stp bpdu-protection 223
stp cost 224
stp edged-port 224
stp loop-protection 225
stp mcheck 226
stp mode 226
stp pathcost-standard 227
stp point-to-point 228
stp port priority 228
stp priority 229
stp root primary 230
stp root secondary 230
stp root-protection 231
stp timeout-factor 232
stp timer forward-delay 232
stp timer hello 233
stp timer max-age 234
stp transmit-limit 234
11
USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
802.1x Configuration Commands 240
display dot1x
240
dot1x 241
dot1x authentication-method 242
dot1x dhcp-launch 243
dot1x max-user 243
dot1x port-control 244
dot1x port-method 245
dot1x quiet-period 246
dot1x retry 247
dot1x supp-proxy-check 248
dot1x timer 249
reset dot1x statistics 250
Centralized MAC Address Authentication Configuration Commands
debugging mac-authentication event 251
display mac-authentication 252
mac-authentication 253
mac-authentication authmode 254
mac-authentication authpassword 255
mac-authentication authusername 256
mac-authentication domain 256
mac-authentication timer 257
AAA and RADIUS Configuration Commands 258
access-limit 258
attribute 258
cut connection 259
display connection 260
display domain 262
display local-user 262
domain 264
idle-cut
265
level 266
local-user 266
local-user password-display-mode 267
messenger 268
password 269
radius-scheme 269
scheme 270
self-service-url 271
service-type 272
state 273
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands 274
accounting optional 274
data-flow-format 274
display local-server statistics 275
display radius 276
display radius statistics
277
display stop-accounting-buffer 278
key 279
local-server 280
nas-ip 280
primary accounting 281
primary authentication 282
radius nas-ip 283
radius scheme 284
reset radius statistics 284
reset stop-accounting-buffer 285
retry 286
retry realtime-accounting
287
retry stop-accounting 287
251
secondary accounting 288
secondary authentication 289
server-type 289
state 290
stop-accounting-buffer enable
291
timer 292
timer quiet 293
timer realtime-accounting 293
timer response-timeout 294
user-name-format 295
12
USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
File System Management Commands 302
cd 302
copy 303
delete 304
dir 304
execute 305
file prompt 306
format 306
mkdir 307
more 307
move 308
pwd 308
rename 309
reset recycle-bin 310
rmdir 310
undelete 310
Configuration File Management Commands
display current-configuration 311
display saved-configuration 314
display this 314
display startup 315
reset saved-configuration 316
save 317
startup bootrom-access enable 317
startup saved configuration 318
FTP Server Configuration Commands 318
display ftp-server 319
display ftp-user 319
ftp server
319
ftp timeout 320
local-user 321
password 321
service-type 322
FTP Client Commands 323
ascii 323
311
binary 324
bye 324
cd 325
cdup 326
close 326
delete 327
dir 327
disconnect 328
ftp 329
get 329
lcd 330
ls 330
mkdir 331
passive 332
put 332
pwd 333
quit 333
remotehelp 334
rmdir 335
user
335
verbose 336
TFTP Configuration Commands 336
tftp get 336
tftp put 337
MAC Address Table Management Commands 337
display mac-address 337
display mac-address aging-time 338
mac-address 339
mac-address max-mac-count 340
mac-address timer 341
Device Management Commands 342
boot boot-loader 342
boot bootrom 342
display boot-loader 342
display cpu 343
display device 343
display fan 344
display memory 344
display power 345
display schedule reboot 345
reboot 346
schedule reboot at 346
schedule reboot delay 347
Basic System Configuration and Management Commands
clock datetime 349
clock summer-time 349
clock timezone 350
sysname 351
349
System Status and System Information Display Commands
display clock 351
display config-agent 352
display debugging 353
display version 353
System Debug Commands 354
debugging 354
display diagnostic-information 355
Network Connection Test Commands 355
end-station polling ip-address 355
ping 356
tracert 358
Log Commands 360
display channel 360
display info-center 360
info-center channel name 361
info-center console channel 362
info-center enable
362
info-center logbuffer 363
info-center loghost 364
info-center loghost source 365
info-center monitor channel 365
info-center snmp channel 366
info-center source 367
info-center switch-on 370
info-center timestamp 371
info-center trapbuffer 372
reset logbuffer 372
reset trapbuffer 373
terminal debugging 373
terminal logging 374
terminal monitor 374
terminal trapping 375
SNMP Configuration Commands 375
display snmp-agent
375
display snmp-agent community 376
display snmp-agent group 376
display snmp-agent mib-view 377
display snmp-agent statistics 378
display snmp-agent sys-info 380
display snmp-agent usm-user 380
display snmp-proxy unit 381
enable snmp trap 381
snmp-agent community 382
snmp-agent group 383
snmp-agent local-engineid 384
snmp-agent mib-view 384
snmp-agent packet max-size 385
351
snmp-agent sys-info 386
snmp-agent target-host 386
snmp-agent trap enable 388
snmp-agent trap life 389
snmp-agent trap queue-size 390
snmp-agent trap source 390
snmp-agent usm-user 391
undo snmp-agent 392
RMON Configuration Commands 393
display rmon alarm 393
display rmon event 393
display rmon eventlog 394
display rmon history 395
display rmon prialarm 396
display rmon statistics 397
rmon alarm 398
rmon event 399
rmon history 400
rmon prialarm 401
rmon statistics 402
SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands
debugging ssh server 403
display rsa local-key-pair public 403
display rsa peer-public-key 405
display ssh server 406
display ssh user-information 406
peer-public-key end 407
protocol inbound 407
public-key-code begin 408
public-key-code end 409
rsa local-key-pair create 409
rsa local-key-pair destroy 410
rsa peer-public-key 411
ssh server authentication-retries 411
ssh server rekey-interval 412
ssh server timeout 412
ssh user assign rsa-key 412
ssh user authentication-type 413
SSH Client Configuration Commands 414
display ssh server-info 414
peer-public-key end 414
public-key-code begin 415
public-key-code end 416
quit 416
rsa peer-public-key 417
ssh client assign rsa-key 417
ssh client first-time enable 418
ssh2 419
403
SFTP Server Configuration Commands
sftp server enable 421
ssh user service-type 421
SFTP Client Configuration Commands
bye 422
cd 422
cdup 423
delete 423
dir 424
exit 424
get 425
help 425
ls 426
mkdir 426
put 427
pwd 427
quit 427
remove 428
rename 428
rmdir 429
sftp 429
13
421
422
CONFIGURING PASSWORD CONTROL
display password-control 431
display password-control blacklist 432
display password-control super 432
password 433
password-control 433
password-control enable 435
password-control super 436
reset password-control history-record 437
reset password-control history-record super 438
reset password-control blacklist 438
A
BOOTROM INTERFACE
Accessing the Bootrom Interface 441
Boot Menu 442
Download Application File to Flash 442
Select Application File to Boot 442
Display all Files in Flash 443
Delete File from Flash 443
Modify Bootrom Password 444
Enter Bootrom Upgrade Menu 444
Skip Current Configuration File 444
Set Bootrom Password Recovery 444
Set Switch Startup Mode 445
Reboot 445
Boot Menu File Download Commands
445
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
This guide provides all the information you need to use the configuration
commands supported by version 3.0.x software on the 3Com&reg; SuperStack&reg; 3
Switch 4500.
About This Software
Version
The software in the Switch 4500 is a subset of that used in some other 3Com
products. Depending on the capabilities of your hardware platform, some
commands described in this guide may not be available on your Switch, although
the unavailable commands may still display on the command line interface (CLI). If
you try to use an unavailable command, an error message displays.
CAUTION: Any command that displays on the CLI, but is not described in this
guide, is not supported in version 3.0.x software. 3Com only supports the
commands described in this guide. Other commands may result in the loss of data,
and are entered at the user’s risk.
How This Guide is
Organized
The Switch 4500 Command Reference Guide consists of the following chapters:
■
Using System Access Commands — Introduces the commands used for
accessing the Switch 4500.
■
Using Port Commands — Introduces the commands used for configuring
Ethernet port and link aggregation.
■
Using VLAN Commands — Introduces the commands used for configuring
VLANs.
■
Using Power over Ethernet (PoE) Commands — Introduces the commands
used for configuring PoE.
■
Using Network Protocol Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring network protocols.
■
Using Routing Protocol Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring routing protocols.
■
Using Multicast Protocol Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring multicast protocols.
■
Using QoS and ACL Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring QoS/ACL.
■
Using STP Commands — Introduces the commands used for configuring STP.
■
Using AAA and RADIUS Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring 802.1x, AAA and RADIUS.
■
Using Reliability Commands — Introduces the commands used for
configuring VRRP.
18
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
■
Intended Readership
Conventions
Using System Management Commands — Introduces the commands used
for system management and maintenance.
The guide is intended for the following readers:
■
Network administrators
■
Network engineers
■
Users who are familiar with the basics of networking
This guide uses the following conventions:
Table 1 Icons
Icon
Notice Type
Description
Information note
Information that describes important features or instructions.
Caution
Information that alerts you to potential loss of data or
potential damage to an application, system, or device.
Warning
Information that alerts you to potential personal injury.
Table 2 Text conventions
Convention
Description
Screen displays This typeface represents text as it appears on the screen.
Keyboard key names If you must press two or more keys simultaneously, the key names are
linked with a plus sign (+), for example:
Press Ctrl+Alt+Del
The words “enter”
and “type”
When you see the word “enter” in this guide, you must type
something, and then press Return or Enter. Do not press Return or
Enter when an instruction simply says “type.”
Fixed command
text
This typeface indicates the fixed part of a command text. You must type
the command, or this part of the command, exactly as shown, and
press Return or Enter when you are ready to enter the command.
Example: The command display history-command must be
entered exactly as shown.
Variable
command text
This typeface indicates the variable part of a command text. You must
type a value here, and press Return or Enter when you are ready to
enter the command.
Example: in the command super level , a value in the range 0 to 3
must be entered in the position indicated by level
{ x | y | ... }
Alternative items, one of which must be entered, are grouped in braces
and separated by vertical bars. You must select and enter one of the
items.
Example: in the command flow-control {hardware | none |
software}, the braces and the vertical bars combined indicate that
you must enter one of the parameters. Enter either hardware, or
none, or software.
Related Documentation
19
Table 2 Text conventions
[]
Items shown in square brackets [ ] are optional.
Example 1: in the command display users [all], the square
brackets indicate that the parameter all is optional. You can enter the
command with or without this parameter.
Example 2: in the command user-interface [type]
first-number [last-number] the square brackets indicate that the
parameters [type] and [last-number] are both optional. You can
enter a value in place of one, both or neither of these parameters.
Alternative items, one of which can optionally be entered, are grouped
in square brackets and separated by vertical bars.
Example 3: in the command header [shell | incoming |
login] text, the square brackets indicate that the parameters
shell, incoming and login are all optional. The vertical bars
indicate that only one of the parameters is allowed.
Related
Documentation
The 3Com SuperStack 4 Switch 4500 Getting Started Guide provides information
about installation.
The 3Com SuperStack 4 Switch 4500 Configuration Guide provides information
about configuring your network using the commands described in this guide.
20
ABOUT THIS GUIDE
1
USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
Logging in Commands
■
authentication-mode
■
auto-execute command
■
command-privilege level
■
databits
■
display history-command
■
display user-interface
■
display users
■
flow-control
■
free user-interface
■
header
■
history-command max-size
■
idle-timeout
■
language-mode
■
lock
■
parity
■
protocol inbound
■
quit
■
return
■
screen-length
■
send
■
service-type
■
View
■
set authentication password
■
shell
■
speed
■
stopbits
■
super
■
super password
■
sysname
22
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
Logging in Commands
authentication-mode
■
system-view
■
telnet
■
user-interface
■
user privilege level
This section describes the commands that you can use to configure system access
and system security.
Syntax
authentication-mode { password | scheme | none }
View
User interface view
Parameter
password: Requires local authentication of password at log in.
scheme: Requires local or remote authentication of username and password at
log in.
none: Allows users to log in without username or password.
Description
This command configures the authentication method for a user at log in.
Use the command authentication-mode password to prompt a user for local
password authentication at login. To set the password, use set authentication
password.
Use the command authentication-mode scheme to prompt a user to provide
local or remote user name and password authentication at login. The type of the
authentication depends on your network configuration. For further information,
see “AAA and RADIUS”.
Use the command authentication-mode none to allow a user to log in without
username or password authentication.
By default, users logging in using the console port do not need to pass any
terminal authentication. Users logging in via modem or Telnet are required to
provide password authentication when they log in.
Example
To configure local password authentication, enter the following command:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface aux 0
[4500-ui-aux0]authentication-mode password
Logging in Commands
auto-execute command
23
Syntax
auto-execute command text
undo auto-execute command
View
User Interface View
Parameter
text: Specifies the command to be run automatically.
Description
Enter auto-execute command text to configure the Switch to automatically run a
specified command. When the user logs in, the command will be executed
automatically. This command is usually used to configure the telnet command on
the terminal, which will connect the user to a designated device automatically.
Enter undo auto-execute command to cancel the auto-execute command so the
command is not run automatically.
By default, auto-execute is disabled.
CAUTION: If you execute this command, the user-interface can no longer be used
to perform routine configurations on the local system. Ensure that you can log in
to the system in some other way to cancel the configuration, before you configure
the auto-execute command and save the configuration.
Example
To configure the Switch to automatically Telnet to device 10.110.100.1 after the
user logs in via VTY 0, enter the following command:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface vty 0
[4500-ui-vty0]auto-execute command telnet 10.110.100.1
command-privilege level
Syntax
command-privilege level level view view command
undo command-privilege view view command
View
System View
Parameter
level: Enter the command level you want to assign to this command, ranging
from 0 to 3.
view: Enter the name of the view that contains the command. This can be any of
the views supported by the Switch.
command: Enter the command to be configured.
24
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
Description
Use the command-privilege level command to configure the priority level
assigned to any command within a selected view.
The command levels are, from lowest to highest:
■
0 – Visit
■
1 – Monitoring
■
2 – System
■
3 – Management
When the user logs into the Switch, the commands used depends on the user level
settings and the command level settings on the user interface. The two types of
settings may differ as follows:
■
If AAA/RADIUS authentication is used, the commands the user can access are
determined by the user level settings. For example, if a user is set to level 3 and
the command level on the VTY 0 user interface is level 1, the user can only user
the commands of level 3 or lower when logging into the Switch from the VTY
interface.
■
If RSA public key authentication is used, the commands the user can access are
determined by the command level settings on the user interface.
By default:
■
ping, tracert, and telnet are at level 0
■
display and debugging are at level 1
■
all configuration commands are at system level 2
■
FTP, XMODEM, TFTP and commands for file system operations are at level 3
Use the undo command-privilege view command to restore the default priority
to a command.
Example
To configure the precedence of the command ‘interface’ as 0, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]command-privilege level 0 view system interface
databits
Syntax
databits { 7 | 8 }
undo databits
View
User interface view
Parameter
7 – Sets the data bits to 7.
Logging in Commands
25
8 – Sets the data bits to 8.
Description
Use the databits command to configure the data bits for the AUX (Console) port
to either 7 or 8. By default, the value is 8. Use the undo databits command to
restore the default value (8).
This command can only be performed in the AUX user interface view.
Example
To configure the data bits of the AUX (Console) port to 7 bits, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface aux 0
[4500-ui-aux0]databits 7
display
history-command
Syntax
display history-command
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display history-command command to view the commands previously
entered during this login session, up to a specified maximum.
To set the maximum number of commands to display, see history-command
max-size.
Example
To display previously entered commands, enter the following.
&lt;4500&gt;display history-command
The commands display on screen.
display user-interface
Syntax
display user-interface [ type number | number ] [summary]
View
All views
Parameter
type number: Enter the type and number of the user interface you want to
display details on, for example VTY 3.
number: Enter the index number of the user interface you want to display details
on.
26
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
summary: Display the summary of a user interface.
Description
Use the display user-interface command to view information on a user
interface. You can choose to access this information by user interface type and
type number, or by user interface index number. The information displayed is the
same whichever access method you use.
This command without the summary parameter displays user interface type,
absolute/relative index, transmission speed, priority, authentication methods, and
physical location. This command with the summary parameter displays one user
interface in use with user interface name and other user interface information.
Example
To display information on a user interface with an index number of 0, enter the
following.
&lt;4500&gt;display user-interface aux 0
The information is displayed in the following format:
Idx
0
Type
AUX 0
Tx/Rx
19200
Modem Privi Auth
3
P
Int
-
+
: Current user-interface is active.
F
: Current user-interface is active and work in async mode.
Idx : Absolute index of user-interface.
Type : Type and relative index of user-interface.
Privi: The privilege of user-interface.
Auth : The authentication mode of user-interface.
Int : The physical location of UIs.
A
: Authentication use AAA.
N
: Current UI need not authentication.
P
: Authentication use current UI's password.
Table 3 Output description of the display user-interface command
Field
Description
+
Indicates that the user interface is in use
F
Current user interface is in use and working in asynchronous
mode
Idx
Displays the index number of the user interface
Type
Displays the type and type number of the user interface
Tx/Rx
Displays the user interface speed
Modem
Displays the modem operation mode
Privi
Indicates the command level that can be accessed from this
user interface
Auth
Indicates the user interface authentication method
Int
Indicates the physical location of the user interface
Display the summary information of user interface 0.
&lt;4500&gt;display user-interface 0 summary
0: U
Logging in Commands
1 character mode users.
1 total UIs in use.
UI's name: aux0
27
(U)
Table 4 Output Description of the display user-interface summary Command
display users
Field
Description
0: U
User interface type
1 character mode users
One type of user interface
1 total UIs in use
The total number of user interfaces in use
UI’s name
User interface name
Syntax
display users [ all ]
View
All views
Parameter
all: Enter to display information on all user interfaces.
Description
Use the display users command to view information on the current user
interface. Use the display users all command to view the information on all
user interfaces.
Example
To display information on the current user interface, enter the following
[4500]display users
The information displays in the following format:
UI
F 0 AUX 0
Delay
Type
00:00:00
IPaddress
3
Username
Userlevel
The categories of information displayed are as follows:
Table 5 Output description of the display users command
Field
Description
F
Indicates that the user interface is in use and is working in asynchronous mode
UI
Number of the first list is the absolute number of user interface.
Number of the second list is the relative number of user interface
Delay
Indicates the interval from the latest input until now, in seconds.
Type
Indicates the user interface type.
IPaddress
Displays initial connection location, namely the host IP address of the incoming
connection.
Username
Display the login name of the user who is using this interface
Userlevel
Display the level of the user using this user interface
28
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
flow-control
Syntax
flow-control { hardware | none | software }
undo flow-control
View
User interface view
Parameter
hardware: Enter to set hardware flow control.
none: Enter to set no flow control.
software: Enter to set software flow control.
Description
Use the flow-control command to configure the flow control mode on the AUX
(Console) port to hardware, software or none. Use the undo flow-control
command to restore the default flow control mode (no flow control).
This command can only be performed in the AUX user interface view.
Example
To configure software flow control on the AUX (Console) port, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface aux 0
[4500-ui-aux0]flow-control software
free user-interface
Syntax
free user-interface { type | number }
View
User view
Parameter
type: Enter the type and type number of the user interface to be reset.
number: Enter the index number of the user interface to be reset.
Description
Use this command to reset a specified user interface to its default settings. The
user interface will be disconnected after the reset.
Use free user-interface type to reset the interface with the specified type
and type number to its default settings. Use free user-interface number to
reset the interface with the specified index number to its default settings.
You cannot use this command on the current user interface.
Logging in Commands
29
Example
To reset user interface AUX 1 from another user interface on the Switch, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;free user-interface aux 1
After the command is executed, user interface AUX 1 is disconnected. When you
next log in using user interface AUX 1, it opens using the default settings.
header
Syntax
header { shell | incoming | login } text
undo header { shell | incoming | login }
View
System view
Parameter
login: Login information in case of authentication. It is displayed before the user
is prompted to enter user name and password.
shell: User conversation established header, the information output after user
conversation has been established. If authentication is required, it is prompted
after the user passes authentication.
incoming: Login header, the information output after a Modem user logs in. If
authentication is required, it is prompted after the user passes authentication. In
this case, no shell information is output.
text: Specifies the title text. If you do not choose any keyword in the command,
the system displays the login information by default. The system supports two
types of input mode: you can input all the text in one line (a maximum of 256
characters, including command key word, can be entered); or you can input all the
text in several lines using the &lt;Enter&gt; key, and more than 256 characters can be
entered. The text starts and ends with the first character. After entering the last
character, press the &lt;Enter&gt; key to exit the interactive process.
Description
Use the header command to configure the system to display a header during user
log in. Use the undo header { shell | incoming | login } command to
delete the specified header.
When the user logs in, and a connection is activated, the login header displays.
After the user successfully logs in, the shell header displays.
The first characters in the text are regarded as the start and stop characters. After
you type in the stop character, the system will exit the header command
automatically.
If you do not want to use the control characters, you can type in text with the
same characters at the beginning and end, and press Enter.
30
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
If you press &lt;Enter&gt; after typing any of the three keywords shell, login and
incoming in the command, then what you type after the word header is the
contents of the login information, instead of identifying header type.
You can judge whether the initial character can be used as the header contents
this way:
1 If there is only one character in the first line and it is used as the identifier, this
initial character pairs with the ending character and is not the header contents.
2 If there are many characters in the first line but the initial and ending characters
are different, this initial character pairs with the ending character and is the
header contents.
3 There are many characters in the first line and the initial character is identical with
the ending character, this initial character is not the header contents.
Example
Configure the header of setting up a session.
Mode 1: Input in one line
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]header shell %SHELL: Hello! Welcome%
The starting and ending characters must be the same, and press the &lt;Enter&gt; key
to finish a line.
■
When you log on the Switch again, the terminal displays the configured session
establishment title.
[4500]quit
&lt;4500&gt;quit
Please press ENTER
SHELL: Hello! Welcome
The initial character &quot;%&quot; is not the header contents.
&lt;4500&gt;
Mode 2: Input in several lines
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]header shell % SHELL:
After you pressing the &lt;Enter&gt; key, the system prompts the following message:
Input banner text, and quit with the character '%'.
Go on inputting the rest text and end your input with the first letter:
Hello! Welcome %
Press the &lt;Enter&gt; key.
[4500]
Logging in Commands
31
When you log on the Switch again, the terminal displays the configured session
establishment title.
[4500]quit
&lt;4500&gt;quit
Please press ENTER
%SHELL:
The initial character &quot;%&quot; is the header contents.
Hello! Welcome
&lt;4500&gt;
history-command
max-size
Syntax
history-command max-size value
undo history-command max-size
View
User interface view
Parameter
value: Enter the number of previously entered commands that you want the
Switch to save.
Description
Use the command history-command max-size to specify the amount of
previously entered commands that you want the Switch to save. Enter any value
between 0 and 256. The default is 10, that is, the 10 most recently entered
commands are saved. Use the undo history-command max-size command to
restore the default value.
To display the most recently-entered commands, up to the specified maximum,
use the command display history-command.
Example
To set the history buffer to 20, that is to save the 20 most recently-entered
commands, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface aux 0
[4500-ui-aux0]history-command max-size 20
idle-timeout
Syntax
idle-timeout minutes [ seconds ]
undo idle-timeout
View
User interface view
32
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
Parameter
minutes: Enter the number of minutes you want to allow a user interface to
remain idle before it is disconnected. This can be in the range 0 to 35791.
seconds: Enter the number of seconds in addition to the number of minutes.
Optional.
Description
Use the idle-timeout command to configure the amount of time you want to
allow a user interface to remain idle before it is disconnected. Use the undo
idle-timeout command to restore the default idle-timeout. By default,
idle-timeout is set to 10 minutes.
To disable idle timeout, set the idle-timeout value to 0.
Example
To configure the timeout value to 1 minute on the AUX user interface, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface aux 0
[4500-ui-aux0]idle-timeout 1
language-mode
Syntax
language-mode { chinese | english }
View
User View
Parameter
chinese: Sets the language of the command line interface to Chinese.
english: Sets the language of the command line interface to English.
Description
Use the language-mode command to choose the language of the command line
interface. By default, the command line interface is set to English.
Example
To change the command line interface from English to Chinese, enter the
following:
&lt;4500-ui-aux0&gt;language-mode chinese
lock
Syntax
lock
View
User View
Logging in Commands
33
Parameter
None
Description
Use the lock command to lock the current user interface and prevent
unauthorized users from accessing it. An authorized user must enter a valid
password to access the interface.
Example
To lock the current user interface, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;lock
Password: xxxx
Again: xxxx
parity
Syntax
parity { even | mark | none | odd | space }
undo parity
View
User Interface View
Parameter
even: Sets the Switch to even parity.
mark: Sets the Switch to mark parity (1)
none: Sets the Switch to perform no parity checking.
odd: Sets the Switch to odd parity.
space: Sets the Switch to zero parity (0)
Description
Use the parity command to configure the parity mode on the AUX (Console)
port. Use the undo parity command to restore the default parity mode (no parity
checking).
This command can only be performed in the AUX user interface view.
Example
To set mark parity on the AUX (Console) port, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface aux 0
[4500-ui-aux0]parity mark
protocol inbound
Syntax
protocol inbound { all| ssh | telnet }
34
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
View
VTY user interface view
Parameter
all: Supports both Telnet and SSH protocols.
ssh: Supports only SSH protocol.
telnet: Supports only Telnet protocol.
Description
Use the protocol inbound command to configure the protocols supported by a
designated user interface.
By default, the user interface supports Telnet and SSH protocol.
For the related commands, see user-interface vty.
Example
Configure SSH protocol supported by VTY0 user interface.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface vty 0
[4500-ui-vty0]protocol inbound ssh
quit
Syntax
quit
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the quit command to exit from the current view to the next highest view. If
the current view is user view, this command quits the system.
There are three levels of view, which are, from high to low:
■
user view
■
system view
■
menu views, for example VLAN view, Ethernet port view, and so on.
Related commands: return, system-view.
Example
To return to user view from system view, enter the following:
[4500]quit
&lt;4500&gt;
Logging in Commands
return
35
Syntax
return
View
System view or higher
Parameter
None
Description
Use the return command to return to user view from any other view.
Ctrl+Z performs the same function as the return command.
To return to the next highest level of view, use quit.
Example
To return to user view from any other view (the example below shows the
command entered from the system view), enter the following.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]return
&lt;4500&gt;
screen-length
Syntax
screen-length screen-length
undo screen-length
View
User interface view
Parameter
screen-length: Enter the maximum number of information lines that you want
to display on a terminal screen, ranging from 0 to 512. The default is 24.
Description
Use the command screen-length to configure how many information lines
(maximum) will be displayed on the screen of a terminal. Use the command undo
screen-length to restore the default of 24 lines.
To disable this function, that is to allow an unlimited number of information lines,
enter the parameter as 0.
Example
To configure a terminal to display 20 lines of information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface aux 0
[4500-ui-aux0]screen-length 20
36
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
send
Syntax
send { all | number | type }
View
User view
Parameter
all: Sends a message to all user interfaces.
type: Enter the type and type number of the user interface that you want to send
a message to.
number: Enter the absolute/relative number of the interface that you want to
send a message to.
Description
Use the send command to send messages to other user interfaces.
Example
To send a message to all the user interfaces, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;send all
service-type
Syntax
service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory directory ] | lan-access |{ssh |
telnet | terminal }* [ level level ]}
undo service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory directory ] | lan-access
|{ssh | telnet | terminal }* [ level level ]}
View
Local-user View
Parameter
telnet: Specifies user type as Telnet.
ssh: Specifies user type as SSH.
level level: Specifies the level of Telnet, SSH or terminal users. The argument
level is an integer in the range of 0 to 3 and defaults to 0.
ftp: Specifies user type as ftp.
ftp-directory directory: Specifies the directory of ftp users, directory is a
character string of up to 64 characters.
lan-access: Specifies user type to lan-access, which mainly refers to Ethernet
accessing users, 802.1x supplicants for example.
terminal: Authorizes the user to use the terminal service (login from the Console
port).
Logging in Commands
37
Description
Use the command service-type to configure which level of command a user can
access after login. Use the command undo service-type to restore the default
level of command (level 1).
Commands are classified into four levels, as follows:
■
0 - Visit level. Users at this level have access to network diagnosis tools (such
as ping and tracert), and the Telnet commands. A user at this level cannot save
the configuration file.
■
1 - Monitoring level. Users at this level can perform system maintenance,
service fault diagnosis, and so on. A user at this level cannot save the
configuration file.
■
2 - System level. Users at this level can perform service configuration
operations, including routing, and can enter commands that affect each
network layer. Configuration level commands are used to provide direct
network service to the user.
■
3 - Management level. Users at this level can perform basic system
operations, and can use file system commands, FTP commands, TFTP
commands, XModem downloading commands, user management commands
and level setting commands.
Example
To allow a user zbr to configure commands a level 0 after login, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user zbr
[4500-luser-zbr]service-type telnet level 0
To activate these settings, quit the system and login with the username zbr. Now
only the commands at level 0 are listed on the terminal.
[4500]quit
&lt;4500&gt;?
User view commands:
debugging
Debugging functions
language-mode
Specify the language environment
ping
Ping function
quit
Exit from current command view
super
Privilege current user a specified priority level
telnet
Establish one TELNET connection
tracert
Trace route function
undo
Negate a command or set its default
set authentication
password
Syntax
set authentication password { cipher | simple } password
undo set authentication password
View
User interface view
38
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
Parameter
cipher: Configure to display the password in encrypted text.
simple: Configure to display the password in plain text.
password: If the authentication is in the simple mode, the password must be in
plain text. If the authentication is in the cipher mode, the password can be either
in encrypted text or in plain text. If a plain text password is entered when cipher
mode has been selected, the password will be displayed in the configuration
settings as encrypted. A plain text password is a sequential character string of no
more than 16 digits, for example, 3Com918. The length of an encrypted password
must be 24 digits and in encrypted text, for example,
_(TT8F]Y\5SQ=^Q`MAF4&lt;1!!.
Description
Use the set authentication password command to configure the password for
local authentication. Use the undo set authentication password command to
cancel local authentication password.
The password in plain text is required when performing authentication, regardless
of whether the configuration is plain text or cipher text.
By default, a password is required for users connecting over Modem or Telnet. If a
password has not been set, the following prompt is displayed: Login password
has not been set!
Example
To configure the local authentication password on VTY 0 to 3Com, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface vty 0
[4500-ui-vty0]set authentication password simple 3com
shell
Syntax
shell
undo shell
View
User interface view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the shell command to enable the terminal service for a user interface. The
terminal service is enabled by default. Use the undo shell command to disable
the terminal service for a user interface.
Logging in Commands
39
When using the undo shell command, note the following points.
■
For reasons of security, the undo shell command can only be used on user
interfaces other than the AUX user interface.
■
You cannot use this command on the current user interface.
■
You are asked to confirm the command.
Example
To disable the terminal service on the VTY user interfaces 0 to 4, enter the
following from another user interface:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface vty 0 4
[4500-ui-vty0-4]undo shell
speed
Syntax
speed speed-value
undo speed
View
User interface view
Parameter
speed-value: Specify the transmission rate on the AUX (Console) port in bits per
second (bps). This can be any of the following values: 300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 or 4096000.
The default rate is 19200 bps.
Description
Use the speed command to configure the transmission rate on the AUX (Console)
port. Use the undo speed command to restore the default rate.
This command can only be performed in AUX user interface view.
Example
To configure the transmission speed on the AUX (Console) port as 9600 b/s, enter
the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface aux 0
[4500-ui-aux0]speed 9600
stopbits
Syntax
stopbits { 1 | 1.5 | 2 }
undo stopbits
View
User interface view
40
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
Parameter
1: Sets the stop bits to 1.
1.5: Sets the stop bits to 1.5.
2: Sets the stop bits to 2.
Description
Use the stopbits command to configure the stop bits on the AUX (Console) port.
Use the undo stopbits command to restore the default stop bits (the default
is 1).
This command can only be performed in AUX user interface view.
Example
To configure the stop bits to 2, enter the following from the AUX (Console) port:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface aux 0
[4500-ui-aux0]stopbits 2
super
Syntax
super level
View
All views
Parameter
level: Enter a user level in the range 0 to 3. The default is 3.
Description
The super command gives a user access to a higher level than their currently
assigned user level.
To ensure that only an authorized user can access the higher level, use the super
password command to set a password for the higher level. If the user does not
enter a valid password, the user level does not change.
Login users are classified into four levels that correspond to the four command
levels. A user can only use commands at the levels that are equal to or lower than
their user level.
Related commands: super password, quit.
Example
To change to user level 3 from the current user level.
&lt;4500&gt;super 3
Password:
The password prompt displays only if you set a password using the super
password command.
Logging in Commands
super password
41
Syntax
super password [ level level ]{ simple | cipher } password
undo super password [ level level ]
View
System View
Parameter
level: Enter a user level in the range 1 to 3. The default is 3. The password you
enter is set for the specified level.
cipher: Configure to display the password in encrypted text.
simple: Configure to display the password in plain text.
password: If the authentication is in the simple mode, the password must be in
plain text. If the authentication is in the cipher mode, the password can be either
in encrypted text or in plain text. If a plain text password is entered when cipher
mode has been selected, the password will be displayed in the configuration
settings as encrypted. A plain text password is a sequential character string of no
more than 16 digits, for example, 3Com918. The length of an encrypted password
must be 24 digits and in encrypted text, for example,
_(TT8F]Y\5SQ=^Q`MAF4&lt;1!!.
Description
Use the super password command to configure the password for changing the
user from a lower level to a higher level. To prevent unauthorized users from illegal
intrusion, user ID authentication is performed when users switch from a lower
level to a higher level. For the sake of confidentiality, on the screen the user cannot
see the password that he entered. The user has three chances to input valid
password, and then switch to the higher level. Otherwise, the original user level
will remain unchanged. Use the undo super password command to cancel the
password settings.
The password in plain text is required when performing authentication, regardless
of whether the configuration is plain text or encrypted text.
Example
To set the password for level 3 to zbr, type the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]super password level 3 simple zbr
sysname
Syntax
sysname text
undo sysname
View
System View
42
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
Parameter
text: Enter the host name of the Switch. The host name must be no more than
30 characters long. The default is 4500.
Description
Use the sysname command to configure the host name of the Switch. Use the
undo sysname command to restore the host name to the default of 4500.
Changing the hostname of the Ethernet switch will affect the prompt of
command line interface. For example, if the hostname of the Ethernet switch is
MyHost, the prompt in user view will be &lt;MyHost&gt;.
Example
To configure the hostname of the Switch to 3Com, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]sysname 3Com
[3Com]
system-view
Syntax
system-view
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Enter system-view to enter the system view from the user view.
Related commands: quit, return.
Example
To enter system view from user view, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System view: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]
telnet
Syntax
telnet { hostname | ip_address } [ service_port ]
View
User view
Parameter
hostname: Enter the host name of the remote Switch. It is configured using the
ip host command.
Logging in Commands
43
ip_address: Enter the IP address or the host name of the remote Switch. If you
enter the host name, the Switch must be set to static resolution.
service_port: Designates the management port on the remote Switch, in the
range 0 to 65535. Optional.
Description
Use the telnet command to log in to another Ethernet switch from the current
switch via Telnet for remote management. To terminate the Telnet logon, press
&lt;Ctrl+K&gt; or &lt;Ctrl+]&gt;.
If you do not specify a service_port, the default Telnet port number of 23 is
used.
Related command: display tcp status.
Example
To log in to the Ethernet switch Switch32 at IP address 10.1.1.1 from the current
Switch (Switch01), enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]user-interface vty 0 4
[4500-ui-vty0-4]authentication-mode none
&lt;Switch01&gt;telnet 10.1.1.1
Trying 10.1.1.1.....
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected to 10.1.1.1...
*********************************************************
*
All rights reserved (1997-2004)
*
*
Without the owner's prior written consent,
*
*no decompiling or reverse-engineering shall be allowed.*
*********************************************************
user-interface
Syntax
user-interface [ type ] first_number [ last_number ]
View
System view
Parameter
type: Enter the user interface type, which can be aux or vty.
first_number: Specifies the number of the first user interface to be configured.
last_number: Specifies the number of the last user interface to be configured.
Description
Using user-interface command, you can enter single user interface view or
multiple user interface views to configure the corresponding user interfaces.
Example
To configure the user interfaces with index numbers 0 to 9, enter the following:
44
CHAPTER 1: USING SYSTEM ACCESS COMMANDS
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]user-interface 0 9
[SW4500-ui0-9]
This example command selects two AUX (Console) port user interfaces and two
VTY user interfaces (VTY 0, VTY 1). You can now assign access levels to these
interfaces using the user privilege level command.
user privilege level
Syntax
user privilege level level
undo user privilege level
View
User interface view
Parameter
level: Enter the level of command that a user can access, in the range 0 to 3.
Description
Use the user privilege level level command to configure the command level
that a user can access from the specified user interface. The user can use all the
available commands at this command level. Use the undo user privilege level
command to restore the default command level. By default, a user can access all
commands at Level 3 after logging in through the AUX user interface, and all
commands at Level 0 after logging in through a VTY user interface.
Example
To configure a user to access command level 0 after logging in from the VTY 0
user interface, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]user privilege level 0
When the user Telnets from the VTY 0 user interface to the switch, the terminal
displays commands at level 0, as shown below:
&lt;SW4500&gt;?
User view commands:
debugging
Debugging functions
language-mode
Specify the language environment
ping
Ping function
quit
Exit from current command view
super
Privilege current user a specified priority level
telnet
Establish one TELNET connection
tracert
Trace route function
undo
Negate a command or set its default
2
USING PORT COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
■
copy configuration
■
broadcast-suppression
■
description
■
display interface
■
display loopback-detection
■
display port
■
display unit
■
duplex
■
flow-control
■
interface
■
loopback
■
loopback-detection control enable
■
loopback-detection enable
■
loopback-detection interval-time
■
loopback-detection per-vlan enable
■
mdi
■
multicast-suppression
■
port access vlan
■
port hybrid pvid vlan
■
port hybrid vlan
■
port link-type
■
port trunk permit vlan
■
port trunk pvid vlan
■
reset counters interface
■
shutdown
■
speed
■
unicast-suppression
Ethernet Port Link Aggregation Commands
■
debugging link-aggregation error
46
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
■
debugging link-aggregation event
■
debugging lacp packet
■
debugging lacp state
■
display link-aggregation summary
■
display link-aggregation verbose
■
display link-aggregation interface
■
display lacp system-id
■
lacp enable
■
lacp port-priority
■
lacp system-priority
■
link-aggregation group agg-id description
■
link-aggregation group agg-id mode
■
port link-aggregation group
■
reset lacp statistics
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
Ethernet Port
Configuration
Commands
copy configuration
47
This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
ports on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
copy configuration source { interface-type interface_number |
interface_name | aggregation-group agg-id } destination {
interface_list [ aggregation-group agg-id ] | aggregation-group
agg-id }
View
System View
Parameter
interface_type: Source port type.
interface_num: Source port number.
interface_name: Source port name, in the format of interface_name =
interface_type interface_num. For more information, see the parameter item for
the interface command.
interface_list: Destination port list, interface_list1 = { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num |
interface_name } ] &amp;&lt;1-10&gt;. &amp;&lt;1-10&gt; indicates that the former parameter can
be input 10 times repeatedly at most.
agg-id: Source or destination aggregation group ID. If it is a source aggregation
group, the port with minimum port number is the source port; if it is a destination
aggregation group, the configurations of all its member ports change to be
consistent with that of the source.
Description
Use the copy configuration command to copy the configuration of a specific
port to other ports, to ensure consistent configuration.
Example
Copy the configuration of aggregation group 1 to aggregation group 2.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]copy configuration source ethernet 1/0/1 destination ethernet
1/0/2
Copying VLAN configuration...
Copying LACP configuration...
Copying QOS configuration...
Copying STP configuration...
Copying speed/duplex configuration...
[4500]
broadcast-suppression
Syntax
broadcast-suppression { ratio | pps pps }
48
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
undo broadcast-suppression
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
ratio: Specifies the bandwidth ratio of broadcast traffic allowed on an Ethernet
port. The ratio value ranges from 1 to 100. The incremental step is 1. By default,
the ratio is 100 meaning all broadcast traffic is accepted. The smaller the ratio is,
the less bandwidth is allocated to broadcast traffic and therefore less broadcast
traffic is accepted on the Ethernet port.
pps pps: Specifies the maximum number of broadcast packets per second
accepted on an Ethernet port. Ranges from 1 to 148810 pps.
Description
Use broadcast-suppression to configure the amount of broadcast traffic that
will be accepted on a port. Once the broadcast traffic exceeds the value set by the
user, the excess broadcast traffic will be discarded. This feature can be used to
ensure network service and prevent broadcast storms.
Example
Enable a limit of 20% of the available bandwidth on a port to be allocated to
broadcast traffic. Broadcast traffic exceeding 20% of the ports bandwidth will be
discarded.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]broadcast-suppression 20
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
Specify the maximum packets per second of broadcast traffic on Ethernet1/0/1 to
be 1000.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]broadcast-suppression pps 1000
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
description
Syntax
description text
undo description
View
Ethernet Port View
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
49
Parameter
text: Enter a description of the Ethernet port. This can be a maximum of 80
characters.
Description
Use the description command to enter a description of an Ethernet port. Use
the undo description command to cancel the description.
By default, an Ethernet port does not have a description.
Example
Set the description of port Ethernet1/0/1 to be lanswitch-interface.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]description lanswitch-interface
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
display interface
Syntax
display interface [ interface_type |
interface_type interface_number ]
View
All views
Parameter
interface_type: Enter the interface type. This can be either Aux, Ethernet,
GigabitEthernet , NULL, Vlan-interface.
interface_number: Enter the interface number in the format
unit-number/0/port-number.
The unit number is a number in the range 1 to 8.
The port number is a number in the range 1 to 28 or 1 to 52 depending on the
number of ports you have on your unit.
You can use the interface_name at this command. This consists of the
interface_type and the interface_number combined as a single parameter. For
example Ethernet1/0/1.
Description
Use the display interface command to view the configuration information on
the selected interface. Along with others, this interface could be a specific port's
interface (for example, Ethernet1/0/1) or a specific VLAN interface (for example,
vlan-interface 1).
Example
To display configuration information on Ethernet port 1/0/1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display interface Ethernet 1/0/1
50
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
The information displays in the following format:
Ethernet1/0/1 current state : UP
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is
00e0-fc00-0010
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Media type is twisted pair, loopback not set
Port hardware type is 100_BASE_TX
100Mbps-speed mode, full-duplex mode
Link speed type is autonegotiation, link duplex type is
autonegotiation
Flow-control is not enabled
The Maximum Frame Length is 1536
Broadcast MAX-ratio: 100%
Allow jumbo frame to pass
PVID: 1
Mdi type: auto
Port link-type: access
Tagged
VLAN ID : none
Untagged VLAN ID : 1
Last 300 seconds input: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Last 300 seconds output: 0 packets/sec 0 bytes/sec
Input(total): 0 packets, 0 bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts
Input(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts
Input: 0 input errors, 0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles, 0 CRC
0 frame, - overruns, - aborts, - ignored, - parity errors
Output(total): 0 packets, 0 bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Output(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 pauses
Output: 0 output errors, - underruns, - buffer failures
- aborts, 0 deferred, 0 collisions, 0 late collisions
- lost carrier, - no carrier
Table 6 Output Description of the Display Interface Command
Field
Description
Ethernet1/0/1 current state
Indicates the current state of the Ethernet port (up
or down)
IP Sending frames’ format
Displays the Ethernet frame format
Hardware address
Displays the port hardware address
Description
Displays the port description
The Maximum Transmit Unit
Indicates the maximum transmit unit
Media type
Indicates the type of media
loopback not set
Displays the port loopback test state
Port hardware type
Displays the port hardware type
100 Mbps-speed mode, full-duplex
Indicates that the duplex mode and the rate have
mode, link speed type is autonegotiation, been auto-negotiated with the connected device,
link duplex type is autonegotiation
and have been set to 100 Mbps full-duplex.
Flow control is not enabled
Port flow control state
The Maximum Frame Length
Indicates the maximum length of the Ethernet
frames that can pass through the port
Broadcast MAX ratio
Port broadcast storm suppression ratio
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
51
Table 6 Output Description of the Display Interface Command
Allow jumbo frame to pass
Indicates that jumbo frame are allowed to pass
through the port
PVID
Indicates the port default VLAN ID.
Mdi type
Indicates the cable type
Port link-type
Indicates the port link type
Tagged VLAN ID
Indicates the VLANs with packets tagged
Untagged VLAN ID
Indicates the VLANs with packets untagged
Last 300 minutes input rate:
0 packets/sec, 0 bytes/sec
Displays the input/output rate and the number of
packets that were passed on this port in the last
300 seconds
Last 300 minutes output rate:
0 packets/sec, 0 bytes/sec
Input(total): 0 packets, 0 bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts
The statistics information of input/output packets
and errors on this port. A “-” indicates that the
item isn't supported by the switch.
Input(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts
Input: 0 input errors, 0 runts, 0 giants,
0 throttles, 0 CRC
0 frame, - overruns, - aborts, ignored, - parity errors
Output(total): 0 packets, 0 bytes
- broadcasts, - multicasts, - pauses
Output(normal): 0 packets, 0 bytes
0 broadcasts, 0 multicasts, 0 pauses
Output: 0 output errors, - underruns, buffer failures
- aborts, 0 deferred, 0 collisions, 0
late collisions
- lost carrier, - no carrier
display
loopback-detection
Syntax
display loopback-detection
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display loopback-detection command to view whether the port
loopback detection has been enabled. If it has been enabled, then the time
interval of the detection and the current port loopback information will also be
displayed.
Example
To display if the port loopback detection is enabled, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display loopback-detection
52
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
The details display in the following format:
Port Ethernet1/0/1 loopback-detection is running
system Loopback-detection is running
Detection interval time is 30 seconds
There is no port existing loopback link
Table 7 Output Description of the Display Loopback-detection Command
Field
Description
Port Ethernet1/0/1 loopback-detection is running
display port
System Loopback-detection is running
System Loopback-detection is enabled
Detection interval time is 30 seconds
The detection interval is 30 seconds
There is no port existing loopback link
No port is in the loopback state
Syntax
display port { hybrid | trunk }
View
All views
Parameter
hybrid: Enter to display the hybrid ports.
trunk: Enter to display the trunked ports.
Description
Use the display port hybrid command to view the ports whose link type is
hybrid. Use the display port trunk command to view the ports whose link type
is trunk.
Example
To display the currently configured hybrid ports, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display port hybrid
The details display in the following format:
The following hybrid ports exist:
Ethernet1/0/1
Ethernet1/0/2
This example indicates that the current configuration has two hybrid ports,
Ethernet1/0/1 and Ethernet1/0/2.
display unit
Syntax
display unit unit-id interface
View
Any view
Parameter
unit-id: Specifies Unit ID, ranging from 1 to 8.
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
53
Description
Using display unit unit-id interface command, you can view all port
interfaces for the specified unit.
Example
Display the port information for all ports on Unit 1.
&lt;4500&gt;display unit 1 interface
Aux1/0/0 current state :DOWN
Line protocol current state :DOWN
Internet protocol processing : disabled
Description : Aux1/0/0 Interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
Data drive mode: interactive
5 minutes input rate 0.0 bytes/sec, 0.0 packets/sec
5 minutes output rate 0.0 bytes/sec, 0.0 packets/sec
0 packets input, 1000 bytes
0 packets output, 27317 bytes
error: Parity 0, Frame 0, Overrun 0, FIFO 0
DCD=UP DTR=UP DSR=UP RTS=UP CTS=UP
Ethernet1/0/1 current state : DOWN
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is
00e0-fc00-3900
(Omitted)
duplex
Syntax
duplex { auto | full | half }
undo duplex
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameters
auto: Enter to set the port to auto-negotiation.
full: Enter to set the port to full-duplex.
half: Enter to set the port to half-duplex.
Description
Use the duplex command to configure the duplex mode of an Ethernet port to
auto-negotiation, full duplex or half-duplex. Use the undo duplex command to
restore the duplex mode of a port to the default mode (auto-negotiation).
Related command: speed.
Example
To configure the Ethernet port “Ethernet1/0/1” to auto-negotiation, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
54
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]duplex auto
flow-control
Syntax
flow-control
undo flow-control
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameters
None
Description
Use the flow-control command to enable flow control on an Ethernet port. This
avoids discarding data packets due to congestion. Use the undo flow-control
command to disable flow control.
By default, flow control is disabled.
Example
To enable flow control on port “Ethernet1/0/1”, enter the following.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]flow-control
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
interface
Syntax
interface interface_type interface_num | interface_name
View
System View
Parameter
interface_type: Enter the interface type. This can be either Aux, Ethernet,
GigabitEthernet , NULL, Vlan-interface.
interface_number: Enter the interface number in the format
unit-number/0/port-number.
The unit number is a number in the range 1 to 8.
The port number is a number in the range 1 to 28 or 1 to 52 depending on the
number of ports you have on your unit.
You can use the interface_name at this command. This consists of the
interface_type and the interface_number combined as a single parameter. For
example Ethernet1/0/1.
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
55
Description
Use the command interface interface_type interface_number to enter the
interface of the specified port.
If you want to configure the parameters of an Ethernet port, you must first use
this command to enter the Ethernet port view.
Example
To enter the interface for port “Ethernet1/0/1”, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet1/0/1
[4500-ethernet1/0/1]
loopback
Syntax
loopback { external | internal }
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
external: External loop test.
internal: Internal loop test.
Description
Use the loopback command to configure the Ethernet port to perform the
loopback test to check if the Ethernet port works normally. The loop test will finish
automatically after being performed for a while.
By default, the Ethernet port will not perform the loopback test.
Example
To perform the internal loop test for Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]loopback internal
#Apr 2 02:46:02:29 2000 4500 L2INF/2/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 Trap 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4: portIndex is 4227626, ifAdminStatus is 1,
ifOperStatus is 1
%Apr 2 02:46:02:225 2000 4500 L2INF/5/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 Ethernet1/0/1: is UP
%Apr 2 02:46:02:342 2000 4500 STP/2/SPEED:- 1 -Ethernet1/0/1's
speed changed
!
#Apr 2 02:46:02:521 2000 4500 L2INF/2/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1
-Trap 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.3: portIndex is 4227626, ifAdminStatus is 1,
ifOperStatus is 2
56
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
Loop internal succeeded.
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]loopback internal
loopback-detection
control enable
Syntax
loopback-detection control enable
undo loopback-detection control enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the loopback-detection control enable command to enable loopback
detection control function on a Trunk port or Hybrid port. Use the undo
loopback-detection control enable command to disable loopback detection
control function on a Trunk port or Hybrid port.
This command controls the operating status of the port, when the loopback
detection function is enabled and loopback is detected on a Trunk or Hybrid port.
When this function is enabled and loopback is detected on a Trunk or Hybrid port,
the system begins to control the operating status of the port. When this function
is disabled and loopback is found, the system just reports a Trap message but has
no control over the operating status of the Trunk or Hybrid port.
By default, the loopback detection control function on Trunk or Hybrid ports is
disabled.
This command has no effect on Access ports.
Example
Enable port loopback detection control.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port link-type trunk
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]loopback-detection control enable
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
loopback-detection
enable
Syntax
loopback-detection enable
undo loopback-detection enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
57
Parameter
None
Description
Use the loopback-detection enable command to enable port loopback
detection. If there is a loopback port found, the switch will put it under control.
Use the undo loopback-detection enable command to disable port loopback
detection.
Loopback detection of a specified port only functions after port loopback
detection is enabled in the System or Ethernet port view. By default, port loopback
detection is disabled.
Related commands: display loopback-detection
Example
To enable port loopback detection, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]loopback-detection enable
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]loopback-detection enable
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
loopback-detection
interval-time
Syntax
loopback-detection interval-time time
undo loopback-detection interval-time
View
System View
Parameter
time: Specifies the interval of monitoring external loopback conditions of the
port. It ranges from 5 to 300, measured in seconds.
By default, the interval is 30 seconds.
Description
Use the loopback-detection interval-time command to configure the
detection interval for the external loopback condition of each port. Use the undo
loopback-detection interval-time command to restore the default interval.
Related commands: display loopback-detection
Example
To configure the detection interval for the external loopback condition of each
port to 10 seconds, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]loopback-detection interval-time 10
58
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
[4500]
loopback-detection
per-vlan enable
Syntax
loopback-detection per-vlan enable
undo loopback-detection per-vlan enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the loopback-detection per-vlan enable command to configure the
system to perform loopback detection on all VLANs on Trunk and Hybrid ports.
Use the undo loopback-detection per-vlan enable command to configure the
system to only perform loopback detection on the default VLANs on the port.
By default, the system performs loopback detection to the default VLAN on Trunk
and Hybrid ports.
Example
Configure the detection interval for the external loopback condition of each port
to 10 seconds.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port link-type trunk
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]loopback-detection per-vlan enable
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
mdi
Syntax
mdi { across | auto | normal }
undo mdi
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
across: Enter to configure the network cable type to cross-over cable. Not
available on the Switch 4500.
auto: Enter to configure the use of either straight-through cable or cross-over
cable.
normal: Enter to configure the network cable type to straight-through cable. Not
available on the Switch 4500.
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
59
Description
■
Use the mdi command to configure the network cable type for an Ethernet
port.
■
Use the undo mdi command to restore the default type. By default, the
network cable type is recognized automatically (the mdi auto command).
Note that this command only has effect on 10/100BASE-T and
10/100/1000BASE-T ports. The Switch 4500 only supports auto (auto-sensing). If
you enter another type, an error message displays.
Example
To configure the network cable type of port “Ethernet1/0/1” as cross-over cable,
enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]mdi across
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
multicast-suppression
Syntax
multicast-suppression { ratio | pps pps}
undo multicast-suppression
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
ratio: Specifies the bandwidth ratio of multicast traffic allowed on an Ethernet
port. The ratio value ranges from 1 to 100. The incremental step is 1. By default,
the ratio is 100 meaning all multicast traffic is accepted. The smaller the ratio is,
the less bandwidth is allocated to multicast traffic and therefore less broadcast
traffic is accepted on the Ethernet port.
pps pps: Specifies the maximum number of multicast packets per second accepted
on an Ethernet port. Ranges from 1 to 148810 pps.
Description
Use multicast-suppression to configure the amount of multicast traffic that will
be accepted on a port. Once the multicast traffic exceeds the value set by the user,
the excess multicast traffic will be discarded. This feature can be used to ensure
network service and prevent multicast storms.
Example
Enable a limit of 20% of the available bandwidth on a port to be allocated to
multicast traffic. Multicast traffic exceeding 20% of the ports bandwidth will be
discarded.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
60
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]multicast-suppression 20
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
Specify the maximum packets per second of the multicast traffic on an
Ethernet1/0/1 as 1000 Mpps.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]multicast-suppression pps 1000
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
port access vlan
Syntax
port access vlan vlan_id
undo port access vlan
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter a VLAN ID in the range 2 to 4094, as defined in IEEE 802.1Q.
Description
■
Use the port access vlan command to assign the access port to a specified
VLAN.
■
Use the undo port access vlan command to remove the access port from
the VLAN.
Example
To assign Ethernet port 1/0/1 to VLAN3, enter the following.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]vlan 3
[4500-vlan3]quit
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port access vlan 3
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
port hybrid pvid vlan
Syntax
port hybrid pvid vlan vlan_id
undo port hybrid pvid
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter a VLAN ID in the range 2 to 4094, as defined in IEEE 802.1Q. The
default is 1.
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
61
Description
Use the port hybrid pvid vlan command to configure the default VLAN ID of
the hybrid port. Use the undo port hybrid pvid command to restore the default
VLAN ID of the hybrid port.
Hybrid port can be configured together with the isolate-user-vlan. But if the
default VLAN has set mapping in the isolate-user-vlan, the default VLAN ID cannot
be modified. If you want to modify it, cancel the mapping first.
The default VLAN ID of local hybrid port must be consistent with that of the peer
one, otherwise, the packets cannot be properly transmitted.
Related command: port link-type.
Example
To configure the default VLAN of the hybrid port Ethernet1/0/1 to VLAN100, enter
the following.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port link-type hybrid
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port hybrid pvid vlan 100
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
port hybrid vlan
Syntax
port hybrid vlan vlan_id_list { tagged | untagged }
undo port hybrid vlan vlan_id_list
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
vlan_id_list: Enter a VLAN ID, or more than one VLAN ID, in the range 2 to
4094. The hybrid port will be added to the specified VLANs. This can be a single
VLAN, a series of individual VLANs separated by a space, or the first VLAN in a
range of VLANs (vlan_id to last_vlan_id).
You can enter up to ten vlan_id parameters in one port hybrid vlan
command.
tagged: Enter to tag the port for the specified VLAN.
untagged: Enter to leave the port untagged for the specified VLAN.
Description
Use the port hybrid vlan command to add the port to the specified VLAN(s).
The port needs to have been made a hybrid port before you can do this. See the
related command below. Use the undo port hybrid vlan command to remove
the port from the specified VLAN(s).
62
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
A hybrid port can belong to multiple VLANs. A port can only be added to a VLAN
if the VLAN has already been created. See the vlan vlan-vid command.
Related command: port link-type.
Example
To add the port Ethernet1/0/1 to VLAN 2, VLAN 4 and all VLANs in the range 50 to
100 as a tagged port, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port link-type hybrid
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]quit
[4500]vlan 2
[4500-vlan2]quit
[4500]interface e1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port hybrid vlan 2 4 50 to 100 tagged
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
port link-type
Syntax
port link-type { access | hybrid | trunk | xrn-fabric }
undo port link-type
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
access: Enter to configure the port as an access port.
hybrid: Enter to configure the port as a hybrid port
trunk: Enter to configure the port as a trunk port.
xrn-fabric: Enter to configure the port as a Fabric port.
Description
Use the port link-type command to configure the link type of the Ethernet
port. Use the undo port link-type command to restore the port as default
status. By default, a port is an access port.
A port on a Switch can be configured as an access port, a hybrid port, a trunk port
or a fabric port. However, to reconfigure between hybrid and trunk link types, you
must first restore the default, or access, link type.
Only the Gigabit combo ports can be used to interconnect the Switch units to
form a stack.
Example
To configure the Ethernet port Ethernet1/0/1 as a trunk port, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
63
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port link-type trunk
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
port trunk permit vlan
Syntax
port trunk permit vlan {vlan_id_list | all}
undo port trunk permit vlan {vlan_id_list| all}
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter a VLAN ID, or more than one VLAN ID, in the range 2 to 4094.
The trunk port will be added to the specified VLANs. This can be a single VLAN, a
series of individual VLANs separated by a space, or the first VLAN in a range of
VLANs. If this is the first VLAN in a range use the last_vlan_id parameter to
indicate the last VLAN in the range (vlan_id to last_vlan_id).
You can enter up to ten vlan_id parameters at one port trunk permit vlan
command.
all: Enter to add the trunk port to all VLANs.
Description
Use the port trunk permit vlan command to add a trunk port to one VLAN, a
selection of VLANs or all VLANs. Use the undo port trunk permit vlan
command to remove a trunk port from one VLAN, a selection of VLANs or all
VLANs.
A trunk port can belong to multiple VLANs. If the port trunk permit vlan
command is used many times, then the VLAN enabled to pass on trunk port is the
set of these vlan_id_list.
Related command: port link-type.
Example
To add the trunk port Ethernet1/0/1 to VLAN 2, VLAN 4 and all VLANs in the range
50-100, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port link-type trunk
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port trunk permit vlan 2 4 50 to 100
Please wait... Done.
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
port trunk pvid vlan
Syntax
port trunk pvid vlan vlan_id
undo port trunk pvid
64
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter a VLAN ID in the range 2 to 4094, as defined in IEEE802.1Q. This
is the VLAN that you want to be the default VLAN for a trunk port.
The default is 1.
Description
Use the port trunk pvid vlan command to configure the default VLAN ID for a
trunk port. Use the undo port trunk pvid command to restore the default VLAN
ID for a trunk port.
The default VLAN ID of local trunk port should be consistent with that of the peer
one, otherwise packets cannot be properly transmitted.
Related command: port link-type.
Example
To configure the trunk port Ethernet1/0/1 to the default VLAN of 100, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port link-type trunk
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port trunk pvid vlan 100
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
reset counters interface
Syntax
reset counters interface [ interface_type | interface_type
interface_num | interface_name]
View
User view
Parameter
interface_type: Specifies the port type.
interface_num: Specifies the port number.
interface_name: Specifies the port name in the interface_name=
interface_type interface_num format.
For parameter description, refer to the interface command.
Description
Use the reset counters interface command to reset the statistical information
on the port and count the related information again on the port for the user.
If you do not enter a port type, or port type and port number, information is
cleared from all ports on the Switch. If only the port type is specified, all the
information on ports of this type will be cleared. If both port type and port
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
65
number are specified, the information on the specified port will be cleared. After
802.1x is enabled, the port information cannot be reset.
Example
To reset statistical information on Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;reset counters interface ethernet1/0/1
&lt;4500&gt;
shutdown
Syntax
shutdown
undo shutdown
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the shutdown command to disable an Ethernet port. Use the undo shutdown
command to enable an Ethernet port.
By default, the Ethernet port is enabled.
Example
To disable and then enable Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]shutdown
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]undo shutdown
speed
Syntax
For a 100 Mbps Ethernet port, the parameters for this command are as follows:
speed { 10 | 100 | auto }
For a 1000 Mbps Ethernet port, the parameters for this command are as follows:
speed { 10 | 100 | 1000 | auto }
The undo form of this command is:
undo speed
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
10: Enter to set the port speed to 10 Mbps.
100: Enter to set the port speed to 100 Mbps.
66
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
1000: Enter to set the port speed to 1000 Mbps. (Only available on Gigabit ports).
auto: Enter to set the port speed to auto-negotiation.
Description
Use the speed command to configure the port speed. Use the undo speed
command to restore the default speed. By default, the speed is auto.
Related command: duplex.
Example
To configure the port speed of port Ethernet1/0/1 to 10 Mbps, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]speed 10
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
unicast-suppression
Syntax
unicast-suppression { ratio | pps pps }
undo unicast-suppression
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
ratio: Specifies the bandwidth ratio of unicast traffic allowed on an Ethernet
port. The ratio value ranges from 1 to 100. The incremental step is 1. By default,
the ratio is 100 meaning all unicast traffic is accepted. The smaller the ratio is, the
less bandwidth is allocated to unicast traffic and therefore less broadcast traffic is
accepted on the Ethernet port.
pps pps: Specifies the maximum number of unicast packets per second accepted
on an Ethernet port. Ranges from 1 to 148810 pps.
Description
Use unicast-suppression to configure the amount of unicast traffic that will be
accepted on a port. Once the multicast traffic exceeds the value set by the user,
the excess unicast traffic will be discarded. This feature can be used to ensure
network service and prevent unicast storms.
Example
Enable a limit of 20% of the available bandwidth on a port to be allocated to
unicast traffic. Unicast traffic exceeding 20% of the ports bandwidth will be
discarded.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
Ethernet Port Configuration Commands
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]unicast-suppression 20
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
Specify the maximum packets per second of the unicast traffic on an
Ethernet1/0/1 as 1000 Mpps.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]unicast-suppression pps 1000
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
67
68
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
Ethernet Port Link
Aggregation
Commands
debugging
link-aggregation error
This section describes the commands you can use to configure Ethernet Port LInk
Aggregation on the Switch.
Syntax
debugging link-aggregation error
undo debugging link-aggregation error
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging link-aggregation error command to enable link
aggregation error debugging. Use the undo debugging link-aggregation
error command to disable link aggregation error debugging.
Example
To enable link aggregation error debugging, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;debugging link-aggregation error
debugging
link-aggregation event
Syntax
debugging link-aggregation event
undo debugging link-aggregation event
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging link-aggregation event command to enable link
aggregation events debugging. Use the undo debugging link-aggregation
event command to disable link aggregation events debugging.
Example
To enable link aggregation events debugging, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;debugging link-aggregation event
debugging lacp packet
Syntax
debugging lacp packet [ interface { interface_type interface_number
| interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num |
interface_name } ] ]
Ethernet Port Link Aggregation Commands
69
undo debugging lacp packet [ interface { interface_type
interface_number | interface_name } [ to { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } ] ]
View
User View
Parameter
interface { interface_type interface_ num | interface_name } [ to {
interface_type interface_ num | interface_name } ]: Specifies ports. You
can specify multiple sequential ports with the to parameter, instead of specifying
only one port.
interface_name: Specifies port name, in the format of interface_name =
interface_type interface_num.
interface_type: Specifies port type and interface_num port number.
For more information, see the parameter item for the interface command.
Description
Use the debugging lacp packet command to enable LACP packets debugging at
a designated port or ports. Use the undo debugging lacp packet command to
disable LACP packets debugging at a designated port or ports.
Example
To enable LACP packets debugging at Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;debugging lacp packet interface ethernet1/0/1
debugging lacp state
Syntax
debugging lacp state [ interface { interface_type interface_number |
interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num | interface_name
} ] ] { { actor-churn | mux | partner-churn | ptx | rx }* | all }
undo debugging lacp state [ interface { interface_type
interface_number | interface_name } [ to { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } ] ] { { actor-churn | mux |
partner-churn | ptx | rx }* | all }
View
User View
Parameter
interface { interface_type interface_num | interface_name } [ to {
interface_type interface_num | interface_name } ]: Specifies ports. You
can specify multiple sequential ports with the to parameter, instead of specifying
only one port.
70
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
interface_name: Specifies port name, in the format of interface_name =
interface_type interface_num.
interface_type: Specifies port type and interface_num port number.
For more information, see the parameter item for the interface command.
actor-churn: Debugging actor-churn state machine.
mux: Debugging MUX state machine.
partner-churn: Debugging partner-churn state machine.
ptx: Debugging PTX state machine.
rx: Debugging RX state machine.
all: Debugging all state machines.
Description
Use the debugging lacp state command to enable LACP state machines
debugging on a designated port or ports. Use the undo debugging lacp state
command to disable LACP state machines debugging on a designated port or
ports.
Example
To enable all LACP state machines debugging.
&lt;4500&gt;debugging lacp state all
display link-aggregation
summary
Syntax
display link-aggregation summary
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display link-aggregation summary command to view summary
information of all aggregation groups, including actor system ID, aggregation
group ID, aggregate group type, partner system ID, number of selected ports,
number of standby ports, load sharing type and master port number.
Example
To display summary information of all aggregation information, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;display link-aggregation summary
Aggregation Group Type: D -- Dynamic, S -- Static, M -- Manual
Loadsharing Type: Shar – Loadsharing, NonS – Non-Loadsharing
Actor ID: 0x8000, 00e0-fcff-ff04
Ethernet Port Link Aggregation Commands
71
AL
AL
Partner ID
Select Standby Share
Master
ID
Type
Ports
Ports
Type
Port
------------------------------------------------------------------1
D
0x8000,00e0-fcff-ff01 1
0
NonS Ethernet4/0/1
10
M
none
1
0
NonS Ethernet4/0/2
20
S
0x8000,00e0-fcff-ff01 1
0
NonS Ethernet4/0/3
display link-aggregation
verbose
Syntax
display link-aggregation verbose [ agg_id ]
View
Any view
Parameter
agg_id: Aggregation group ID, which must be a valid existing ID, in the range of
1 to 416.
Description
Use the display link-aggregation verbose command to view detailed
information of a link aggregation, including aggregation ID, the type of
aggregation, load-sharing type, detailed local information (member ports, port
status, port priority, LACP state flag and operation key), and detailed remote
information (indexes of remote ports, port priority, LACP state flag, operation key
and system ID.)
Note that unlike a dynamic aggregation, a manual aggregation has no protocol to
get the remote peer information of the partner. Therefore, every item for the
remote peer is 0. This does not indicate the actual state of the remote peer.
Example
To display detailed information of aggregation group 1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display link-aggregation verbose 1
Loadsharing Type: Shar -- Loadsharing, NonS -- Non-Loadsharing
Aggregation ID: 1, AggregationType: Manual, Loadsharing Type: NonS
Aggregation Description:
System ID: 0x8000, 000f-cbb7-2e00
Port Status: S -- Selected, U -- Unselected
Local:
Port
Status Priority Flag Oper-Key
-------------------------------------------------------------------Ethernet1/0/2
U
32768
0x00 1
Ethernet1/0/3
U
32768
0x00 1
Ethernet1/0/4
S
32768
0x00 1
Remote:
Actor
Partner Priority Flag Oper-Key SystemID
-------------------------------------------------------------------Ethernet1/0/2
0
0
0x00 0 0x0,0000-0000-0000
Ethernet1/0/3
0
0
0x00 0 0x0,0000-0000-0000
Ethernet1/0/4
0
0
0x00 0 0x0,0000-0000-0000
&lt;4500&gt;
72
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
display link-aggregation
interface
Syntax
display link-aggregation interface { interface_type interface_number
| interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface-num |
interface_name } ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface { interface_type interface_ num | interface_name } [ to {
interface_type interface_ num | interface_name } ]: Specifies ports. You
can specify multiple sequential ports with the to parameter, instead of specifying
only one port.
interface_name: Specifies port name, in the format of interface_name =
interface_type interface_num.
interface_type: Specifies port type and interface_num port number.
For more information, see the parameter item for the interface command.
Description
Use the display link-aggregation interface command to view detailed link
aggregation information at a designated port, including aggregation group ID for
the port, port priority, operation key, LACP state flag, partner information (system
ID, port number, port priority, operation key, LACP state flag, LACP packet
statistics).
Note that unlike a dynamic aggregation, a manual aggregation has no protocol to
get the remote peer information of the partner. Therefore, every item for the
remote peer is 0. This does not indicate the actual state of the remote peer.
Example
To display detailed link aggregation information of a link aggregation member
port, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display link-aggregation interface ethernet4/0/1
If the aggregation has been created manually, the display will be similar to the
following:
Ethernet4/0/1:
Attached AggID: 1
Local:
Port-Priority: 32768, Oper key: 1, Flag: 0x00
Remote:
System ID: 0x0, 0000-0000-0000
Port Number: 0, Port-Priority: 0, Oper-key: 0, Flag: 0x00
If the aggregation is static or dynamic, the display will be similar to the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display link-aggregation interface ethernet4/0/1
Ethernet4/0/1:
Attached AggID: 20
Ethernet Port Link Aggregation Commands
73
Local:
Port-Priority: 32768, Oper key: 2, Flag: 0x3d
Remote:
System ID: 0x8000, 000e-84a6-fb00
Port Number: 2, Port-Priority: 32768 , Oper-key: 10, Flag: 0x3d
Received LACP Packets: 8 packet(s), Illegal: 0 packet(s)
Sent LACP Packets: 9 packet(s)
Related command: display link-aggregation verbose.
display lacp system-id
Syntax
display lacp system-id
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display lacp system-id command to view actor system ID, including
system priority and system MAC address.
Related command: link-aggregation.
Example
To display the local system ID.
&lt;4500&gt;display lacp system-id
Actor System ID: 0x8000, 00e0-fc00-0100
lacp enable
Syntax
lacp enable
undo lacp enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the lacp enable command to enable LACP.
Use the undo lacp enable command to disable LACP.
The Switch will select the lowest port number as the master port for the link
aggregation. This applies to all types of link aggregation. If the aggregation spans
a stack of units (only avaliable on the Switch 4500-EI) and the same ports are
used, the unit number will be the tie-breaker. For example, 1/0/1 and 2/0/1 are in
an aggregation. Port 1/0/1 will be the master port.
74
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
Example
To enable LACP at Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]lacp enable
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
lacp port-priority
Syntax
lacp port-priority port-priority-value
undo lacp port-priority
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
port-priority-value: Port priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. By default, it is
32768.
Description
Use the lacp port priority command to configure port priority value. Use the
undo lacp port-priority command to restore the default value.
Related commands: display link-aggregation verbose and display
link-aggregation interface.
Example
To set port priority as 64, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]lacp port-priority 64
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
lacp system-priority
Syntax
lacp system-priority system-priority-value
undo lacp system-priority
View
System View
Parameter
system-priority-value: System priority, ranging from 0 to 65535. By default, it
is 32768.
Description
Use the lacp system-priority command to configure system priority value.
Ethernet Port Link Aggregation Commands
75
Use the undo lacp system-priority command to restore the default value.
Related command: display lacp system-id.
Example
To set system priority as 64, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]lacp system-priority 64
[4500]
link-aggregation group
agg-id description
Syntax
link-aggregation group agg_id description alname
undo link-aggregation group agg-id description
View
System View
Parameter
agg_id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 416.
alname: Aggregation group name, character string with 1 to 32 characters.
Description
Use the link-aggregation group agg_id description command to configure
descriptor for an aggregation group. Use the undo link-aggregation group
agg-id description command to delete aggregation group descriptor.
Related command: display link-aggregation verbose.
Example
To configure myal1 as the descriptor of aggregation group 22, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]link-aggregation group 22 mode manual
[4500]link-aggregation group 22 description myal1
[4500]
link-aggregation group
agg-id mode
Syntax
link-aggregation group agg_id mode { manual | static }
undo link-aggregation group agg_id
View
System View
Parameter
agg_id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 416.
76
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
manual: Manual aggregation group.
static: Static aggregation group.
Description
Use the link-aggregation group agg_id mode command to create a manual or
static aggregation group. Use the undo link-aggregation group command to
delete an aggregation group.
The Switch will select the lowest port number as the master port for the link
aggregation. This applies to all types of link aggregation. If the aggregation spans
a stack of units and the same ports are used, the unit number will be the
tie-breaker. For example, 1/0/1 and 2/0/1 are in an aggregation. Port 1/0/1 will be
the master port.
A manual or static aggregation group can have up to eight ports. You can use the
link-aggregation group agg-id mode command to change an existing dynamic
aggregation group into a manual or static one. If the port number in a group
exceeds eight, this operation fails and the system prompts you about the
configuration failure.
Related command: display link-aggregation summary.
Example
To create manual aggregation group 22, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]link-aggregation group 22 mode manual
port link-aggregation
group
Syntax
port link-aggregation group agg_id
undo port link-aggregation group
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
agg_id: Aggregation group ID, in the range of 1 to 416.
Description
Use the port link-aggregation group agg_id command to add an Ethernet
port into a manual or static aggregation group. Use the undo port
link-aggregation group command, to delete an Ethernet port from a manual or
static aggregation group.
Related command: display link-aggregation verbose.
Example
To add Ethernet1/0/1 into aggregation group 22, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
Ethernet Port Link Aggregation Commands
77
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]link-aggregation group 22 mode manual
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port link-aggregation group 22
#Apr 2 03:29:48:954 2000 4500 LAGG/2/AggPortInactive:- 1 -Trap
1.3.6.1.4.1.2
011.5.25.25.2.2: TrapIndex 31465473 Aggregation Group 22: port
member Ethernet1/
0/1 becomes INACTIVE!
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
reset lacp statistics
Syntax
reset lacp statistics [ interface { interface_type interface_number
| interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num |
interface_name } ] ]
View
User View
Parameter
interface { interface_type interface_ num | interface_name } [ to {
interface_type interface_ num | interface_name } ]: Specifies ports. You
can specify multiple sequential ports with the to parameter, instead of specifying
only one port.
interface_name: Specifies port name, in the format of interface_name =
interface_type interface_num.
interface_type: Specifies port type and interface_num port number.
For more information, see the parameter item for the interface command.
Description
Use the reset lacp statistics command to clear LACP statistics at a
designated port. If no port is specified, then LACP statistics at all ports shall be
cleared.
Related command: display link-aggregation interface.
Example
To clear LACP statistics at all Ethernet ports, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;reset lacp statistics
78
CHAPTER 2: USING PORT COMMANDS
3
USING VLAN COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
VLAN Configuration Commands
■
description
■
display interface VLAN-interface
■
display vlan
■
interface VLAN-interface
■
shutdown
■
vlan
Voice VLAN Commands
■
display voice vlan oui
■
display voice vlan status
■
voice vlan aging
■
voice vlan enable
■
voice vlan
■
voice vlan mac_address
■
voice vlan mode
■
voice vlan security enable
80
CHAPTER 3: USING VLAN COMMANDS
VLAN Configuration
Commands
description
This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
VLANs and VLAN interfaces on your system.
Syntax
description string
undo description
View
VLAN view
Parameter
string: Enter a description of the current VLAN, up to a maximum of 32
characters. For a description of a VLAN interface, the maximum is 80 characters.
Description
Use the description command to set a description for the current VLAN. Use the
undo description command to cancel the description of current VLAN.
The default description character string of the current VLAN is no description!.
The default description character string of the VLAN interface is the interface
name, for example, vlan-interface1.
Related command: display vlan.
Example
To give VLAN1 the description “RESEARCH”, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]vlan 1
[4500-vlan1]description RESEARCH
[4500-vlan1]
display interface
VLAN-interface
Syntax
display interface vlan-interface [ vlan_id ]
View
All views
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter the ID number of the VLAN interface, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Description
Use the display interface vlan-interface command to view the information
about a specific VLAN interface, or all VLAN interfaces. The information displayed
includes:
■
Current status of the interface
■
Current status of the line protocol
VLAN Configuration Commands
■
VLAN interface description
■
Maximum Transmit Unit (MTU)
■
IP address and subnet mask
■
Format of the IP frames
■
MAC hardware address.
81
Use display interface vlan-interface to display information on all VLAN
interfaces. Use display interface vlan-interface vlan_id to display
information on a specific VLAN interface
Related command: interface Vlan-interface.
Example
To display information on VLAN interface 1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display interface vlan-interface 1
The information displays in the following format:
Vlan-interface1 current state :UP
Line protocol current state :UP
IP Sending Frames' Format is PKTFMT_ETHNT_2, Hardware address is
00e0-fc00-3971
Internet Address is 161.71.61.206/24 Primary
Description : Vlan-interface1 Interface
The Maximum Transmit Unit is 1500
&lt;4500&gt;
display vlan
Syntax
display vlan [ vlan_id | all | static | dynamic ]
View
All views
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter to display information on a specified VLAN.
all: Enter to display information on all VLANs.
static: Enter to display information on VLANs created statically by the system.
dynamic: Enter to display information on VLANs created dynamically by the
system.
Description
Use the display vlan command to view related information about specific
VLANs, specific types of VLAN or all VLANs. The information includes: VLAN type,
whether the Route interface has been configured on the VLAN, the Broadcast
Suppression max-ratio, the VLAN description, and a list of the tagged and
untagged ports that belong to the VLAN. Use the command display vlan to
display a summary of the VLAN IDs of all VLANs configured on the system. Use the
82
CHAPTER 3: USING VLAN COMMANDS
command display vlan vlan_id to display information on a specific VLAN. Use
the command display vlan all to display information on all the VLANs. Use
the command display vlan dynamic to display information on VLANs created
dynamically by the system. Use the command display vlan static to display
information of VLAN created statically by the system.
Related command: vlan.
Examples
To display information about VLAN 1:
&lt;4500&gt;display vlan 1
VLAN ID: 1
VLAN Type: static
Route Interface: configured
IP Address: 161.71.61.206
Subnet Mask: 255.255.255.0
Description: VLAN 0001
Tagged
Ports:
GigabitEthernet1/0/52 GigabitEthernet2/0/27
Untagged Ports:
Ethernet1/0/1
Ethernet1/0/2
Ethernet1/0/3
Ethernet1/0/4
Ethernet1/0/5
Ethernet1/0/6
Ethernet1/0/7
Ethernet1/0/8
Ethernet1/0/9
Ethernet1/0/10
Ethernet1/0/11
Ethernet1/0/12
Ethernet1/0/13
Ethernet1/0/14
Ethernet1/0/15
Ethernet1/0/16
Ethernet1/0/17
Ethernet1/0/18
Ethernet1/0/19
Ethernet1/0/20
Ethernet1/0/21
Ethernet1/0/22
Ethernet1/0/23
Ethernet1/0/24
Ethernet1/0/25
Ethernet1/0/26
Ethernet1/0/27
Ethernet1/0/28
Ethernet1/0/29
Ethernet1/0/30
Ethernet1/0/31
Ethernet1/0/32
Ethernet1/0/33
Ethernet1/0/34
Ethernet1/0/35
Ethernet1/0/36
Ethernet1/0/37
Ethernet1/0/38
Ethernet1/0/39
Ethernet1/0/40
Ethernet1/0/41
Ethernet1/0/42
Ethernet1/0/43
Ethernet1/0/44
Ethernet1/0/45
Ethernet1/0/46
Ethernet1/0/47
Ethernet1/0/48
GigabitEthernet1/0/50 GigabitEthernet1/0/51 Ethernet2/0/1
Ethernet2/0/2
Ethernet2/0/3
Ethernet2/0/4
Ethernet2/0/5
Ethernet2/0/6
Ethernet2/0/7
Ethernet2/0/8
Ethernet2/0/9
Ethernet2/0/10
Ethernet2/0/11
Ethernet2/0/12
Ethernet2/0/13
Ethernet2/0/14
Ethernet2/0/15
Ethernet2/0/16
Ethernet2/0/17
Ethernet2/0/18
Ethernet2/0/19
Ethernet2/0/20
Ethernet2/0/21
Ethernet2/0/22
Ethernet2/0/23
Ethernet2/0/24 GigabitEthernet2/0/25
GigabitEthernet2/0/26 GigabitEthernet2/0/28
&lt;4500&gt;
interface VLAN-interface
Syntax
interface vlan-interface vlan_id
undo interface vlan-interface vlan_id
VLAN Configuration Commands
83
View
System View
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter the ID of the VLAN interface you want to configure, in the range
1 to 4094. Note that VLAN1 is the default VLAN and cannot be deleted.
Description
Use the interface vlan-interface command to enter a VLAN interface view
and use the related configuration commands. Use the undo interface
vlan-interface command to exit the current VLAN interface.
Related command: display interface vlan-interface.
Example
To enter the interface view of VLAN1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500] interface vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]
port
Syntax
port interface_list
undo port interface_list
View
VLAN view
Parameter
interface_list: list of Ethernet ports to be added to or deleted from a certain
VLAN, expressed as interface_list= {{ interface_type interface_num |
interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num | interface_name } ]
}&amp;&lt;1-10&gt;.
interface_type is the interface type, interface_num is the interface number
and interface_name is the interface name. For their meanings and value range, see
the parameter of Port in this document. The interface number after keyword to
must be larger than or equal to the port number before to.
&amp;&lt;1-10&gt;: Represents the repeatable times of parameters, 1 is the minimal and 10
is the maximal.
Description
Using the port command, you can add one port or one group of ports to a VLAN.
Using the undo port command, you can cancel one port or one group of ports
from a VLAN.
You can add/delete trunk port and hybrid ports to/from a VLAN by port and undo
port commands in Ethernet Port View, but not in VLAN View.
For the related command, see display vlan.
84
CHAPTER 3: USING VLAN COMMANDS
Example
Add Ethernet1/0/2 through Ethernet1/0/4 to VLAN 2.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]vlan 2
[4500-vlan2]port ethernet1/0/2 to ethernet1/0/4
shutdown
Syntax
shutdown
undo shutdown
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the shutdown command to disable the VLAN interface. Use the undo
shutdown command to enable the VLAN interface.
By default, when all Ethernet ports are in DOWN status in VLAN interface, the
VLAN interface is in DOWN status and is disabled. When there is one or more
Ethernet ports in VLAN interface are in UP status, the VLAN interface is UP.
This command can be used to start the interface after the related parameters and
protocols of VLAN interface are set. Or when the VLAN interface fails, the
interface can be shut down first and then restarted, in this way, the interface may
be restored to normal status. Shutting down or starting VLAN interface will not
take any effect on any Ethernet port of this VLAN.
Example
Restart interface after shutting down the interface.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]vlan 2
[4500-vlan2]quit
[4500]interface vlan-interface 2
[4500-Vlan-interface2]shutdown
%Apr 2 00:06:15:277 2000 4500 L2INF/5/VLANIF LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1
- Vlan-interface1: is DOWN
[4500-Vlan-interface2]undo shutdown
#Apr 2 00:05:27:793 2000 4500 L2INF/2/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 Trap 1.3.6.1.6.3.1.1.5.4: portIndex is 4227626, ifAdminStatus is 1,
ifOperStatus is 1
%Apr 2 00:05:27:980 2000 4500 L2INF/5/PORT LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 Ethernet1/0/1: is UP
%Apr 2 00:05:28:96 2000 4500 L2INF/5/VLANIF LINK STATUS CHANGE:- 1 Vlan-interface1: is UP
Voice VLAN Configuration Commands
85
%Apr 2 00:05:28:213 2000 4500 STP/2/SPEED:- 1 -Ethernet1/0/1's
speed changed
!
%Apr 2 00:05:28:319 2000 4500 STP/2/PFWD:- 1 -Ethernet1/0/1 is
forwarding!
[4500-Vlan-interface2]
vlan
Syntax
vlan vlan_id
undo vlan vlan_id { [to vlan_id ] | all }
View
System View
Parameter
vlan_id: Enter the ID of the VLAN you want to configure, in the range 1 to
4094.
all: Delete all VLANs.
Description
Use the vlan command to enter the VLAN view, and use the related configuration
commands. Use the undo vlan command to exit from the specified VLAN. VLAN 1
is default VLAN and cannot be deleted.
Related commands: display vlan.
Example
To enter VLAN 1 view, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]vlan 1
Voice VLAN
Configuration
Commands
display voice vlan oui
This section describes the commands you can use to configure voice VLANs.
Syntax
display voice vlan oui
View
Any view
Parameter
None
86
CHAPTER 3: USING VLAN COMMANDS
Description
Use the display voice vlan oui command to display the OUI address supported by
the current system and its relative features.
Related commands: voice vlan vlan_id enable, voice vlan enable.
Example
To display the OUI address of Voice VLAN, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]display voice vlan oui
Oui Address
00e0-bb00-0000
0003-6b00-0000
00e0-7500-0000
00d0-1e00-0000
00aa-bb00-0000
display voice vlan status
Mask
ffff-ff00-0000
ffff-ff00-0000
ffff-ff00-0000
ffff-ff00-0000
ffff-ff00-0000
Description
3com phone
Cisco phone
Polycom phone
Pingtel phone
ABC
Syntax
display voice vlan status
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display voice vlan status command to display the relative Voice
VLAN features including the Voice VLAN status, the configuration mode, the
current Voice VLAN port status etc.
Related commands: voice vlan vlan_id enable, voice vlan enable.
Example
To enable the Voice VLAN on VLAN 2 and display the Voice VLAN status, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]display voice vlan status
Voice Vlan status: ENABLE
Voice Vlan ID: 2
Voice Vlan configuration mode: AUTO
Voice Vlan security mode: Security
Voice Vlan aging time: 100 minutes
Current voice vlan enabled port:
-------------------------------Ethernet1/0/2, Ethernet1/0/3,
Voice VLAN Configuration Commands
voice vlan aging
87
Syntax
voice vlan aging minutes
undo voice vlan aging
View
System View
Parameter
minutes: The aging time of Voice VLAN, in minutes, ranging from 5 to 43200.
The default value is 1440 minutes.
Description
Use the voice vlan aging command to set the aging time of Voice VLAN. Use
the undo voice vlan aging command to set the aging time back to the default.
Related commands: display voice vlan status.
Example
To set the aging time of Voice VLAN to 100 minutes, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]voice vlan aging 100
[4500]
voice vlan enable
Syntax
voice vlan enable
undo voice vlan enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the voice vlan enable command to enable the Voice VLAN features on the
port. Use the undo voice vlan enable command to disable the Voice VLAN
features on the port.
You can only run the Voice VLAN function on the port when all the Voice VLAN
features in system view and port view are enabled.
For the related command, see display voice vlan status.
Example
To enable the Voice VLAN features on port Ethernet1/0/2, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet1/0/2
88
CHAPTER 3: USING VLAN COMMANDS
[4500-Ethernet1/0/2]voice vlan enable
[4500-Ethernet1/0/2]
voice vlan
Syntax
voice vlan vlan_id enable
undo voice vlan enable
View
System View
Parameter
vlan_id: The VLAN ID for the Voice VLAN to be enabled, in the range of 2 to
4094.
Description
Use the voice vlan command to globally enable the Voice VLAN features of one
VLAN. Use the undo voice vlan enable command to globally disable the Voice
VLAN features of one VLAN.
A specified VLAN must exist for a successful Voice VLAN enabling. You cannot
delete a specified VLAN that has enabled Voice VLAN and only one VLAN can
enable Voice VLAN features at one time.
For the related command, see display voice vlan status.
Example
Enable the Voice VLAN features on VLAN 2 (VLAN 2 already exists).
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]vlan 2
[4500-vlan2]quit
[4500]voice vlan 2 enable
[4500]
voice vlan mac_address
Syntax
voice vlan mac_address oui mask oui_mask [ description string ]
undo voice vlan mac_address oui
View
System View
Parameter
oui: The MAC address to be set, in the format H-H-H.
oui_mask: The valid length of a MAC address, represented by a mask, and in the
format H-H-H.
description string: Description of the MAC address, in the range of 1 to 30.
Voice VLAN Configuration Commands
89
Description
Use the voice vlan mac_address command to set the MAC address that the
Voice VLAN can control. Use the undo voice vlan mac_address command to
cancel this MAC address.
Here the OUI address refers to a vendor and you need only input the first
three-byte values of the MAC address. The OUI address system can learn 16 MAC
addresses at most. There are four default OUI addresses after the system starts:
Table 8 Default OUI Addresses
No.
OUI
Description
1
00:E0:BB
3Com phone
2
00:03:6B
Cisco phone
3
00:E0:75
Polycom phone
4
00:D0:1E
Pingtel phone
For the related command, see display voice vlan oui.
Example
To set the MAC address 00AA-BB00-0000 as an OUI address, enter the following.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]voice vlan mac_address 00aa-bb00-0000 mask ffff-ff00-0000
description ABC
[4500]
voice vlan mode
Syntax
voice vlan mode auto
undo voice vlan mode auto
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the voice vlan mode auto command to set the Voice VLAN in auto mode.
Use the undo voice vlan mode auto command to set the Voice VLAN in manual
mode.
By default, the Voice VLAN is in auto mode.
If required, the voice vlan mode auto and undo voice vlan mode auto
commands must be executed before the Voice VLAN features are enabled globally.
For the related command, see display voice vlan status.
Example
To set the Voice VLAN in manual mode, enter the following:
90
CHAPTER 3: USING VLAN COMMANDS
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]undo voice vlan mode auto
Can't change voice vlan configuration when voice vlan is running
[4500]undo voice vlan enable
[4500]undo voice vlan mode auto
[4500]
voice vlan security
enable
Syntax
voice vlan security enable
undo voice vlan security enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the voice vlan security enable command to enable the Voice VLAN
security mode. In this mode, the system can filter out the traffic whose source
MAC is not OUI when the traffic travels through the access port of IP Phone within
the Voice VLAN, while the other VLANs are not influenced. Use the undo voice
vlan security enable command to disable the Voice VLAN security mode.
By default, the Voice VLAN security mode is enabled.
If needed, the voice vlan security enable and undo voice vlan security
enable commands must be executed before the Voice VLAN features are enabled
globally.
For the related command, see display voice vlan status.
Example
To disable the Voice VLAN security mode, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]undo voice vlan security enable
[4500]
4
USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE)
COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
PoE Configuration Commands
■
display poe interface
■
display poe power
■
display poe powersupply
■
poe enable
■
poe legacy enable
■
poe max-power
■
poe mode
■
poe power-management
■
poe priority
■
poe update
92
CHAPTER 4: USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE) COMMANDS
PoE Configuration
Commands
display poe interface
This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
PoE on your Switch 4500 PWR.
Syntax
display poe interface [ interface-name | interface-type
interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Port on the Switch.
Description
Use the display poe interface command to view the PoE status of a specific
port or all ports on the Switch.
Example
Display the PoE status of the Ethernet port Ethernet1/0/10.
[4500]display poe interface ethernet1/0/10
Port power enabled
:enable
Port power ON/OFF
:on
Port power status
:Standard PD
Port power mode
:signal
Port PD class
:0
port power priority
:low
Port max power
:15400 mW
Port current power
:460 mW
Port peak power
:552 mW
Port average power
:547 mW
Port current
:10 mA
Port voltage
:51 V
Display the PoE status of all ports.
[4500]display poe interface
PORT INDEX
Ethernet1/0/1
Ethernet1/0/2
Ethernet1/0/3
Ethernet1/0/4
Ethernet1/0/5
Ethernet1/0/6
Ethernet1/0/7
Ethernet1/0/8
Ethernet1/0/9
Ethernet1/0/10
Ethernet1/0/11
Ethernet1/0/12
Ethernet1/0/13
Ethernet1/0/14
POWER
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
ENABLE
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
MODE PRIORITY
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
signal low
STATUS
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
PoE Configuration Commands
Ethernet1/0/15
Ethernet1/0/16
Ethernet1/0/17
Ethernet1/0/18
Ethernet1/0/19
Ethernet1/0/20
Ethernet1/0/21
Ethernet1/0/22
Ethernet1/0/23
Ethernet1/0/24
Ethernet1/0/25
Ethernet1/0/26
Ethernet1/0/27
Ethernet1/0/28
Ethernet1/0/29
Ethernet1/0/30
Ethernet1/0/31
Ethernet1/0/32
Ethernet1/0/33
Ethernet1/0/34
Ethernet1/0/35
Ethernet1/0/36
Ethernet1/0/37
Ethernet1/0/38
Ethernet1/0/39
Ethernet1/0/40
Ethernet1/0/41
Ethernet1/0/42
Ethernet1/0/43
Ethernet1/0/44
Ethernet1/0/45
Ethernet1/0/46
Ethernet1/0/47
Ethernet1/0/48
display poe power
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
off
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
enable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
disable
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
signal
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
low
93
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
Detection
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
User set off
Syntax
display poe interface power [ interface-name | interface-type
interface-num ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Port on the Switch.
Description
Use the display poe interface power command, you can view the power
information of a specific port or all ports on the Switch.
Example
Display the power information of port Ethernet1/0/10.
[4500]display poe interface power ethernet1/0/10
94
CHAPTER 4: USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE) COMMANDS
Port power
:12400 mW
Display the power information of all ports.
[4500]display poe power
PORT INDEX
(mW)
Ethernet1/0/1
Ethernet1/0/2
Ethernet1/0/3
Ethernet1/0/4
Ethernet1/0/5
Ethernet1/0/6
Ethernet1/0/7
Ethernet1/0/8
Ethernet1/0/9
Ethernet1/0/10
Ethernet1/0/11
Ethernet1/0/12
Ethernet1/0/13
Ethernet1/0/14
Ethernet1/0/15
Ethernet1/0/16
Ethernet1/0/17
Ethernet1/0/18
Ethernet1/0/19
Ethernet1/0/20
Ethernet1/0/21
Ethernet1/0/22
Ethernet1/0/23
Ethernet1/0/24
Ethernet1/0/25
Ethernet1/0/26
Ethernet1/0/27
Ethernet1/0/28
Ethernet1/0/29
Ethernet1/0/30
Ethernet1/0/31
Ethernet1/0/32
Ethernet1/0/33
Ethernet1/0/34
Ethernet1/0/35
Ethernet1/0/36
Ethernet1/0/37
Ethernet1/0/38
Ethernet1/0/39
Ethernet1/0/40
Ethernet1/0/41
Ethernet1/0/42
Ethernet1/0/43
Ethernet1/0/44
Ethernet1/0/45
Ethernet1/0/46
Ethernet1/0/47
Ethernet1/0/48
display poe
powersupply
Syntax
display poe powersupply
View
Any view
Parameter
None
POWER (mW)
0
100
200
300
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1100
1200
1300
1400
1500
1600
1700
1800
1900
2000
2100
2200
2300
2400
2500
2600
2700
0
0
0
0
3200
3300
3400
3500
3600
3700
3800
3900
4000
4100
4200
4300
4400
4500
4600
4700
PORT
INDEXPOWER
PoE Configuration Commands
Description
Use the display poe powersupply command to view the parameters of the
power sourcing equipment (PSE).
Example
Display the PSE parameters.
[4500]display poe powersupply
PSE
PSE
PSE
PSE
PSE
PSE
PSE
PSE
PSE
PSE
poe enable
ID
Legacy Detection
Total Power Consumption
Available Power
Peak Value
Average Value
Software Version
Hardware Version
CPLD Version
Power-Management mode
:1
:disable
:12000 mW
:268000 mW
:12000 mW
:12000 mW
:290
:000
:021
:auto
Syntax
poe enable
undo poe enable
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the poe enable command to enable the PoE feature on a port.
Use the undo poe enable command to disable the PoE feature on a port.
By default, the PoE feature on each port is enabled.
Example
Enable the PoE feature on the current port.
[4500-Ethernet1/0/3]poe enable
Port power supply is enabled
# Disable the PoE feature on the current port.
[4500-Ethernet1/0/3]undo poe enable
Port power supply is disabled
poe legacy enable
Syntax
poe legacy enable
undo poe legacy enable
95
96
CHAPTER 4: USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE) COMMANDS
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the poe legacy enable command to enable the nonstandard-PD detect
function.
Use the undo poe legacy enable command to disable the nonstandard-PD
detect function.
PDs compliant with 802.3af standards are called standard PDs.
By default, the nonstandard-PD detect function is disabled.
Example
Enable the nonstandard-PD detect function.
[4500]poe legacy enable
Legacy detection is enabled
Disable the nonstandard-PD detect function.
[4500]undo poe legacy enable
Legacy detection is disabled
poe max-power
Syntax
poe max-power max-power
undo poe max-power
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
max-power: Maximum power distributed to the port, ranging from 1000 to
15400 mW.
Description
Use the poe max-power command to configure the maximum power that can be
supplied by current port.
Use the undo poe max-power command to restore the maximum power supplied
by current port to the default value.
By default, the maximum power that a port can supply is 15400 mW.
PoE Configuration Commands
97
The unit of power is mW. You can set the power in the granularity of 100 mW.
The actual maximum power will be 5% larger than what you have set allowing for
the effect of transient peak power.
Example
Set the maximum power supplied by current port.
[4500-Ethernet1/0/3]poe max-power 15000
Set Port max power successfully
Restore the default maximum power on the current port.
[4500-Ethernet1/0/3]undo poe max-power
Set Port max power successfully
poe mode
Syntax
poe mode { signal | spare }
undo poe mode
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
signal: Supply power through the signal line.
spare: Supply power through the spare line. Currently, the Switch 4500 Family
does not support spare mode. If the subordinate PD only supports the spare
mode, a conversion is needed.
Description
Use the poe mode command to configure the PoE mode on the current port.
Use the undo poe mode command to restore the PoE mode on the current port to
the default mode.
By default, the port is powered through the signal cable.
Example
Set the PoE mode on current port to signal.
[4500-Ethernet1/0/3]poe mode signal
Set PoE mode successfully
poe power-management
Syntax
poe power-management { auto | manual }
undo poe power-management
98
CHAPTER 4: USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE) COMMANDS
View
System View
Parameter
auto: Adopt the auto mode, a PoE management mode based on port priority.
manual: Adopt the manual mode.
Description
Use the poe power-management command to configure the PoE management
mode of port used in the case of power overloading.
Use the undo poe power-management command to restore the default mode.
By default, the PoE management mode on port is auto.
Example
Configure the PoE management mode on port to auto.
[4500]poe power-management auto
Auto Power Management is enabled
Restore the default management mode.
[4500]undo poe power-management
Auto Power Management is enabled
poe priority
Syntax
poe priority { critical | high | low }
undo poe priority
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
critical: Set the port priority to critical.
high: Set the port priority to high.
low: Set the port priority to low.
Description
Use the poe priority command to configure the power supply priority on a port.
Use the undo poe priority command to restore the default priority.
By default, the port priority is low.
PoE Configuration Commands
99
If there are too many ports with critical priority, the total power these ports need
might exceed the maximum power supplied by the equipment, i.e., 300W. In this
case, no new PD can be added to the switch.
When the remaining power of the whole equipment is below 18.8 W, no new PD
can be added to the Switch.
Example
Set the port priority to critical.
[4500-Ethernet1/0/3]poe priority critical
Set Port POE priority successfully
Restore the default priority.
[4500-Ethernet1/0/3]undo poe priority
Set Port POE priority successfully
poe update
Syntax
poe update { refresh | full } filename
View
System View
Parameter
refresh: The refresh update mode is used when the PSE processing software is
valid.
full: The full update mode is used when the PSE has no valid processing
software.
filename: Update file name, with a length of 1 to 64 characters.
Description
Use the poe update command to update the PSE processing software online
Note that:
z
The full mode is used only when you cannot use the refresh mode.
When the update procedure in refresh mode is interrupted for some
unexpected reason (e.g. power-off) or some errors occur, you can use the full
mode to re-update.
z
When the PSE processing software is damaged (that is, all the PoE commands
cannot be successfully executed), you can use the full mode to update and restore
the software.
z
100
CHAPTER 4: USING POWER OVER ETHERNET (POE) COMMANDS
Example
Update the PSE processing software online.
[4500]poe update refresh 0290_021.s19
...................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
....................................................................
...........
Update PoE board successfully
5
USING NETWORK PROTOCOL
COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
IP Address Configuration Commands
■
display ip host
■
display ip interface vlan
■
ip address
■
ip host
ARP Configuration Commands
■
arp check enable
■
arp static
■
arp static
■
debugging arp packet
■
display arp
■
display arp timer aging
■
reset arp
DHCP Client Configuration Commands
■
debugging dhcp client
■
debugging dhcp xrn xha
■
display dhcp client
■
ip address dhcp-alloc
DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
■
debugging dhcp-relay
■
dhcp-server
■
dhcp-server ip
■
display dhcp-server
■
display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface
Access Management Configuration Commands
■
am enable
■
am ip-pool
■
am trap enable
■
display am
102
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
■
display isolate port
■
port isolate
UDP Helper Configuration Commands
■
debugging udp-helper
■
display udp-helper server
■
udp-helper enable
■
udp-helper port
■
udp-helper server
IP Performance Configuration Commands
■
display fib
■
display fib ip_address
■
display fib acl
■
display fib
■
display fib ip-prefix
■
display fib statistics
■
display icmp statistics
■
display ip socket
■
display ip statistics
■
display tcp statistics
■
display tcp status
■
display udp statistics
■
reset ip statistics
■
reset tcp statistics
■
reset udp statistics
■
tcp timer fin-timeout
■
tcp timer syn-timeout
■
tcp window
IP Address Configuration Commands
IP Address
Configuration
Commands
display ip host
103
This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage IP
Addressing on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
display ip host
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip host command to display all host names and their
corresponding IP addresses.
Example
To display all host names and their corresponding IP addresses, type the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip host
The information displays in the following format:
Host
My
Aa
display ip interface vlan
Age
0
0
Flags
static
static
Address
1.1.1.1
2.2.2.4
Syntax
display ip interface interface-type interface-num
View
All views
Parameter
interface-type Enter the port type.
interface-num Enter the port number.
Related commands: interface
Description
Use the display ip interface command to view information on the specified
interface.
Example
To display information for VLAN-interface 1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip interface vlan-interface 1
The information displays in the following format:
Vlan-interface1 current state : DOWN
104
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Line protocol current state : DOWN
Internet Address is 1.1.1.1/8 Primary
Broadcast address : 1.255.255.255
The Maximum Transmit Unit : 1500 bytes
input packets : 0, bytes : 0, multicasts : 0
output packets : 0, bytes : 0, multicasts : 0
TTL invalid packet number:
0
ICMP packet input number:
0
Echo reply:
0
Unreachable:
0
Source quench:
0
Routing redirect:
0
Echo request:
0
Router advert:
0
Router solicit:
0
Time exceed:
0
IP header bad:
0
Timestamp request:
0
Timestamp reply:
0
Information request:
0
Information reply:
0
Netmask request:
0
Netmask reply:
0
Unknown type:
0
DHCP packet deal mode: global
ip address
Syntax
ip address ip_address { mask | mask_length }
[ undo ] ip address [ ip-address { mask | mask_length } ]
View
VLAN Interface view
Parameters
ip_address Enter the IP address of the VLAN interface.
mask Enter the IP subnet mask of the VLAN interface.
mask_length Enter the IP mask length of the VLAN interface.
Description
Use the ip address command to configure the IP address for a VLAN interface.
Use the undo ip address command to cancel an IP address for a VLAN interface.
By default, the IP address of a VLAN interface is set to null.
Related commands: display ip interface.
Example
Configure the IP address of interface VLAN interface 1 as 202.38.10.66.
[4500-vlan-interface1]ip address 202.38.10.66
ARP Configuration Commands
ip host
105
Syntax
ip host hostname ip_address
undo ip host hostname [ ip_address ]
View
System view
Parameters
hostname Enter the host name of the connecting device. This is a character string
of up to 20 characters.
ip_address Enter the host’s IP address.
Description
Use the ip host command to configure the host name and the host IP address in
the Switch 4500’s host table. This allows you to ping or Telnet a local device by
host name.
Use the undo ip host command to remove the host name and the host IP
address from the host table.
By default, the host name and corresponding IP address are null.
Related command: display ip host
Example
To enter a host name of Lanswitch1 for the IP address 202.38.0.8, enter the
following.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]ip host Lanswitch1 202.38.0.8
ARP Configuration
Commands
arp check enable
This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) operations on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
arp check enable
undo arp check enable
View
System View
Parameter
none
Description
Use the arp check enable command to enable the checking of an ARP entry so
the device does not learn the ARP entry where the MAC address is a multicast
106
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
MAC address. Use the undo arp check enable command to disable the checking
of ARP entry so the device learns the ARP entry where the MAC address is a
multicast MAC address.
By default, the checking of ARP entry is enabled and the device does not learn the
ARP entry where the MAC address is a multicast MAC address.
Example
Configure that the device learns the ARP entry where the MAC address is
multicast MAC address.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]undo arp check enable
arp static
Syntax
arp static ip_address mac_address [ vlan_id
interface_number }]
{ interface_type |
undo arp static ip_address
View
System View
Parameters
ip_address Enter the IP address of the ARP mapping entry.
mac_address Enter the MAC address of the ARP mapping entry, in the format
H-H-H (H indicates a four digit hexadecimal number, for example
00e0-fc01-0000).
vlan_id Enter the ID number of the local VLAN that you want to use to associate
with the ARP mapping entry. The VLAN ID can be in the range 1 to 4094.
Optional.
interface_type Enter the type of the port that you want to use to send frames
to this address. Optional, but must be entered if a VLAN ID is specified.
interface_number Enter the number of the port that you want to use to send
frames to this address. Optional, but must be entered if a VLAN ID is specified.
Description
Use the arp static command to manually configure the static ARP mapping
entries in the ARP mapping table. You must enter an IP address and MAC address
with this command. You can optionally enter a VLAN ID, which also requires entry
of an interface type and interface number. An aggregation port or port with LACP
enabled cannot be set as the egress port of static ARP.
Use the undo arp ip_address command to remove a static ARP mapping entry
from the ARP table.
To remove all static ARP entries, use the reset arp static command. Note that
the reset arp static command removes all static ARP entries permanently.
ARP Configuration Commands
107
By default, the ARP mapping table is empty, and the Switch uses dynamic ARP to
maintain its address mapping.
Related commands: reset arp, display arp, debugging arp.
Example
To associate the IP address 202.38.10.2 with the MAC address 00e0-fc01-0000,
and the ARP mapping entry to Ethernet1/0/1 on VLAN1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]arp static 202.38.0.10 00e0-fc01-0000 1 Ethernet1/0/1
arp static
Note that this command does the same as the command above, except there is no
port parameter as you are already in the port view.
Syntax
arp static ip_address mac_address vlan_id
undo arp static ip_address
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameters
ip_address Enter the IP address of the ARP mapping entry.
mac_address Enter the MAC address of the ARP mapping entry, in the format
H-H-H (H indicates a four digit hexadecimal number, for example
00e0-fc01-0000).
vlan_id Enter the ID number of the VLAN that you want to use to associate with
the ARP mapping entry.
The VLAN ID can be in the range 1 to 4094. Optional.
Description
Use the arp static command to manually configure the static ARP mapping
entries in the ARP mapping table. You must enter an IP address and MAC address
with this command. You can optionally enter a VLAN ID.
Use the undo arp static ip_address command to remove a static ARP mapping
entry from the ARP table.
To remove all static ARP entries, use the reset arp static command. Note that
the reset arp static command removes all static ARP entries permanently.
By default, the ARP mapping table is empty, and the Switch uses dynamic ARP to
maintain its address mapping.
Related commands: reset arp, display arp, debugging arp.
108
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Example
To establish a mapping between IP address 129.102.0.1 and MAC address
00e0-fc01-0000, and to send frames to this address through VLAN 1, Ethernet
port 1/0/1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]arp static 202.38.0.10 00e0-fc01-0000 1 arp timer aging
Syntax
arp timer aging aging_time
undo arp timer aging
View
System View
Parameter
aging_time Enter the aging time of dynamic ARP aging timer, in the range 1 to
1440 minutes. The default is 20 minutes.
Description
Use the arp timer aging command to configure the dynamic ARP aging timer.
Use the undo arp timer aging command to restore the default time of 20
minutes.
Related commands: display arp timer aging
Example
To configure the dynamic ARP aging timer to 10 minutes, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]arp timer aging 10
debugging arp packet
Syntax
debugging arp [ packet | error | info packet ]
undo debugging arp packet
View
User View
Parameters
error Enter to enable ARP error debugging.
info Enter to enable ARP mapping table and information management
debugging.
packet Enter to enable ARP packet debugging.
ARP Configuration Commands
109
Description
Use the debugging arp command to enable ARP debugging.
Use the undo debugging arp command to disable the corresponding ARP
debugging.
By default, undo ARP debugging is enabled.
For the related commands, see arp static and display arp.
Example
To enable ARP packet debugging, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;debugging arp packet
*0.771346-ARP-8-S1-arp_send:Send an ARP Packet, operation : 1,
sender_eth_addr :
00e0-fc00-3500,sender_ip_addr : 10.110.91.159, target_eth_addr :
0000-0000-0000
, target_ip_addr : 10.110.91.193
*0.771584-ARP-8-S1-arp_rcv:Receive an ARP Packet, operation : 2,
sender_eth_addr
: 0050-ba22-6fd7, sender_ip_addr : 10.110.91.193, target_eth_addr :
00e0-fc00-3500, target_ip_addr : 10.110.91.159
Table 9 Output Description of the debugging arp packet Command
display arp
Field
Description
operation
Type of ARP packets: 1 ARP request packet; 2 ARP reply packet
sender_eth_addr
Ethernet address of the sender
sender_ip_addr
IP address of the sender
target_eth_addr
Target Ethernet address. If the packet is ARP request packet, the target IP
address will be 0
target_ip_addr
Target IP address
Syntax
display arp [ ip-address | [ dynamic | static ] [ | { begin | include
| exclude } text ]]
View
All views
Parameters
dynamic: Enter to display the dynamic ARP entries in the ARP mapping table.
static: Enter to display the static ARP entries in the ARP mapping table.
begin: Enter to start displaying from the first ARP entry that contains the
specified character string &quot;text&quot;.
110
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
include: Enter to display only the ARP entries that contain the specified character
string &quot;text&quot;.
exclude: Enter to display only the ARP entries that do not contain the specified
character string &quot;text&quot;.
text Enter a character string. The ARP entries that contain this character string are
displayed.
Description
Use the display arp command to display the ARP mapping table entries by entry
type, or by a specified IP address.
Related commands: arp static, reset arp.
Example
To display all ARP entries in the mapping table, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display arp
Type: S-Static
D-Dynamic
IP Address
MAC Address
VLAN ID Port Name / AL ID Aging Type
161.71.61.20 0012-1212-1213 1
Aggregation Link 1
20
D
--1 entry found
&lt;4500&gt;
---
Table 10 Output Description of the display arp Command
display arp timer aging
Field
Description
IP Address
IP address of the ARP mapping entry
MAC Address
MAC address of the ARP mapping entry
VLAN ID/ AL ID
VLAN to which the static ARP entry belongs
Port Name
Port to which the static ARP entry belongs
Aging
Aging time of dynamic ARP entry in minutes
Type
Type of ARP entry
Syntax
display arp timer aging
View
All views.
Parameter
None.
Description
Use the display arp timer aging command to view the current setting of the
dynamic ARP aging timer.
Example
To display the current setting of the dynamic ARP aging timer, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
ARP Configuration Commands
111
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500] display arp timer aging
The information displays in the following format:
Current ARP aging time is 20 minute(s) (default)
[4500]
reset arp
Syntax
reset arp [ dynamic | static | interface { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } ]
View
User view
Parameters
dynamic Enter to clear the dynamic ARP mapping entries. Note that dynamic ARP
entries start re-learning immediately.
static Enter to clear the static ARP mapping entries. Note that static ARP entries
are deleted permanently.
interface interface_type interface_num interface_name Enter to clear the
ARP mapping entries for the specified port.
Description
Use the reset arp command to remove information that is no longer required
from the ARP mapping table. You can remove entries of a specified type, or from
a specified port.
Use the reset arp command to clear all ARP entries. You are asked to confirm
this entry.
Use the reset arp dynamic command to clear all dynamic ARP entries.
Use the reset arp static command to clear all static ARP entries.
Use the display arp interface command to clear all entries for the specified
port.
Related command: arp static, display arp.
Example
To clear static ARP entries, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;reset arp static
112
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
DHCP Client
Configuration
Commands
debugging dhcp client
This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) Client operations on your Switch
4500.
Syntax
debugging dhcp client { all | error | event | packet }
undo debugging dhcp client { all | error | event | packet }
View
User view
Parameters
all Enter to enable all DHCP client debugging.
error Enter to enable DHCP client error (including packet unrecognizable)
debugging.
event Enter to enable DHCP client event (including address allocation and data
update) debugging.
packet Enter to enable DHCP client packet debugging.
Description
Use the debugging dhcp client command to enable DHCP client debugging.
Use the undo debugging dhcp client command to disable DHCP client
debugging.
By default, DHCP client debugging is disabled.
Example
To enable DHCP client event debugging, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;debugging dhcp client event
debugging dhcp xrn xha
Syntax
debugging dhcp xrn xha
undo debugging dhcp xrn xha
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging dhcp xrn xha command to enable DHCP client hot backup
debugging.
DHCP Client Configuration Commands
113
Use the undo debugging dhcp xrn xha command to disable DHCP client hot
backup debugging.
By default, DHCP client hot backup debugging is disabled.
Example
To enable DHCP client hot backup debugging, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;debugging dhcp xrn xha
display dhcp client
Syntax
display dhcp client [ verbose ]
View
Any view
Parameter
verbose Enter to display detailed information about address allocation at DHCP
client.
Description
Use the display dhcp client command to view detailed information about
address allocation at DHCP client.
Example
To display detailed information about address allocation at DHCP client, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;display dhcp client verbose
DHCP client statistic information:
Vlan-interface1:
Current machine state: BOUND
Alloced IP: 169.254.0.2 255.255.0.0
Alloced lease: 86400 seconds, T1: 43200 seconds, T2: 75600 seconds
Lease from 2002.09.20 01:05:03
to
2002.09.21 01:05:03
Server IP: 169.254.0.1
Transaction ID = 0x3d8a7431
Default router: 2.2.2.2
DNS server: 1.1.1.1
Domain name: 3Com.com
Client ID: 3com-00e0.fc0a.c3ef-Ethernet0/0
Next timeout will happen after 0 days 11 hours 56 minutes 1 seconds.
ip address dhcp-alloc
Syntax
ip address dhcp-alloc
undo ip address dhcp-alloc
View
VLAN Interface View
114
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Parameter
None
Description
Use the ip address dhcp-alloc command to configure VLAN interface to obtain IP
address using DHCP.
Use the undo ip address dhcp-alloc command to remove the configuration.
By default, the VLAN interface does not obtain an IP address using DHCP.
Example
To configure VLAN interface to obtain IP address using DHCP, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]ip address dhcp-alloc
DHCP Relay
Configuration
Commands
debugging dhcp-relay
This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) operations on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
debugging dhcp-relay
undo debugging dhcp-relay
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the debugging dhcp-relay command to enable DHCP relay debugging.
Use the undo debugging dhcp-relay command to disable DHCP relay
debugging. By default, DHCP relay debugging is disabled.
Related commands: dhcp-server ip, dhcp-server, display dhcp-server and
display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface.
Example
To enable DHCP relay debugging, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;debugging dhcp-relay
*0.7200205-DHCP-8-dhcp_debug:
From client to server:
Interface: VLAN-Interface 1
ServerGroupNo: 0
DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
115
Type: dhcp-request
ClientHardAddress: 0010-dc19-695d
ServerIpAddress: 192.168.1.2
*0.7200230-DHCP-8-dhcp_debug:
From server to client:
Interface: VLAN-Interface 1
ServerGroupNo: 0
Type: dhcp-ack
ClientHardAddress: 0010-dc19-695d
AllocatedIpAddress: 10.1.1.1
*0.7200580-DHCP-8-largehop:
Discard DHCP request packet because of too large hop count!
*0.7200725-DHCP-8-invalidpkt:
Wrong DHCP packet!
dhcp-server
Syntax
dhcp-server groupNo
undo dhcp-server
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
groupNo Enter the DHCP Server group number, in the range 0 to 19.
Description
Use the dhcp-server command to associate a VLAN interface with a DHCP Server
group. DHCP Server requests are forward to the server associated with this group
from the specified interface.
Use the undo dhcp-server command to remove the VLAN interface from the
selected DHCP Server group. By default, DHCP Server requests are not forwarded.
You can only add the primary VLAN interface to a DHCP Server group. The primary
VLAN interface is the first interface that you configure.
This command has more parameters when entered in system view. Refer to
dhcp-server ip below for details.
Related commands: dhcp-server ip, display dhcp-server, display
dhcp-server interface vlan-interface, debugging dhcp-relay.
Example
To add VLAN-Interface 1 to DHCP Server group1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]dhcp-server 1
116
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
dhcp-server ip
Syntax
dhcp-server groupNo ip ipaddress1 [ ipaddress2 ]
undo dhcp-server groupNo
View
System View
Parameters
groupNo Enter the DHCP server group number, in the range 0 to 19.
ip_address1 Enter the IP address of the primary Server in the group.
ip_address2 Enter the IP address of the secondary Server in the group. Optional.
Description
Use the dhcp-server ip command to configure the IP address of the DHCP
Server used by the DHCP Server group.
Use the undo dhcp-server ip command to delete the IP addresses of all DHCP
Servers in DHCP Server group.
This command has fewer parameters when entered in VLAN Interface View. Refer
to dhcp-server command for details.
Related commands: dhcp-server, debugging dhcp-relay.
Example
To configure the primary and secondary IP addresses of DHCP Server group 1 as
1.1.1.1 and 2.2.2.2 respectively, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]dhcp-server 1 ip 1.1.1.1 2.2.2.2
To delete the IP addresses of DHCP Server group1, enter the following:
[4500]undo dhcp-server 1
display dhcp-server
Syntax
display dhcp-server groupNo
View
All views.
Parameter
groupNo Enter a DHCP Server group number, in the range 0 to 19.
Description
Use the display dhcp-server command to view information on a selected DHCP
Server group.
DHCP Relay Configuration Commands
117
Related commands: dhcp-server ip, dhcp-server, display dhcp-server
interface vlan-interface, debugging dhcp-relay.
Example
To view information on DHCP Server group 0, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display dhcp-server 0
The information displays in the following format:
The first IP address of DHCP Server group 0: 1.1.1.1
The second IP address of DHCP Server group 0: 1.1.1.2
Messages from this server group: 0
Messages to this server group: 0
Messages from clients to this server group: 0
Messages from this server group to clients: 0
DHCP_OFFER messages: 0
DHCP_ACK messages: 0
DHCP_NAK messages: 0
DHCP_DECLINE messages: 0
DHCP_DISCOVER messages: 0
DHCP_REQUEST messages: 0
DHCP_INFORM messages: 0
DHCP_RELEASE messages: 0
BOOTP_REQUEST messages: 0
BOOTP_REPLY messages: 0
display dhcp-server
interface vlan-interface
Syntax
display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface vlan_id
Views
All views
Parameter
vlan_id Enter the VLAN interface number.
Description
Use the display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface command to display
the information on the DHCP Server group corresponding to a specific VLAN
interface.
Related commands: dhcp-server, display dhcp-server, debugging
dhcp-relay.
Example
To view the information on the DHCP Server group corresponding to
VLAN-Interface 2, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display dhcp-server interface vlan-interface 2
The information displays in the following format:
The DHCP server group of this interface is 0
118
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
The information shown above indicates that vlan-interface 2 is configured with a
DHCP Server group whose ID is 0.
Access Management
Configuration
Commands
am enable
This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
Access Management Configuration operations on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
am enable
undo am enable
View
System View
Parameter
none
Description
Use the am enable command to enable the access management function.
Use the undo am enable command to disable the function.
By default, the Access management function is disabled.
When using the access management function, It is recommended that you cancel
the static ARP configuration to ensure that the binding of the IP address and
Ethernet switch takes effect. If you have configured the static ARP for an IP
address in the current port IP address pool from another port, the system will
prompt you to cancel the static ARP setting.
Example
To enable the access management function, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]am enable
am ip-pool
Syntax
am ip-pool address-list
undo am ip-pool { all | address-list }
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameters
all Enter to configure to operate on all the IP addresses (or IP address pools).
ip-pool Enter to configure IP address pool for access management.
Access Management Configuration Commands
119
address-list Enter IP address list in the start_ip_address [ip_address_num
] &amp; &lt; 1-10 &gt; format.
start_ip_address Is the start address of an IP address range in the pool.
ip_address_num: Specifies how many IP addresses following start_ip_address
in the range.
&amp;&lt; 1-10 &gt; means you can specify ten IP address ranges at most.
Description
Use the am ip-pool command to configure the IP address pool for access
management on a port. The packet whose source IP address is in the specified
pool is allowed to be forwarded on Layer 3 via the port of the switch.
Use the undo am ip-pool command to cancel the access management IP pool of
the port.
By default, all the IP address pools for access management on the port are null and
all the packets are permitted through.
Note that if the IP address pool to be configured contains the IP addresses
configured in the static ARP at other ports, then the system prompts you to delete
the static ARP to make the later binding effective.
Example
To configure the access management IP address pool on Ethernet1/0/1 and
permits the addresses from 202.112.66.2 through 202.112.66.20 and the
specified 202.112.65.1 to access the port, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]am ip-pool 202.112.66.2 19 202.112.65.1
am trap enable
Syntax
am trap enable
undo am trap enable
View
System View
Parameter
none
Description
Use the am trap enable command to enable the access management trap
function.
Use the undo am trap enable command to disable the access management trap
function.
120
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
By default, the access management trap is disabled.
Example
To enable the access management trap, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]am trap enable
display am
Syntax
display am [ interface-list ]
View
Any view
Parameters
interface-list Enter to display the access management information of the
specified port in the { { interface_type interface_num | interface_name }
[ to { interface_type interface_num | interface_name } ] } &amp;&lt;1-10&gt;
format.
interface_name Enter the port name, represented with interface_name=
interface_type interface_num.
interface_type is the port type and interface_num is the port number.
&amp;&lt;1-10&gt; indicates the preceding parameter can be input up to 10 times.
Description
Use the display am command to view the current access management
configurations on part or all of the ports.
Use the display am command to view the status of access management function
and configuration of IP address pool.
Example
To display the access management configurations on Ethernet0/1 and
Ethernet0/2.
&lt;4500&gt;display am Ethernet0/1 Ethernet0/2
Ethernet0/1
Status
:
IP Pools
:
Isolate Ports:
Ethernet0/2
Status
:
IP Pools
:
Isolate Ports:
disabled
(NULL)
Ethernet0/2
disabled
(NULL)
Ethernet0/1
Access Management Configuration Commands
121
Table 11 Output Description of the display am Command
Field
Description
Status
AM state on the port: enabled or disabled
IP Pools
IP pools. NULL represents no configuration. Each IP address section is
represented in X.X.X.X (number), of these, &quot;X.X.X.X&quot; represents the
first address, and &quot;number&quot; represents that &quot;number&quot; consecutive IP
addresses from the beginning of this address are within the IP pools
Isolate Ports
Isolate ports. NULL represents no configuration
To display the access management configurations on Ethernet1/0/1:
&lt;4500&gt; display am ethernet1/0/1
Ethernet1/0/1
Status
: disabled
IP Pools
: (NULL)
display isolate port
Syntax
display isolate port
View
Any view
Parameter
none
Description
Use the display isolate port command to view port isolation information.
Example
To display port isolation information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display isolate port
Isolated port(s) on UNIT 1:
Ethernet1/0/1
port isolate
Syntax
port isolate
undo port isolate
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
none
Description
Use the port isolate command to add a port to an isolation group using the
following commands, and achieves port-to-port isolation between this port and
122
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
other ports of this group, that is, Layer 2 forwarding between the isolated ports is
not available.
Use the undo port isolate command to remove a port from an isolation group.
By default, a port is not in an isolation group, namely Layer 2 forwarding is
achievable between this port and other ports.
Example
To add Ethernet1/0/1 and Ethernet1/0/2 to isolation group, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]port isolate
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]quit
[4500]interface ethernet 1/0/2
[4500-Ethernet1/0/2]port isolate
UDP Helper
Configuration
Commands
debugging udp-helper
This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the
UDP Helper Configuration operations on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
debugging udp-helper { event | packet [ receive | send ] }
undo debugging udp-helper { event | packet [ receive | send ] }
View
User view
Parameters
event UDP Helper event debugging.
packet UDP Helper packet debugging.
receive UDP Helper inbound packet debugging.
send UDP Helper outbound packet debugging.
Description
Use the debugging udp-helper command to enable UDP Helper debugging.
Use the undo debugging udp-helper command to disable UDP Helper
debugging.
By default, UDP Helper debugging is disabled.
Example
To enable UDP Helper packet debugging, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;debugging udp-helper packet
UDP Helper Configuration Commands
display udp-helper
server
123
Syntax
display udp-helper server [ interface vlan-interface vlan_id ]
View
Any view
Parameter
vlan_id VLAN interface ID.
Description
Use the display udp-helper server command to view the information of
destination Helper server corresponding to the VLAN interface.
Example
To display the information of destination Helper server corresponding to the VLAN
interface 1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display udp-helper server interface vlan-interface 1
interface name server address
VLAN-interface1 192.1.1.2
udp-helper enable
packets sent
0
Syntax
udp-helper enable
undo udp-helper enable
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the udp-helper enable command to enable the UDP Helper function.
Use the undo udp-helper enable command to disable the UDP Helper function.
By default, UDP Helper function is disabled.
Example
To enable the UDP Helper function.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]udp-helper enable
udp-helper port
Syntax
udp-helper port { port | dns | netbios-ds | netbios-ns | tacacs |
tftp | time }
undo udp-helper port { port | dns | netbios-ds | netbios-ns | tacacs
| tftp | time }
124
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
View
System view
Parameters
port Enter the ID of the UDP port with relay function to be enabled, in the range
of 1 to 65535.
dns Domain name service, corresponding to UDP port 53.
netbios-ds NetBios datagram service, corresponding to UDP port 138.
netbios-ns NetBios name service, corresponding to UDP port 137.
tacacs TAC access control system, corresponding to UDP port 49.
tftp Trivial file transfer protocol, corresponding to UDP port 69.
time Time service, corresponding to UDP port 37.
Description
Use the udp-helper port command to configure the UDP port with relay
function.
Use the undo udp-helper enable command to delete the UDP port with relay
function.
Example
To configure the UDP port with relay function as the UDP port corresponding to
DNS, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]udp-helper port dns
udp-helper server
Syntax
udp-helper server ip-address
undo udp-helper server [ ip-address ]
View
VLAN Interface View
Parameter
ip-address Enter the IP address of the destination server.
Description
Use the udp-helper server command to configure the relay destination server.
Use the undo udp-helper server command to delete the relay destination
server.
By default, no relay destination server is configured.
IP Performance Configuration Commands
125
Related command: display udp-helper server.
Example
To configure the relay destination server with IP address 192.1.1.2, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]udp-helper server 192.1.1.2
IP Performance
Configuration
Commands
display fib
This section describes the commands you can use to configure and manage the IP
Performance Configuration operations on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
display fib
View
Any view
Parameter
none
Description
Use the display fib command to view the summary of the forwarding
information base. The information includes: destination address/mask length, next
hop, current flag, timestamp and outbound interface.
Example
To display the summary of the Forwarding Information Base, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display fib
Destination/Mask
127.0.0.0/8
Nexthop
127.0.0.1
Flag TimeStamp
U
t[0]
Interface
InLoopBack0
Table 12 Description of the output information of the display fib command
Field
Flag
Description
The flag options include:
B – Blackhole route
D – Dynamic route
G – Gateway route
H – Local host route
S – Static route
U – Route in UP status
R – Unreachable route
126
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
display fib ip_address
Syntax
display fib ip_address1 [ { mask1 | mask-length1 } [ ip_address2 {
mask2 | mask-length2 } | longer ] | longer ]
View
Any view
Parameters
ip_address1, ip_address2 Enter destination IP address, in dotted decimal
format. ip_address1 and ip_address2 jointly define the address range. The FIB
entries in this address range will be displayed.
mask1, mask2, mask-length1, mask-length2 Enter the IP address mask, in
dotted decimal format, or an integer in the range of 0 to 32 to represent the mask
length.
longer All FIB entries matched in the natural mask range.
Description
Use the display fib ip_address command to view the FIB entries matching the
destination IP address (range). Each line outputs a FIB entry and the display
contents for each entry include destination address/mask length, next hop, current
flag, timestamp and outbound interface.
Example
To display the FIB entries whose destination addresses match 169.253.0.0 in
natural mask range, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display fib 169.253.0.0
Route Entry Count: 1
Destination/Mask
Nexthop
Flag TimeStamp
169.0.0.0/16
2.1.1.1
U
t[0]
Interface
Vlan-interface1
To display the FIB entries whose destination addresses are in the range of
169.254.0.0/16 to 169.254.0.6/16, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display fib 169.254.0.0 255.255.0.0 169.254.0.6 255.255.0.0
Route Entry Count: 1
Destination/Mask
Nexthop
Flag TimeStamp Interface
169.254.0.1/16
2.1.1.1
U
t[0]
Vlan-interface1
display fib acl
Syntax
display fib acl number
View
Any view
Parameter
number Enter the ACL in number form, in the range 2000 to 2999
IP Performance Configuration Commands
127
Description
Use the display fib acl command to view the FIB entries matching a specific
ACL.
Example
To display the FIB entries matching ACL 2000, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display fib acl 2000
Route entry matched by access-list 2000:
Summary counts: 1
Destination/Mask
Nexthop
Flag
TimeStamp
127.0.0.0/8
127.0.0.1 U
t[0]
display fib
Interface
InLoopBack0
Syntax
display fib | { { begin | include | exclude } text }
View
Any view
Parameters
begin Enter to display the FIB entries from the first one containing the character
string text.
include Enter to display only those FIB entries containing the character string text.
exclude Enter to display only those FIB entries excluding the character string text.
text Enter string of specific characters.
Description
Use the display fib command to view the FIB entries which are output from the
buffer according to regular expression and related to the specific character string.
Example
To display the lines starting from the first one containing the string 169.254.0.0,
enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display fib | begin 169.254.0.0
Destination/Mask
Nexthop
Flag
TimeStamp
169.254.0.0/16
2.1.1.1
U
t[0]
2.0.0.0/16
2.1.1.1
U
t[0]
display fib ip-prefix
Interface
Vlan-interface1
Vlan-interface1
Syntax
display fib ip-prefix listname
View
Any view
Parameter
listname Enter prefix list name, a string of one to 19 characters.
128
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Description
Use the display fib ip-prefix command to view the FIB entries matching the
specific prefix list.
Example
To display the FIB entries matching prefix list abc0, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display fib ip-prefix abc0
Route Entry matched by prefix-list abc0:
Summary count: 3
Destination/Mask
Nexthop
Flag TimeStamp
127.0.0.0/8
127.0.0.1 U
t[0]
127.0.0.1/32
127.0.0.1 U
t[0]
169.0.0.0/8
2.1.1.1
SU
t[0]
display fib statistics
Interface
InLoopBack0
InLoopBack0
Vlan-interface1
Syntax
display fib statistics [ | { begin | include | exclude } text ]
View
Any view
Parameter
begin: Display the FIB entries from the first one containing the character string
text.
include: Display only those FIB entries containing the character string text.
exclude: Display only those FIB entries excluding the character string text.
text: String of specific characters.
Description
Use the display fib statistics command to view the total number of FIB
entries.
Example
To display the total number of FIB entries, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display fib statistics
Route Entry Count : 30
display icmp statistics
Syntax
display icmp statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
none
IP Performance Configuration Commands
129
Description
Use the display icmp statistics command to view the statistics information
about ICMP packets.
Related commands: display ip interface vlan-interface, reset ip
statistics.
Example
To view statistics about ICMP packets, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt; display icmp statistics
Input: bad formats
0
echo
5
source quench 0
echo reply
10
timestamp
0
mask requests 0
time exceeded 0
Output:echo
10
source quench 0
echo reply
5
timestamp
0
mask requests 0
time exceeded 0
bad checksum
destination unreachable
redirects
parameter problem
information request
mask replies
0
0
0
0
0
0
destination unreachable
redirects
parameter problem
information reply
mask replies
0
0
0
0
0
Table 13 Output Description of the display icmp statistics Command
display ip socket
Field
Description
bad formats
Number of input packets in bad format
bad checksum
Number of input packets with wrong checksum
echo
Number of input/output echo request packets
destination unreachable
Number of input/output packets with unreachable destination
source quench
Number of input/output source quench packets
redirects
Number of input/output redirected packets
echo reply
Number of input/output echo reply packets
parameter problem
Number of input/output packets with parameter problem
timestamp
Number of input/output timestamp packets
information request
Number of input information request packets
mask requests
Number of input/output mask request packets
mask replies
Number of input/output mask reply packets
information reply
Number of output information reply packets
time exceeded
Number of time exceeded packets
Syntax
display ip socket [ socktype sock-type ] [ task-id socket-id ]
View
Any view
Parameters
sock-type Enter the type of a socket: (tcp:1, udp 2, raw ip 3).
130
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
task-id Enter the ID of a task, with the value ranging from 1 to 100.
socket-id Enter the ID of a socket, with the value ranging from 0 to 3072.
Description
Use the display ip socket command to display the information about the
sockets in the current system.
Example
To display the information about the socket of TCP type, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip socket socktype 1
SOCK_STREAM:
Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 1, Proto = 6,
LA = 0.0.0.0:23, FA = 0.0.0.0:0,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_ACCEPTCONN SO_KEEPALIVE SO_SENDVPNID
SO_SETKEEPALIVE,
socket state = SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC
Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 2, Proto = 6,
LA = 10.153.17.99:23, FA = 10.153.17.56:1161,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_KEEPALIVE SO_OOBINLINE SO_SENDVPNID
SO_SETKEEPALIVE,
socket state = SS_ISCONNECTED SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC
Task = VTYD(18), socketid = 3, Proto = 6,
LA = 10.153.17.99:23, FA = 10.153.17.82:1121,
sndbuf = 8192, rcvbuf = 8192, sb_cc = 0, rb_cc = 0,
socket option = SO_KEEPALIVE SO_OOBINLINE SO_SENDVPNID
SO_SETKEEPALIVE,
socket state = SS_ISCONNECTED SS_PRIV SS_ASYNC
Table 14 Output Description of the display ip socket Command
display ip statistics
Field
Description
SOCK_STREAM
The socket type
Task
The ID of a task
socketid
The ID of a socket
Proto
The protocol number used by the socket
sndbuf
The sending buffer size of the socket
rcvbuf
The receiving buffer size of the socket
sb_cc
The current data size in the sending buffer. The value makes sense
only for the socket of TCP type, because only TCP is able to cache
data
rb_cc
The current data size in the receiving buffer
socket option
The option of the socket
socket state
The state of the socket
Syntax
display ip statistics
IP Performance Configuration Commands
131
View
Any view
Parameter
none
Description
Use the display ip statistics command to view the statistics information
about IP packets.
Related commands: display ip interface, reset ip statistics.
Example
To view statistics about IP packets, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip statistics
Input:
sum
7120
bad protocol
0
bad checksum
0
Output: forwarding
0
dropped
0
compress fails 0
Fragment:input
0
dropped
0
fragmented
0
Reassembling:sum
0
local
bad format
bad options
local
no route
112
0
0
27
2
output
0
couldn't fragment 0
timeouts
0
Table 15 Output Description of the display ip statistics Command
Field
Input:
Output:
Fragment:
Reassembling:
Description
sum
Sum of input packets
local
Number of received packets whose destination is
the local device
bad protocol
Number of packets with wrong protocol number
bad format
Number of packets in bad format
bad checksum
Number of packets with wrong checksum
bad options
Number of packets that has wrong options
forwarding
Number of forwarded packets
local
Number of packets that are sent by the local
device
dropped
Number of dropped packets during transmission
no route
Number of packets that cannot be routed
compress fails
Number of packets that cannot be compressed
input
Number of input fragments
output
Number of output fragments
dropped
Number of dropped fragments
fragmented
Number of packets that are fragmented
couldn't fragment
Number of packets that cannot be fragmented
sum
Number of packets that are reassembled
timeouts
Number of packets that time out
132
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
display tcp statistics
Syntax
display tcp statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
none
Description
Use the display tcp statistics command to view the statistics information
about TCP packets.
The statistics information about TCP packets are divided into two major kinds
which are Received packets and Sent packets. Each kind of packet is further
divided into different kinds such as window probe packets, window update
packets, duplicate packets, and out-of-order packets. Some statistics information
that is closely related to TCP connection, such as window probe packets, window
update packets, and data packets retransmitted, is also displayed. All of this
displayed information is measured in packets.
Related commands: display tcp status, reset tcp statistics.
Example
To view statistics about TCP packets, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display tcp statistics
Received packets:
Total: 753
packets in sequence: 412 (11032 bytes)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 0
checksum error: 0, offset error: 0, short error: 0
duplicate packets: 4 (88 bytes), partially duplicate packets: 5 (7
bytes)
out-of-order packets: 0 (0 bytes)
packets of data after window: 0 (0 bytes)
packets received after close: 0
ACK packets: 481 (8776 bytes)
duplicate ACK packets: 7, too much ACK packets: 0
Sent packets:
Total: 665
urgent packets: 0
control packets: 5 (including 1 RST)
window probe packets: 0, window update packets: 2
data packets: 618 (8770 bytes) data packets retransmitted: 0 (0
bytes)
ACK-only packets: 40 (28 delayed)
Retransmitted timeout: 0, connections dropped in retransmitted
timeout: 0
Keepalive timeout: 0, keepalive probe: 0, Keepalive timeout, so
connections disconnected : 0
Initiated connections: 0, accepted connections: 0, established
connections: 0
IP Performance Configuration Commands
133
Closed connections: 0 (dropped: 0, initiated dropped: 0)
Packets dropped with MD5 authentication: 0
Packets permitted with MD5 authentication: 0
display tcp status
Syntax
display tcp status
View
Any view
Parameter
none
Description
Use the display tcp status command to view the TCP connection state.
Example
To display the state of all TCP connections, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display tcp status
TCPCB
Local Add:port
03e37dc4
0.0.0.0:4001
04217174
100.0.0.204:23
Foreign Add:port
0.0.0.0:0
100.0.0.253:65508
State
Listening
EstablishedOutput
Table 16 Output Description of the display tcp status Command
display udp statistics
Field
Description
Local Add:port
Local IP address: local port
Foreign Add:port
Remote IP address; remote port
State
State of the TCP link
Syntax
display udp statistics
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display udp statistics command to view UDP traffic statistic
information.
For related configuration, please refer to the reset udp statistics command.
Example
To display the UDP traffic statistic information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display udp statistics
134
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Received packet:
Total:0
checksum error:0
shorter than header:0, data length larger than packet:0
no socket on port:0
broadcast:0
not delivered, input socket full:0
input packets missing pcb cache:0
Sent packet:
Total:0
reset ip statistics
Syntax
reset ip statistics
View
User view
Parameter
none
Description
Use the reset ip statistics command to clear the IP statistics information.
Related commands: display ip interface vlan-interface, display ip
statistics.
Example
To clear the IP statistics information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;reset ip statistics
reset tcp statistics
Syntax
reset tcp statistics
View
User view
Parameter
none
Description
Use the reset tcp statistics command to clear the TCP statistics information.
Related command: display tcp statistics.
Example
To clear the TCP statistics information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;reset tcp statistics
IP Performance Configuration Commands
reset udp statistics
135
Syntax
reset udp statistics
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset udp statistics command to clear the UDP statistics information.
Example
To clear the UDP traffic statistics information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;reset udp statistics
tcp timer fin-timeout
Syntax
tcp timer fin-timeout time-value
undo tcp timer fin-timeout
View
System View
Parameter
time-value Enter the TCP finwait timer value in second, with the value ranging
from 76 to 3600; By default, 675 seconds.
Description
Use the tcp timer fin-timeout command to configure the TCP finwait timer.
Use the undo tcp timer fin-timeout command to restore the default value of
the TCP finwait timer.
When the TCP connection state changes from FIN_WATI_1 to FIN_WAIT_2, the
finwait timer is enabled. If the switch does not receive FIN packet before finwait
timer timeouts, the TCP connection will be terminated.
Related commands: tcp timer syn-timeout, tcp window.
Example
To configure the TCP finwait timer value as 800 seconds, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]tcp timer fin-timeout 800
tcp timer syn-timeout
Syntax
tcp timer syn-timeout time-value
136
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
undo tcp timer syn-timeout
View
System View
Parameter
time-value Enter the TCP synwait timer value measured in second, whose value
ranges from 2 to 600. The default time-value is 75 seconds.
Description
Use the tcp timer syn-timeout command to configure the TCP synwait timer.
Use the undo tcp timer syn-timeout command to restore the default value of
the timer.
TCP will enable the synwait timer, if a SYN packet is sent. The TCP connection will
be terminated If the response packet is not received.
Related commands: tcp timer fin-timeout, tcp window.
Example
To configure the TCP synwait timer value as 80 seconds, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]tcp timer syn-timeout 80
tcp window
Syntax
tcp window window-size
undo tcp window
View
System View
Parameter
window-size Enter the size of the transmission and receiving buffers measured in
kilobytes (KB), whose value ranges from 1 to 32. By default, the window-size is
4KB.
Description
Use the tcp window command to configure the size of the transmission and
receiving buffers of the connection-oriented Socket.
Use the undo tcp window command to restore the default size of the buffer.
Related commands: tcp timer fin-timeout, tcp timer syn-timeout.
Example
To configure the size of the transmission and receiving buffers as 3KB, enter the
following:
IP Performance Configuration Commands
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]tcp window 3
137
138
CHAPTER 5: USING NETWORK PROTOCOL COMMANDS
6
USING ROUTING PROTOCOL
COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
Routing Table Display Commands
■
display ip routing-table
■
display ip routing-table acl
■
display ip routing-table ip_address
■
display ip routing-table ip_address1 ip_address2
■
display ip routing-table ip-prefix
■
display ip routing-table protocol
■
display ip routing-table radix
■
display ip routing-table statistics
■
display ip routing-table verbose
Static Route Configuration Command
■
delete static-routes all
■
ip route-static
RIP Configuration Commands
■
checkzero
■
default cost
■
display rip
■
filter-policy export
■
filter-policy import
■
host-route
■
import-route
■
network
■
peer
■
preference
■
reset
■
rip
■
rip authentication-mode
■
rip input
140
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
■
rip metricin
■
rip metricout
■
rip output
■
rip split-horizon
■
rip version
■
rip work
■
summary
■
timers
IP Routing Policy Commands
Routing Table Display
Commands
■
apply cost
■
display ip ip-prefix
■
display route-policy
■
if-match { acl | ip-prefix }
■
if-match cost
■
if-match interface
■
if-match ip next-hop
■
ip ip-prefix
■
route-policy
This section describes the commands you can use to display routing table
information.
When the Switch 4500 runs a routing protocol, it is able to perform the functions
of a router. The term router in this section can refer either to a physical router, or
to the Switch 4500 running a routing protocol.
display ip routing-table
Syntax
display ip routing-table
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip routing-table command to view a summary of routing
table information
Each line in the table represents one route. The displayed information includes
destination address/mask length, protocol, preference, cost, next hop and output
interface.
Routing Table Display Commands
141
Only the currently used route, that is the best route, is displayed.
Example
To view a summary of routing table information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip routing-table
The information displays in the following format:
Routing Table: public net
Destination/Mask Proto Pre Cost
1.1.1.0/24
DIRECT 0
0
1.1.1.1/32
DIRECT 0
0
2.2.2.0/24
DIRECT 0
0
2.2.2.1/32
DIRECT 0
0
3.3.3.0/24
DIRECT 0
0
3.3.3.1/32
DIRECT 0
0
4.4.4.0/24
DIRECT 0
0
4.4.4.1/32
DIRECT 0
0
127.0.0.0/8
DIRECT 0
0
127.0.0.1/32
DIRECT 0
0
Nexthop
1.1.1.1
127.0.0.1
2.2.2.1
127.0.0.1
3.3.3.1
127.0.0.1
4.4.4.1
127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1
Interface
Vlan-interface1
InLoopBack0
Vlan-interface2
InLoopBack0
Vlan-interface3
InLoopBack0
Vlan-interface4
InLoopBack0
InLoopBack0
InLoopBack0
Table 17 Output Description of the display ip routing-table Command
display ip routing-table
acl
Field
Description
Destination/Mask
Destination address/Mask length
Protocol
Routing protocol
Pre
Routing preference
Cost
Cost
Interface
Output interface, through which the data packet destined for the
destination network is sent
Syntax
display ip routing-table acl acl_number [ verbose ]
View
All views.
Parameters
acl_number Enter the number of the IP ACL, in the range 2000 to 2999.
verbose Enter to display verbose information about both the active and inactive
routes that passed filtering rules. If you do not enter this parameter, the command
only displays a summary of the active routes that passed filtering rules.
Description
Use the display ip routing-table acl command to view the route filtered
through the specified ACL.
This command is used to display the routes that passed the filtering rules in the
specified ACL.
The command only displays routes that passed basic ACL filtering rules.
142
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Example
To display a summary of the active routes filtered through basic ACL 2000, enter
the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]acl number 2000
[4500-acl-basic-2000]rule permit source 10.1.1.1 0.0.0.255
[4500-acl-basic-2000]rule deny source any
[4500-acl-basic-2000]display ip routing-table acl 2000
The information displays in the following format:
Routes matched by access-list 2000:
Summary count: 42
Destination/Mask
Protocol
Pre
10.1.1.0/24
DIRECT
0
10.1.1.2/32
DIRECT
0
Cost Nexthop
Interface
0
10.1.1.2 Vlan-interface1
0
127.0.0.1 InLoopBack0
For detailed description of the output information, see Table 18.
To display the verbose information of the active and inactive routes that are
filtered through basic ACL 2000.
&lt;4500&gt;display ip routing-table acl 2000 verbose
The information displays in the following format:
Routes matched by access-list 2000:
Generate Default: no
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both* = Next hop in use
Summary count:2
**Destination: 10.1.1.0
Mask: 255.255.255.0
Protocol: #DIRECT
Preference: 0
*NextHop: 10.1.1.2
Interface: 10.1.1.2(Vlan-interface1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: &lt;Int ActiveU Retain Unicast&gt;
Age: 7:24 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
**Destination: 10.1.1.2
Mask: 255. 255. 255. 255
Protocol: #DIRECT
Preference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1
Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: &lt;NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast&gt;
Age: 7:24 Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
Table 18
Output Description of the ip routing-table acl verbose Command
Field
Description
Destination
Destination address
Mask
Mask
Protocol
Routing protocol
Preference
Routing preference
Nexthop
Next hop address
Routing Table Display Commands
Table 18
143
Output Description of the ip routing-table acl verbose Command
Field
Description
Interface
Output interface, through which the data packet destined for the
destination network is sent
Vlinkindex
Virtual link index
State
Route state description:
ActiveU — The route is selected and is optimum
Blackhole — Blackhole route is similar to Reject route, but it will not
send the ICMP unreachable message to the source end
Delete — The route is deleted
Gateway — Identifies that the route is not an interface route
Hidden — The route exists, but it is unavailable temporarily for some
reasons (e.g., configured policy or interface is Down). Moreover, you
do not wish to delete it. Therefore, you need to hide it, so as to
restore it again later
Holddown — Holddown is one kind of route redistribution policy
adopted by some distance-vector (D-V) routing protocols (e.g., RIP),
through which these routing protocols can avoid the flooding of error
routes and deliver the routing unreachable message accurately. For
example, the RIP redistributes a certain route every a period of time
regardless of whether the actually found routes destined for the same
destination change. For more details, refer to the specific routing
protocols
Int — The route is discovered by interior gateway protocol (IGP)
NoAdvise — The routing protocol does not redistribute NoAdvise
route when it redistributes routes based on the policy
NotInstall — The routing protocol generally selects the route with the
highest precedence from its routing table, then places it in its core
routing table and redistributes it. Although the NotInstall route
cannot be placed in the core routing table, it is possibly that it is
selected and redistributed
Reject — Unlike the normal routes, the Reject route will discard the
packets that select it as their route, and the router will send ICMP
unreachable message to the source end. Reject route is usually used
for the network test
Retain — When the routes from the routing table are deleted, the
routes with Retain flag will not be deleted. Using this function you can
set Retain flag for some static routes, so that they can exist in the core
routing table
Static — The route with Static flag will not be cleared from the
routing table after you save it and reboot the router. Generally, the
static route configured manually in the router belongs to a Static
route
Unicast — Unicast route
display ip routing-table
ip_address
Age
Time to live
Cost
Value of cost
Tag
Tag of the route
Syntax
display ip routing-table ip_address [ mask ] [ longer-match ] [
verbose ]
144
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
View
All views
Parameters
ip_address Enter the destination IP address.
mask Enter either the IP subnet mask (in x.x.x.x format), or the subnet mask length
(in the range 0 to 32). Optional.
longer-match Enter to display an address route that matches the destination IP
address in natural mask range. Optional.
verbose Enter to display verbose information about both active and inactive
routes. Without this parameter, this command only displays a summary of active
routes. Optional.
Description
Use the display ip routing-table ip_address command to view routing
information for a specific IP address, and you can also choose the type of
information to display. If the destination address, ip_address, has a
corresponding route in natural mask range, this command will display all subnet
routes or only the route best matching the destination address, ip_address, is
displayed. And only the active matching route is displayed.
Use the display ip routing-table ip_address mask command to display the
route that matches the specified IP destination address and subnet mask.
Use the display ip routing-table ip_address longer-match command to
display all destination address routes that match destination IP addresses in natural
mask range.
Use the display ip routing-table ip_address verbose command to display
verbose information about both active and inactive routes.
Example
There is corresponding route in natural mask range. Display the summary.
&lt;4500&gt;display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0
Destination/Mask
Proto
Pre
Cost Nexthop
169.0.0.0/16
Static 60
0
2.1.1.1
Interface
LoopBack1
There are corresponding routes in the natural mask range. Display the detailed
information.
&lt;4500&gt;display ip routing-table 169.0.0.0 verbose
Routing tables:
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both* = Next hop in use
Summary count:2
**Destination: 169.0.0.0
Mask: 255.255.255.0
Protocol: STATIC
Preference: 60
*NextHop: 2.1.1.1
Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: &lt;Int ActiveU Gateway Static Unicast&gt;
Age: 3:47
Cost: 0/0
**Destination: 169.0.0.0
Mask: 255.254.0.0
Routing Table Display Commands
145
Protocol: #Static
Preference: 60
*NextHop: 2.1.1.1
Interface: 2.1.1.1(LoopBack1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: &lt;Int ActiveU Static Unicast&gt;
Age: 4:479
Cost: 0/0 Tag: 0
For detailed description of output information, refer to Table 18.
display ip routing-table
ip_address1 ip_address2
Syntax
display ip routing-table ip_address1 mask1 ip_address2 mask2
[ verbose ]
View
All views
Parameters
ip_address1 mask1 Enter the destination IP address and subnet mask that you
want to start the address range. This command displays the route for your chosen
address range. The subnet mask can be entered as either a dotted decimal
notation (x.x.x.x), or an an integer in the range 0 to 32.
ip_address2 mask2 Enter the IP address and subnet mask that you want to end
the address range. The subnet mask can be entered as either a dotted decimal
notation (x.x.x.x), or an integer in the range 0 to 32.
verbose Enter to display the verbose information of both the active and inactive
routes. Without this parameter, the command only displays a summary of active
routes. Optional.
Description
Use the display ip routing-table ip_address1 mask1 ip_address2 mask2
command to view the route information for the specified address range.
Example
To display the routing information of destination addresses ranging from 1.1.1.0
to 2.2.2.0., with a subnet mask of 24, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip routing-table 1.1.1.0 24 2.2.2.0 24
The information displays in the following format:
Routing tables:
Summary count: 3
Destination/Mask
Proto
1.1.1.0/24
DIRECT
1.1.1.1/32
DIRECT
2.2.2.0/24
DIRECT
Pre Cost Nexthop
00
1.1.1.1
00
127.0.0.1
00
2.2.2.1
Interface
Vlan-interface1
InLoopBack0
Vlan-interface2
For a detailed description of the output information, refer to Table 17.
display ip routing-table
ip-prefix
Syntax
display ip routing-table ip-prefix ip_prefix_name [ verbose ]
146
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
View
All views
Parameter
ip_prefix_name Enter the ip prefix list name.
verbose Enter to display verbose information about both the active and inactive
routes that passed filtering rules. Without this parameter, this command displays
the summary of active routes that passed filtering rules.
Description
Use the command display ip routing-table ip-prefix to view information
on the routes that passed filtering rules for the specified IP prefix name.
Example
To display the summary information for ip prefix list abc2, active route only, enter
the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]ip ip-prefix abc2 permit 10.1.1.0 24 less-equal 32
[4500]display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2
The information displays in the following format:
Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:
Summary count: 2
Destination/Mask
Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop
10.1.1.0/24
DIRECT
0
0
10.1.1.2
10.1.1.2/32
DIRECT
0
0
127.0.0.1
Interface
Vlan-interface1
InLoopBack0
For a detailed description of the output information, see Table 18.
To display the information on the active and inactive routes for prefix list abc2,
enter the following:
[4500]display ip routing-table ip-prefix abc2 verbose
The information displays in the following format:
Routes matched by ip-prefix abc2:
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both* = Next hop in use
Summary count:2
**Destination: 10.1.1.0
Mask: 255.255.255.0
Protocol: #DIRECT
Preference: 0
*NextHop: 10.1.1.2
Interface: 10.1.1.2(Vlan-interface1)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: &lt;Int ActiveU Retain Unicast&gt;
Age: 3:23:44
Cost: 0/0
Tag:0
**Destination: 10.1.1.2
Mask: 255. 255. 255. 255
Protocol: #DIRECT
Preference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1
Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
Vlinkindex: 0
State: &lt;NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast&gt;
Age: 3:23:44
Cost: 0/0
Tag: 0
Routing Table Display Commands
147
For detailed information of the output information, refer to Table 18.
display ip routing-table
protocol
Syntax
display ip routing-table protocol protocol [ inactive | verbose ]
View
All views
Parameters
protocol Enter one of the following:
■
direct Displays the direct connection route information
■
static Displays the static route information.
■
ospf Displays OSPF route information.
■
ospf-ase Displays OSPF ASE route information.
■
ospf-nssa Displays OSPF NSSA route information.
■
rip Displays RIP route information.
inactive Enter to display inactive route information. Without this parameter, the
command displays both active and inactive route information. Optional.
verbose Enter to display verbose route information. Without this parameter, the
command displays the route summary. Optional.
Description
Use the display ip routing-table protocol command to view the route
information for a specified protocol.
Example
To display a summary of all direct connection routes, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip routing-table protocol direct
The information displays in the following format:
DIRECT Routing tables:
Summary count: 4
DIRECT Routing tables status:&lt;active&gt;:
Summary count: 3
Destination/Mask
Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop
20.1.1.1/32
DIRECT
0
0
127.0.0.1
127.0.0.0/8
DIRECT
0
0
127.0.0.1
127.0.0.1/32
DIRECT
0
0
127.0.0.1
DIRECT Routing tables status:&lt;inactive&gt;:
Summary count: 1
Destination/Mask
Protocol Pre Cost Nexthop
210.0.0.1/32
DIRECT
0
0
127.0.0.1
Interface
InLoopBack0
InLoopBack0
InLoopBack0
Interface
InLoopBack0
To display a summary of all static route information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip routing-table protocol static
148
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
The information displays in the following format:
STATIC Routing tables:
Summary count: 1
STATIC Routing tables status:&lt;active&gt;:
Summary count: 0
STATIC Routing tables status:&lt;inactive&gt;:
Summary count: 1
Destination/Mask Protocol
Pre Cost Nexthop
1.2.3.0/24
STATIC
60 0
1.2.4.5
Interface
Vlan-interface2
The displayed information helps you to confirm whether the configuration of the
static routing is correct.
For detailed description of the output, refer to Table 17.
display ip routing-table
radix
Syntax
display ip routing-table radix
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip routing-table radix command to view the route
information in a tree structure.
Example
To display the route information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip routing-table radix
The information displays in the following format:
Radix tree for INET (2) inodes 7 routes 5:
+-32+--{210.0.0.1
+--0+
| | +--8+--{127.0.0.0
| | | +-32+--{127.0.0.1
| +--1+
| +--8+--{20.0.0.0
| +-32+--{20.1.1.1
Table 19 Output Description of the display ip routing-table radix Command
display ip routing-table
statistics
Field
Description
INET
Address suite
inodes
Number of nodes
routes
Number of routes
Syntax
display ip routing-table statistics
Routing Table Display Commands
149
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip routing-table statistics command to display the
routing information for all protocols.
The information includes the number of routes per protocol, the number of active
routes per protocol, the number of routes added and deleted per protocol, and
the number of routes that are labeled deleted but that are not deleted per
protocol. The total number of routes in each of these categories is also displayed.
Example
To display the integrated route information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip routing-table statistics
Routing tables:
Proto
route
DIRECT
2
STATIC
0
RIP
0
TOTAL
2
active
2
0
0
2
added
2
0
0
2
deleted
0
0
0
0
Table 20 Output Description of the display ip routing-table statistics
Command
display ip routing-table
verbose
Field
Description
Proto
Routing protocol
route
Number of routes
active
Number of active routes
added
Number of added routes after the router is rebooted or the routing
table is cleared last time.
deleted
Number of deleted routes (such routes will be freed in a period of
time)
Syntax
display ip routing-table verbose
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ip routing-table verbose command to display the verbose
routing table information.
150
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
The information displayed includes the route state, the verbose description of each
route and the statistics of the entire routing table.
All current routes, including inactive routes and invalid routes, are displayed.
Example
To display the verbose routing table information, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ip routing-table verbose
The information displays in the following format:
Routing Tables:
+ = Active Route, - = Last Active, # = Both
* = Next hop in use
Destinations: 3
Routes: 3
Holddown: 0
Delete: 62
Hidden: 0
**Destination: 1.1.1.0
Mask: 255.255.255.0
Protocol: #DIRECT
Preference: 0
*NextHop: 1.1.1.1
Interface:
1.1.1.1(Vlan-interface1)
State: &lt;Int ActiveU Retain Unicast&gt;
Age: 20:17:41
Cost: 0/0
**Destination: 1.1.1.1
Mask: 255.255.255.255
Protocol: #DIRECT
Preference: 0
*NextHop: 127.0.0.1
Interface: 127.0.0.1(InLoopBack0)
State: &lt;NoAdvise Int ActiveU Retain Gateway Unicast&gt;
Age: 20:17:42
Cost: 0/0
**Destination: 2.2.2.0
Mask: 255.255.255.0
Protocol: #DIRECT
Preference: 0
*NextHop: 2.2.2.1
Interface:
2.2.2.1(Vlan-interface2)
State: &lt;Int ActiveU Retain Unicast&gt;
Age: 20:08:05
Cost: 0/0
The meaning of route state is defined in Table 18. Other generated information is
described in Table 21.
Table 21 Output Description of the display ip routing-table verbose Command
Descriptor
Meaning
Holddown
The number of holddown routes.
This refers to a route advertising policy that some distance vector routing
protocols (such as RIP) use to avoid expansion of error routes and to improve
the transmission speed and accuracy of unreachable routes. It usually
advertises a static route at an interval, regardless of the changes to dynamic
routes to the same destination. For details, see the specific routing protocol.
Static Route
Configuration
Command
Delete
The number of deleted routes.
Hidden
The number of hidden routes, that is routes not available at present but still
required. They can be hidden for future use.
This section describes the command you can use to configure a static route.
Static Route Configuration Command
delete static-routes all
151
Syntax
delete static-routes all
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the delete static-routes all command to delete all the static routes.
The system requests your confirmation before it deletes all the configured static
routes.
Related commands: ip route-static and display ip routing-table.
Example
Delete all the static routes in the router.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]delete static-routes all
Are you sure to delete all the unicast static routes?[Y/N]
ip route-static
Syntax
ip route-static ip_address { mask | mask-length } { interface_name |
gateway_address } [ preference preference_value ] [ reject |
blackhole ]
undo ip route-static ip_address { mask | mask_length } [
interface_name | gateway_address ] [ preference preference_value ] [
reject | blackhole ]
View
System view
Parameters
ip_address Enter the destination IP address in dotted decimal notation.
mask Enter the IP subnet mask.
mask-length Enter the number of consecutive 1s in the mask. Because 1s in the
32-bit mask must be consecutive, the mask in dotted decimal format can be
replaced by mask-length.
interface_name Specify the transmission interface name of the route. Packets
that are sent to a NULL interface, are discarded immediately which decreases the
system load.
gateway_address Specify the next hop IP address of the route.
152
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
preference_value Enter the preference level of the route in the range 1 to 255.
The default preference is 60.
reject Enter to indicate an unreachable route.
blackhole Enter to indicate a blackhole route.
Description
Use the ip route-static command to configure a static route.
Use the undo ip route-static command to delete the configured static route.
By default, the system can access the subnet route directly connected to the
router. If you do not use the parameters preference, reject or blackhole, the
route will be reachable by default with a preference level of 60.
A static route is a special route. You can set up an interconnecting network with a
static route configuration. The problem for such configuration is when a fault
occurs to the network, the static route cannot change automatically to steer away
from the node causing the fault without the help of an administrator.
In a relatively simple network, a system administrator may chose to implement
static routes rather than a dynamic routing protocol. The proper configuration and
usage of static routes can improve the network performance and ensure
bandwidth for important applications.
All the following routes are static routes:
■
Reachable route — A normal route. That is, the IP packet is sent to the next
hop via the route marked by the destination. It is the most common type of
static route.
■
Unreachable route — When a static route to a destination has the &quot;reject&quot;
attribute, all the IP packets to this destination will be discarded, and the
originating host will be informed destination unreachable.
■
Blackhole route — If a static route to a destination has the &quot;blackhole&quot;
attribute, the outgoing interface of this route is the Null 0 interface regardless
of the next hop address, and all the IP packets addressed to this destination are
dropped without notifying the source host.
The attributes reject and blackhole are usually used to control the range of
reachable destinations of this router and to help troubleshoot the network.
Use the following precautions when configuring a static route:
■
You cannot specify an interface address of the local Switch as the next hop
address of a static route.
■
When the destination IP address and subnet mask are both set to 0.0.0.0, this
is the configured default route. A packet is forwarded using the default route
as a last resort if no better routing match is found in the routing table.
■
As an alternative way to configure preference level, a flexible routing protocol
can be adopted.
Related command: display ip routing-table, delete static-routes all.
RIP Configuration Commands
153
Example
To configure the next hop of the default route as 129.102.0.2, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 129.102.0.2
RIP Configuration
Commands
This section describes the commands you can use to configure the Routing
Information Protocol (RIP).
When the Switch 4500 runs a routing protocol, it is able to perform the functions
of a router. The term router in this section can refer either to a physical router or to
the Switch 4500 running a routing protocol.
checkzero
Syntax
checkzero
undo checkzero
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the checkzero command to check the zero field of RIP-1 packets. By default,
RIP-1 performs zero field checking.
Use the undo checkzero command to disable the checking of the zero fields.
According to the RFC1058 protocol specifications, some fields in RIP-1 packets
must be set to zero. These are called zero fields. During the zero check operation,
if a RIP-1 packet is received in which the zero fields are not zeros, it will be
rejected. Use the checkzero command to enable or disable the zero check
operation on RIP-1.
This command does not work with RIP-2 packets, since RIP-2 packets have no zero
fields.
Example
To configure the Switch not to perform zero checking for RIP-1 packet, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]undo checkzero
default cost
Syntax
default cost value
154
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
undo default cost
View
RIP view
Parameter
value Enter the default routing cost, in the range 1 to 16. The default is 1.
Description
Use the default cost command to set the default routing cost of an imported
route.
Use the undo default cost command to restore the default value.
If you do not specify a routing cost when using the import-route command, the
default cost you specify here is used.
Related command: import-route.
Example
To set the default routing cost of the imported route of another routing protocol
to 3, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]default cost 3
display rip
Syntax
display rip
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display rip command to view the current RIP running state and its
configuration information.
Example
To display the current running state and configuration information of RIP, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;display rip
RIP is running
public net VPN-Instance
Checkzero is on
Default cost : 1
Summary is on
Preference : 100
Period update timer : 30
Timeout timer : 180
RIP Configuration Commands
155
Garbage-collection timer : 120
No peer router
Network :
202.38.168.0
Table 22 Output Description of the display rip Command
Field
Description
RIP is running
RIP is active
Checkzero is on
Zero field checking is enabled
Default cost:1
The default route cost is 1
Summary is on
Routes are summarized automatically
Preference: 100
The preference of RIP is 100
Period update timer : 30
The three RIP timers
Timeout timer : 180
Garbage-collection timer : 120
filter-policy export
No peer router
No destination address of a transmission is specified
Network: 202.38.168.0
RIP enabled on network segment 202.38.168.0
Syntax
filter-policy { acl_number | gateway gateway-ip | ip-prefix
ip_prefix_name } export [routing_process]
filter-policy route-policy route-policy-name export
undo filter-policy { acl_number | gateway gateway-ip | ip-prefix
ip_prefix-name } export [routing_process]
undo filter-policy route-policy route-policy-name export
View
RIP view
Parameters
acl_number Enter the number of the ACL that you want to use to filter the
destination addresses of the routing information.
gateway-ip
ip_prefix_name Enter the name of the address prefix list that you want to use to
filter the destination addresses of the routing information.
route-policy-name: Route policy name that filters routing information. After
enabling RIP protocol, you can determine which routes are to be sent/received
based on acl/cost/interface/ip/ip-prefix/tag fields.
routing_protocol Enter the routing protocol whose routing information is to be
filtered. This can be one of the following:
■
direct — Specifies direct routes
■
static — Specifies static routes.
156
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Description
Use the filter-policy export command to configure RIP to filter the advertised
routing information.
Use the undo filter-policy export command to configure RIP not to filter the
advertised routing information. This is the default.
Related commands: acl, filter-policy import, ip ip-prefix.
Example
To filter the advertised route information using ACL 2000, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]filter-policy 2000 export
filter-policy import
Syntax
filter-policy gateway ip_prefix_name import
undo filter-policy gateway ip_prefix_name import
filter-policy { acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name [ gateway
ip_prefix_name ] | route-policy route-policy-name } import
undo filter-policy { acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name | [
gateway ip_prefix_name ] | route-policy route-policy-name } import
View
RIP View
Parameters
gateway ip_prefix_name Enter the name of the address prefix list. This is used to
filter the addresses of the neighboring routers that are advertising the routing
information.
acl_number Enter an ACL number. This is used to filter the destination addresses
of the routing information.
ip_prefix_name Enter the name of the address prefix list. This is used to filter the
destination addresses of the routing information.
route-policy-name: Route policy name that filters routing information. After
enabling RIP protocol, you can determine which routes are to be sent/received
based on acl/cost/interface/ip/ip-prefix fields.
Description
Use the filter-policy gateway import command to configure the switch to
filter the routing information received from a specified address.
Use the undo filter-policy gateway import command to configure the
switch not to filter the routing information received from the specified address.
RIP Configuration Commands
157
Use the filter-policy import command to configure the switch to filter global
routing information.
Use the undo filter-policy import command to disable filtering of received
global routing information.
By default, RIP does not filter the received routing information.
Related commands: acl, filter-policy export, ip ip-prefix.
Example
To configure the filtering of the global routing information using acl 2000, enter
the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]filter-policy 2000 import
host-route
Syntax
host-route
undo host-route
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the host-route command to configure RIP to accept host routes. This is the
default.
Use the undo host-route command to configure RIP to reject host routes.
Example
To configure RIP to reject a host route, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]undo host-route
import-route
Syntax
import-route protocol [ cost value | route-policy route-policy-name
]
undo import-route protocol
View
RIP view
158
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Parameters
protocol Enter the routing protocol to be imported. This can be one of the
following: direct or static.
value Enter the cost value of the route to be imported.
route-policy route_policy_name Enter a route-policy name. Only routes that
match the conditions of the specified policy are imported.
Description
Use the import-route command to import the routes of other protocols into RIP.
Use the undo import-route command to cancel the import of routes from other
protocols. By default, RIP does not import any other protocol’s route.
The import-route command can be used to import the route of another protocol
with a certain cost value. RIP regards the imported route as its own route and
transmits it with the specified cost value. This command can greatly enhance the
RIP capability of obtaining routes, thus increases the RIP performance.
If the cost value is not specified, routes will be imported according to the
default cost ranging from 1 to 16. If the imported route cost value is 16, then
RIP continues to announce this cost to other routers running RIP, and marks this
route with HOLDDOWN. However, this router can still forward packets until the
Garbage Collection timer times out (defaults to 120 seconds).
Related commands: default cost.
Example
To import a static route with a cost of 4, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]import-route static cost 4
network
Syntax
network network_address
undo network network_address
View
RIP view
Parameter
network_address Enter the IP network address of an interface.
Description
Use the network command to enable Routing Information Protocol (RIP) on the
interface of a specified network segment connected to the router.
RIP Configuration Commands
159
Use the undo network command to disable RIP on the interface. By default, RIP is
disabled on an interface.
After you have enabled RIP, you must also enable RIP for a specified interface using
this command. RIP only operates on the interface of specified network segments.
The undo network command is similar to the undo rip work command in the
VLAN Interface View, in that an interface using either command will result in the
interface not receiving/transmitting RIP routes. However, if you use undo rip
work, other interfaces will still forward the routes of the interfaces set to undo rip
work. If you use undo network, other interfaces will not forward the routes of
interfaces set to undo network.
When the network command is used on an IP address, the interface on this
network segment is enabled. For example, if you view the network 129.102.1.1
with both the display current-configuration command and the display
rip, the IP address is shown as 129.102.0.0.
Related commands: rip work.
Example
To enable RIP on the interface with the network address 129.102.0.1, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]network 129.102.0.0
peer
Syntax
peer ip_address
undo peer ip_address
View
RIP view
Parameter
ip_address Enter the interface IP address of the peer router.
Description
Use the peer command to configure the destination address of the peer device.
Use the undo peer command to cancel the set destination address. By default,
there is no destination address.
3Com recommends that you do not use this command. RIP can use unicast to
exchange information with non-broadcasting networks. If required, you can use
this command to specify the destination address of the peer device.
Example
To specify the sending destination address as 202.38.165.1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
160
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]peer 202.38.165.1
preference
Syntax
preference value
undo preference
View
RIP view
Parameter
value Enter the preference level, in the range 1 to 255. By default, the value is
100.
Description
Use the preference command to configure the route preference of RIP.
Use the undo preference command to restore the default preference.
The default value of each routing protocol is determined by the specific routing
policy. This “preference” determines the optimal route in the IP routing table. You
can use this command to modify the RIP preference.
Example
To specify a RIP preference of 20, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]preference 20
reset
Syntax
reset
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset command to reset the system configuration parameters of RIP.
When you need to re-configure parameters of RIP, this command can be used to
restore to the default setting.
Example
Reset the RIP system.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
RIP Configuration Commands
161
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]reset
rip
Syntax
rip
undo rip
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the rip command to enable RIP and enter the RIP command view. From here,
you can configure RIP using the other commands described in this section.
Use the undo rip command to disable RIP. By default, RIP is disabled.
Enabling RIP does not affect interface configurations.
Example
To enable RIP, and enter RIP view, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]
rip authentication-mode
Syntax
rip authentication-mode { simple password | md5 { usual key-string |
nonstandard key-string key-id }}
undo rip authentication-mode
View
Interface View
Parameters
simple Enter to specify simple text authentication mode.
password Enter the simple text authentication key.
md5 Enter to specify MD5 cipher text authentication mode.
usual Enter to specify the MD5 cipher text authentication packet to use the
general packet format (RFC1723 standard format).
key-string Enter the MD5 cipher text authentication key. If it is entered in plain
text, the MD5 key is a character string not exceeding 16 characters. This key is
displayed in a cipher text form in a length of 24 characters when display
162
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
current-configuration command is executed. Inputting the MD5 key in cipher
text form with 24 characters long is also supported.
nonstandard: Enter to set the MD5 cipher text authentication packet to use a
packet format (as described in RFC2082).
key-id Enter an MD5 cipher text authentication identifier, ranging from 1 to 255.
Description
Use the rip authentication-mode command to configure the RIP-2
authentication mode and its parameters for the Switch 4500.
Use the rip authentication-mode simple command to configure the RIP-2
simple text authentication key.
Use the rip authentication-mode md5 usual key-string to configure the
MD5 cipher text authentication key for RIP-2.
Use the rip authentication-mode md5 nonstandard key-string key-id
command to configure the MD5 cipher text authentication ID for RIP-2.
Use the undo rip authentication-mode command to cancel RIP-2
authentication.
There are two RIP-2 authentication modes: simple authentication and MD5 cipher
text authentication. When you use MD5 cipher text authentication mode, two
types of packet formats are available. The standard format (set using the usual
parameter), is described in RFC 1723. The non-standard format (set using the
nonstandard parameter), is described in RFC 2082.
RIP-1 does not support authentication.
Related command: rip version.
Example
To specify the interface “Vlan-interface 1” to use simple authentication with the
key set to “aaa”, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip version 2
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip authentication-mode simple aaa
[4500-Vlan-interface1]quit
To specify the interface Vlan-interface 1 to use MD5 authentication with the key
string as “aaa” and the packet type set to usual, enter the following:
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip version 2
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip authentication-mode md5 key-string aaa
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip authentication-mode md5 type nonstandard
RIP Configuration Commands
163
To set MD5 authentication on Vlan-interface 1 with the key string set to “aaa”
and the packet type set to usual, enter the following:
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip version 2
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip authentication-mode md5 usual aaa
rip input
Syntax
rip input
undo rip input
View
Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the rip input command to allow an interface to receive RIP packets. By
default, all interfaces except loopback interfaces are able to receive RIP packets.
Use the undo rip input command to block an interface from receiving RIP
packets.
This command is used in conjunction with two other two commands: rip output
and rip work. The rip input and rip output commands control, respectively,
the receipt and the transmission of RIP packets on an interface. The rip work
command allows both receipt and transmission of RIP packets.
Related commands: rip output, rip work.
Example
To set the interface Vlan-interface 1 not to receive RIP packets, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]undo rip input
rip metricin
Syntax
rip metricin value
undo rip metricin
View
Interface View
Parameter
value Enter an additional route metric to be added when receiving a packet,
ranging from 0 to 16. By default, the value is 0.
164
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Description
Use the rip metricin command to configure an additional route metric to be
added to the route when an interface receives RIP packets.
Use the undo rip metricin command to restore the default value of this
additional route metric.
Related command: rip metricout.
Example
To set the additional route metric to 2 when the interface Vlan-interface 1 receives
RIP packets, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip metricin 2
rip metricout
Syntax
rip metricout value
undo rip metricout
View
Interface View
Parameter
value Enter an additional route metric added when transmitting a packet,
ranging from 1 to 16. By default, the value is 1.
Description
Use the rip metricout command to configure an additional route metric to be
added to a route when an interface transmits RIP packets.
Use the undo rip metricout command to restore the default value of the
additional route metric.
Related command: rip metricin.
Example
To set the additional route metric to 2 when the interface Vlan-interface 1
transmits RIP packets, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip metricout 2
rip output
Syntax
rip output
undo rip output
RIP Configuration Commands
165
View
Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the rip output command to allow an interface to transmit RIP packets.
Use the undo rip output command to disable an interface from transmitting RIP
packets.
By default, all interfaces except loopback interfaces are able to transmit RIP
packets.
This command is used in conjunction with two other commands: rip input and
rip work. rip input and rip output control, respectively, the receipt and the
transmission of RIP packets on an interface. rip work allows both receipt and
transmission of RIP packets.
Related commands; rip input, rip work.
Example
To prevent the interface Vlan-interface 1 from transmitting RIP packets, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]undo rip output
rip split-horizon
Syntax
rip split-horizon
undo rip split-horizon
View
Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the rip split-horizon command to configure an interface to use split
horizon when transmitting RIP packets. This is the default.
Use the undo rip split-horizon command to configure an interface not to use
split horizon when transmitting RIP packets.
Normally, split horizon is necessary for preventing router loops. You may need to
disable split horizon to ensure proper operation of protocols.
166
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
Example
To set the interface Vlan-interface 1 not to use split horizon when processing RIP
packets, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]undo rip split-horizon
rip version
Syntax
rip version 1
rip version 2 [ broadcast | multicast ]
undo rip version
View
Interface View
Parameters
1 Enter to set the interface version to RIP-1.
2 Enter to set the interface version to RIP-2.
broadcast Enter to set the transmission mode of a RIP-2 packet to broadcast.
multicast Enter to set the transmission mode of a RIP-2 packet to multicast.
Description
Use the rip version command to configure the version number of RIP packets
on an interface.
Use the undo rip version command to restore the default RIP packet version on
the interface. The interface RIP version is RIP-1.
By default, RIP-1 transmits packets in broadcast mode, while RIP-2 transmits
packets in multicast mode.
When running RIP-1, the interface receives and transmits RIP-1 packets, and can
also receive RIP-2 broadcast packets.
When running RIP-2 in broadcast mode, the interface receives and transmits RIP-2
broadcast packets, and can also receive both RIP-1 packets and RIP-2 multicast
packets.
When running RIP-2 in multicast mode, the interface receives and transmits RIP-2
multicast packets, and can also receive RIP-2 broadcast packets. The interface can
not receive RIP-1 packets.
Example
To configure the interface Vlan-interface 1 to RIP-2 broadcast mode, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
RIP Configuration Commands
167
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip version 2 broadcast
rip work
Syntax
rip work
undo rip work
View
Interface View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the rip work command to enable the RIP on an interface. This is the default.
Use the undo rip work command to disable RIP on an interface.
This command is used in conjunction with the rip input, rip output and
network commands. Refer to the descriptions of these commands for details.
Related commands: network, rip input, rip output.
Example
To disable the running of RIP on interface Vlan-interface 1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]undo rip work
summary
Syntax
summary
undo summary
View
RIP view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the summary command to activate RIP-2 automatic route summarization. This
is the default.
Use the undo summary command to disable RIP-2 automatic route summarization.
Route aggregation can be performed to reduce the routing traffic on the network
as well as to reduce the size of the routing table. RIP-1 does not support subnet
masks. Forwarding subnetted routes may cause ambiguity. Networks that use
RIP-1 should always use the natural mask. Therefore, RIP-1 uses route
168
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
summarization all the time. If RIP-2 is used, route summarization function can be
disabled with the undo summary command, when it is necessary to broadcast the
subnet route.
Related command: rip version
Example
To set the RIP version on the interface Vlan-interface 1 to RIP-2, and then disable
the route aggregation, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Vlan-interface 1
[4500-Vlan-interface1]rip version 2
[4500-Vlan-interface1]quit
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]undo summary
timers
Syntax
timers { update update-timer-length | timeout timeout-timer-length }
*
undo timers { update | timeout } *
View
RIP View
Parameters
update-timer-length Enter the value of the period update timer, ranging from 1
to 3600 seconds. The default value is 30 seconds.
timeout-timer-length Enter the value of the timeout timer, ranging from 1 to
3600 seconds. The default value is 180 seconds.
Description
Use the timers command to modify the values of the three RIP timers: period
update, timeout, and garbage-collection.
Use the undo timers command to restore the default settings.
By default, the values of period update, timeout, and garbage-collection timers
are 30 seconds, 180 seconds, and 120 seconds, respectively.
Generally, the value of the garbage-collection timer is fixed to 4 times the value of
the period update timer. Adjusting the period update timer will affect the
garbage-collection timer.
The modification of RIP timers takes effect immediately.
Related Command: display rip
RIP Configuration Commands
169
Example
Set the values of the Period Update timer and the Timeout timer of RIP to 10
seconds and 30 seconds respectively.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]rip
[4500-rip]timers update 10 timeout 30
170
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
IP Routing Policy
Configuration
Commands
This section describes the commands you can use to configure IP Routing Policy.
These commands operate across all routing protocols.
When the Switch 4500 runs a routing protocol, it is able to perform the functions
of a router. The term router in this section can refer either to a physical router or to
the Switch 4500 running a routing protocol.
apply cost
Syntax
apply cost value
undo apply cost
View
Route Policy View
Parameter
value Enter the route cost value of route information.
Description
Use the apply cost command to configure the route cost value of route
information. This command is one of the apply sub-statements of the
Route-policy attribute set.
Use the undo apply cost command to cancel the apply sub-statement.
Related commands: if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix,
if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, and route-policy.
Example
Define one apply sub-statement. When it is used for setting route information
attribute, it sets the route metric value of route information to 120.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]route-policy permit node 1
% New sequence of this list
[4500-route-policy]apply cost 120
display ip ip-prefix
Syntax
display ip ip-prefix [ ip_prefix_name ]
View
All views
Parameter
ip_prefix_name Enter displayed address prefix list name.
Description
Use the display ip ip-prefix command to view the address prefix list.
Related command: ip ip-prefix.
IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands
171
Example
Display the information of the address prefix list named to p1.
&lt;4500&gt;display ip ip-prefix p1
name
index
conditions ip-prefix / mask
p1
10
permit
10.1.0.0/16
GE
17
LE
18
Table 23 Output Description of the display ip-ip prefix Command
display route-policy
Field
Description
name
Name of ip-prefix
index
Internal sequence number of ip-prefix
conditions
Mode: permit or deny
ip-prefix
Address and network segment length of ip-prefix
GE
Greater-equal value of ip-prefix network segment length
LE
Less-equal value of ip-prefix network segment length
Syntax
display route-policy [ route_policy_name ]
View
All views
Parameter
route_policy_name Specify displayed Route-policy name.
Description
Use the display route-policy command to view the configured Route-policy
Related command: route-policy.
Example
Display the information of Route-policy named as policy1.
&lt;4500&gt;display route-policy policy1
Route-policy : policy1
Permit 10 : if-match (prefixlist) p1
apply cost 100
matched : 0
denied : 0
Table 24 Output Description of the display route-policy Command
Field
Description
Route-policy
Name of ip-prefix
Permit 10
Information of the route-policy with mode as permit and node as 10:
■
if-match (prefixlist) p1 — The configured if-match clause
■
apply cost 100 — Apply routing cost 100 to the routes matching the
conditions defined by if-match clause
■
matched — Number of routes matchng the conditions set by if-match
clause
■
denied — Number of routes not matching the conditions set by if-match
clause
172
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
if-match { acl | ip-prefix }
Syntax
if-match { acl acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name }
undo if-match [ acl | ip-prefix ]
View
Route policy view
Parameter
acl_number Enter the number of the access control list used for filtration
ip_prefix_name Enter the prefix address list used for filtration
Description
Use the if-match { acl | ip-prefix } command to configure the IP address
range to match the Route-policy.
Use the undo if-match { acl | ip-prefix } command to cancel the setting of
the match rule.
Filtration is performed by quoting an ACL or a prefix address list.
Related command: if-match interface, if-match ip next-hop, if-match
cost, route-policy, apply cost.
Example
Define one if-match sub-statement. When the sub-statement is used for filtering
route information, the route information filtered by the route destination address
through address prefix list p1 can pass the if-match sub-statement.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]route-policy permit node 1
% New sequence of this list
[4500-route-policy]if-match ip-prefix p1
if-match cost
Syntax
if-match cost value
undo if-match cost
View
Route policy view
Parameter
value Specify the required route metric value, ranging from 0 to 4294967295.
Description
Use the if-match cost command to configure one of the match rules of
route-policy to match the cost of the routing information.
Use the undo if-match cost command to cancel the configuration of the match
rule.
IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands
173
By default, no match sub-statement is defined.
Related commands: if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix,
if-match ip next-hop, if-match tag, route-policy, apply ip next-hop,
apply local-preference, apply cost, apply origin and apply tag.
Example
A match sub-statement is defined, which allows the routing information with
routing cost 8 to pass this match sub-statement.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]route-policy permit node 1
% New sequence of this list
[4500-route-policy]if-match cost 8
if-match interface
Syntax
if-match interface { interface_name | interface_type
interface_number }
undo if-match interface
View
Route policy view
Parameter
interface_type Enter interface type.
interface_number Enter interface number.
interface_name Enter interface name.
Description
Use the if-match interface command to match the route whose next hop is the
designated interface.
Use the undo if-match interface command to cancel the setting of matching
condition.
By default, no match sub-statement is defined.
Related command: if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix, if-match ip
next-hop, if-match cost, route-policy, apply cost.
Example
Define one match sub-statement to match the route whose next hop interface is
Vlan-interface 1.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]route-policy permit node 1
% New sequence of this list
[4500-route-policy]if-match interface Vlan-interface 1
174
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
if-match ip next-hop
Syntax
if-match ip next-hop { acl acl_number | ip-prefix ip_prefix_name }
undo if-match ip next-hop [ ip-prefix ]
View
Route policy view
Parameter
acl_number Enter the number of the access control list used for filtration. The
range is 1 to 99.
ip_prefix_name Enter the name of the prefix address list used for filtration.
Description
Use the if-match ip next-hop command to configure one of the match rules of
route-policy on the next hop address of the routing information.
Use the undo if-match ip next-hop command to cancel the setting of the ACL
matching condition. Use the undo if-match ip next-hop ip-prefix
command to cancel the setting of the address prefix list matching condition.
Filtration is performed by quoting an ACL or a address prefix list.
Related commands: if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix,
if-match cost, route-policy, apply cost.
Example
Define a match sub-statement. It permits the routing information, whose route
next hop address passes the filtration of the prefix address list p1, to pass this
match sub-statement.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]route-policy permit node 1
% New sequence of this list
[4500-route-policy]if-match ip next-hop ip-prefix p1
ip ip-prefix
Syntax
ip ip-prefix ip_prefix_name [ index index_number ] { permit | deny }
network len [ greater-equal greater_equal | less-equal less_equal ]
undo ip ip-prefix ip_prefix_name [ index index_number | permit | deny
]
View
System view
Parameter
ip_prefix_name Enter the specified address prefix list name. It identifies one
address prefix list uniquely.
IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands
175
index_number Identify an item in the prefix address list. The item with smaller
index-number will be tested first.
permit Enter to specify the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as
permit mode.
deny Enter to specify the match mode of the defined address prefix list items as
deny mode.
network Enter the IP address prefix range (IP address). If it is 0.0.0.0 0, all the IP
addresses are matched.
len Enter the IP address prefix range (mask length). If it is 0.0.0.0 0, all the IP
addresses are matched.
greater_equal, less_equal The address prefix range [greater-equal, less-equal]
to be matched after the address prefix network len has been matched. The
meaning of greater-equal is &quot;larger than or equal to&quot; , and the meaning of
less-equal is &quot;less than or equal to&quot;. The range is len &lt;= greater-equal &lt;=
less-equal &lt;= 32. When only greater-equal is used, it denotes the prefix range
[greater-equal, 32]. When only less-equal is used, it denotes the prefix range
[len, less-equal].
Description
Use the ip ip-prefix command to configure an address prefix list or one of its
items.
Use the undo ip ip-prefix command to delete an address prefix list or one of its
items.
By default, there’s no address prefix list.
The address prefix list is used for IP address filtering. An address prefix list may
contain several items, and each item specifies one address prefix range. The
inter-item filtering relation is &quot;OR&quot;, i.e. passing an item means passing the filtering
of this address prefix list. Not passing the filtering of any item means not passing
the filtration of this prefix address list.
The address prefix range may contain two parts, which are determined by len and
[greater-equal, less-equal] respectively. If the prefix ranges of these two parts
are both specified, the IP to be filtered must match the prefix ranges of these two
parts.
If you specify network len as 0.0.0.0 0, it only matches the default route.
Example
The prefix address list of this address indicates to match the bits 1 to 8 and the bits
17 to 18 for filtering the IP address with the bits 1 to 8 and the bits 17 to 18 of the
specified IP network segment 10.0.192.0.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]ip ip-prefix p1 permit 10.0.192.0 8 greater-equal 17
less-equal 18
176
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
route-policy
Syntax
route-policy route_policy_name { permit | deny } node { node_number }
undo route-policy route_policy_name [ permit | deny | node
node_number ]
View
System view
Parameter
route_policy_name Enter the Route-policy name to identify one Route-policy
uniquely.
permit Enter to specify the match mode of the defined Route-policy node as
permit mode.
deny Enter to specify the match mode of the defined Route-policy node as deny
mode.
node Enter the node of the route policy.
node_number Enter the index of the node in the route-policy. When this
route-policy is used for routing information filtration, the node with smaller
node-number will be tested first.
Description
Use the route-policy command to create and enter the Route-policy view.
Use the undo route-policy command to delete the established Route-policy.
By default, no Route-policy is defined.
The route-policy command is used for route information filtration or route
policy. One Route-policy comprises some nodes and each node comprises some
match and apply sub-statements. The match sub-statement defines the match
rules of this node and the apply sub-statement defines the actions after passing
the filtration of this node. The filtering relationship between the match
sub-statements of the node is “and”, that is, all match sub-statements that meet
the node. The filtering relation between Route-policy nodes is &quot;OR&quot;, i.e. passing
the filtering of one node means passing the filtering of this Route-policy. If the
information does not pass the filtration of any nodes, it cannot pass the filtration
of this Route-policy.
Related commands: if-match interface, if-match acl, if-match ip-prefix,
if-match ip next-hop, if-match cost, apply cost.
Example
Configured one Route-policy policy1, whose node number is 10 and if-match
mode is permit, and enter Route policy view.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]route-policy policy permit node 10
% New sequence of this list
IP Routing Policy Configuration Commands
[4500-route-policy]
177
178
CHAPTER 6: USING ROUTING PROTOCOL COMMANDS
7
USING MULTICAST PROTOCOL
COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands
■
display igmp-snooping configuration
■
display igmp-snooping group
■
display igmp-snooping statistics
■
igmp-snooping
■
igmp-snooping host-aging-time
■
igmp-snooping max-response-time
■
igmp-snooping router-aging-time
■
reset igmp-snooping statistics
180
CHAPTER 7: USING MULTICAST PROTOCOL COMMANDS
IGMP Snooping
Configuration
Commands
display igmp-snooping
configuration
This section describes how to use the Internet Group Management Protocol
(IGMP) configuration commands on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
display igmp-snooping configuration
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display igmp-snooping configuration command to view the IGMP
Snooping configuration information.
This command is used to display the IGMP Snooping configuration information of
the Switch. The information displayed includes whether IGMP Snooping is
enabled, router port timeout, maximum response timeout of a query and the
member port timeout.
Related command: igmp-snooping.
Example
Display the IGMP Snooping configuration information of the Switch.
&lt;4500&gt;display igmp-snooping configuration
Enable IGMP-Snooping.
The router port timeout is 300 second(s).
The max response timeout is 50 second(s).
The member port timeout is 500 second(s).
The information above tells us that: IGMP Snooping is enabled; the router port
timer is set to be 300 seconds; the max response timer is set to be 50 seconds; the
aging timer of multicast group member is set to be 500 seconds.
display igmp-snooping
group
Syntax
display igmp-snooping group [ vlan vlan_id ]
View
All views
Parameter
vlan vlan_id: Specifies the VLAN where the multicast group to be viewed is
located. When the parameter is omitted, the command will display the
information about all the multicast groups on the VLAN.
Description
Use the display igmp-snooping group command to view the IP multicast groups
and MAC multicast groups under VLAN.
IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands
181
This command displays the IP multicast group and MAC multicast group
information of a VLAN or all the VLAN where the Ethernet Switch is located. It
displays the information such as VLAN ID, router port, IP multicast group address,
member ports in the IP multicast group, MAC multicast group, MAC multicast
group address, and the member ports in the MAC multicast group.
Example
Display the multicast group information about VLAN2.
&lt;4500&gt;display igmp-snooping group vlan 2
***************Multicast group table***************
Vlan(id):2.
Router port(s):Ethernet1/0/1
IP group(s):the following ip group(s) match to one mac group.
IP group address:230.45.45.1
Member port(s):Ethernet1/0/2
MAC group(s):
MAC group address:01-00-5e-2d-2d-01
Member port(s):Ethernet1/0/2
The display above shows that:
display igmp-snooping
statistics
■
There is a multicast group in VLAN 2;
■
The router port is Ethernet 1/0/1;
■
The address of the multicast group is 230.45.45.1;
■
The member of the IP multicast group is Ethernet 1/0/2;
■
MAC multicast group is 0100-5e2d-2d01;
■
The member of the MAC multicast group is Ethernet 1/0/2
Syntax
display igmp-snooping statistics
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display igmp-snooping statistics command to view the statistics
information on IGMP Snooping.
This command displays the statistics information about IGMP Snooping of the
Ethernet Switch. It displays the information such as number of received general
IGMP query packets, received IGMP specific query packets, received IGMP Version
1 and Version 2 report packets, received IGMP leave packets and error packets,
and sent IGMP specific query packets.
Related command: igmp-snooping.
Example
Display statistics information about IGMP Snooping.
182
CHAPTER 7: USING MULTICAST PROTOCOL COMMANDS
&lt;4500&gt;display igmp-snooping statistics
Received IGMP general query packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP specific query packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP V1 report packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP V2 report packet(s) number:0.
Received IGMP leave packet(s) number:0.
Received error IGMP packet(s) number:0.
Sent IGMP specific query packet(s) number:0.
igmp-snooping
Syntax
igmp-snooping { enable | disable }
View
System View
Parameter
enable: Enable IGMP Snooping.
disable: Disables IGMP Snooping; By default, the Switch disables IGMP Snooping
feature.
Description
Use the igmp-snooping enable command to enable/disable IGMP Snooping.
Use the igmp-snooping disable command to restore the default setting.
Although layer 2 and layer 3 multicast protocols can run together, they cannot run
on the same VLAN or its corresponding VLAN interface at the same time. For
example, if the layer 2 multicast protocol is enabled on a VLAN, then the layer 3
multicast protocol cannot operate on this VLAN, and vice versa.
IGMP Snooping functions only when it is enabled both in System View and in
VLAN View. You must first enable IGMP Snooping globally in System View and
then the VLAN View before configuring it. Otherwise, the IGMP Snooping fails to
operate.
Example
Enable IGMP Snooping on VLAN 100.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]igmp-snooping enable
[4500]vlan 100
[4500-vlan100]igmp-snooping enable
igmp-snooping
host-aging-time
Syntax
igmp-snooping host-aging-time seconds
undo igmp-snooping host-aging-time
View
System View
IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands
183
Parameter
seconds: Specifies the port aging time of the multicast group member, ranging
from 200 to 1000 and measured in seconds. The default is 260.
Description
Use the igmp-snooping host-aging-time command to configure the port aging
time of the multicast group members.
Use the undo igmp-snooping host-aging-time command to restore the default
value.
This command sets the aging time of the multicast group member so that the
refresh frequency can be controlled. When the group members change frequently,
the aging time should be comparatively short, and vice versa.
Related command: igmp-snooping.
Example
Set the aging time to 300 seconds.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]igmp-snooping host-aging-time 300
igmp-snooping
max-response-time
Syntax
igmp-snooping max-response-time seconds
undo igmp-snooping max-response-time
View
System View
Parameter
seconds: Maximum response time for a query ranging from 1 to 25 and
measured in seconds. The default is 10.
Description
Use the igmp-snooping max-response-time command to configure the
maximum response time for a query.
Use the undo igmp-snooping max-response-time command to restore the
default value.
The set maximum response time decides the time limit for the Switch to respond
to IGMP Snooping general query packets.
Related commands: igmp-snooping, igmp-snooping router-aging-time.
Example
Configure to respond to the IGMP Snooping packet within 20s.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
184
CHAPTER 7: USING MULTICAST PROTOCOL COMMANDS
[4500]igmp-snooping max-response-time 20
igmp-snooping
router-aging-time
Syntax
igmp-snooping router-aging-time seconds
undo igmp-snooping router-aging-time
View
System View
Parameter
seconds: Specifies the router port aging time, ranging from 1 to 1000 measured
in seconds. The default is 105.
Description
Use the igmp-snooping router-aging-time command to configure the router
port aging time of IGMP Snooping.
Use the undo igmp-snooping router-aging-time command to restore the
default value.
The port here refers to the Switch port connected to the router. The Layer-2
Ethernet Switch receives general query packets from the router via this port. The
timer should be set to about 2.5 times of the general query period of the router.
Related commands: igmp-snooping, igmp-snooping max-response-time.
Example
Set the aging time of the IGMP Snooping router port to 500 seconds.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]igmp-snooping router-aging-time 500
reset igmp-snooping
statistics
Syntax
reset igmp-snooping statistics
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset igmp-snooping statistics command to reset the IGMP
Snooping statistics information.
Related command: igmp-snooping.
Example
Clear IGMP Snooping statistics information.
IGMP Snooping Configuration Commands
&lt;4500&gt;reset igmp-snooping statistics
185
186
CHAPTER 7: USING MULTICAST PROTOCOL COMMANDS
8
USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
ACL Commands List
■
acl
■
display acl
■
display packet-filter
■
packet-filter
■
reset acl counter
■
rule
QoS Configuration Commands List
■
display mirror
■
display qos cos-local-precedence- map
■
display qos-interface all
■
display qos-interface line-rate
■
display qos-interface mirrored-to
■
display qos-interface traffic-limit
■
line-rate
■
mirrored-to
■
mirroring-port
■
monitor-port
■
priority
■
priority trust
■
qos cos-local-precedence -map
■
traffic-limit
■
wred
Logon user’s ACL Control Command
■
acl
■
ip http acl
■
snmp-agent community
■
snmp-agent group
■
snmp-agent usm-user
188
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
ACL Commands List
This section describes how to use the ACL configuration commands on your
Switch 4500.
acl
Syntax
acl acl-number1 { inbound | outbound }
undo acl acl-number1 { inbound | outbound }
acl acl-number2 inbound
undo acl acl-number2 inbound
View
User interface view
Parameter
acl-number1: Number of number-based basic and advanced ACLs, in the
range of 2,000 to 3,999.
acl-number2: Number of number-based L2 ACLs, in the range of 4,000 to
4,999.
inbound: Implements ACL control over the users logging into local
switch in the TELNET or SSH mode.
outbound: Implements ACL control over the users logging into other
switches from local switch in the TELNET or SSH mode.
Description
Use the acl command to use ACLs, implementing ACL control over TELNET or SSH
users.
Use the undo acl command to cancel the ACL control over TELNET or SSH users.
■
You can only use number-based ACLs for TELNET or SSH user ACL control.
■
When TELNET or SSH users use basic or advanced ACLs, the incoming/outgoing
calls are restricted on the basis of the source or destination IP address. As a
result, when you use the rules for basic and advanced ACLs, only the source IP
and the corresponding mask, the destination IP and the corresponding mask,
and the time-range keyword take effect. When TELNET and SSH users use L2
ACLs, the incoming/outgoing calls are restricted on the basis of source MAC
addresses. As a result, when you use the rules for L2 ACLs, only the source
MAC and the corresponding mask, and the time-range keyword take effect.
■
When you control telnet and SSH users on the basis of L2 ACLs, only the
incoming calls are restricted.
■
If a user is refused to log in due to ACL restriction, the system will record the
log information about an access failure. The log information includes the user
IP address, login mode, index value for a login user interface and reason for
login failure.
By default, the incoming/outgoing calls of the user interface are not restricted.
Example
# Implement ACL control over users logging into local switch in the TELNET mode.
(You have defined basic ACL 2000)
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
ACL Commands List
189
[4500] user-interface vty 0 4
[4500-user-interface-vty0-4] acl 2000 inbound
display acl
Syntax
display acl { all | acl-number }
View
All views
Parameter
all: Displays all ACLs.
acl-number: Specifies the sequence number of the ACL to be displayed. It can be
a number chosen from 2000 to 5999.
Description
Use the display acl command to view the detailed configuration information
about the ACL, including every rule, sequence number and the number and byte
number of the packets matched with this rule.
The matched times displayed by this command are software matched times,
namely, the matched times of the ACL to be processed by the Switch CPU. You
can use the traffic-statistic command to calculate the matched times of
hardware during packet-forwarding
Example
Display the content of all the ACLs.
&lt;4500&gt;display acl all
Basic acl 2000, 0 rule,match-order is auto
Acl’s step is 1
Advanced ACL 3000, 1 rule
Acl's step is 1
rule 1 permit ip (0 times matched)
display packet-filter
Syntax
display packet-filter { interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num } | unitid unit-id }
View
Any view
Parameter
interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num }: Interface
of the Switch, for more detail, please refer to the port command in this guide.
unitid unit-id: Unit ID. If user inputs this parameter, all the packet-filtering
information of the specified unit will be displayed.
190
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
Description
Use the display packet-filter command to view the information of the packet
filter function. The displayed content includes ACL number, subitem name and
activation status.
Example
To display the information of the activated ACL of all interfaces, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;display packet-filter unitid 1
packet-filter
Syntax
packet-filter { inbound | outbound } { user-group acl-number [ rule
rule ] | ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group acl-number
rule rule ] ] | link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] }
undo packet-filter { inbound | outbound } { user-group acl-number [
rule rule ] | ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group acl-number
rule rule ] ] | link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] }
View
Ethernet Port View.
Parameter
inbound: Filters the traffic received by the Ethernet port.
outbound: Performs filtering to the packets sent by the interface.
user-group acl-number: Activates user-defined ACLs. acl-number: Sequence
number of the ACL, ranging from 5000 to 5999.
ip-group acl-number: Activates the IP ACLs, including basic and advanced
ACLs. acl-number specifies the sequence number of the ACL, ranging from 2000
to 3999.
link-group acl-number: Activates the Layer 2 ACLs. acl-number specifies the
ACL number, ranging from 4000 to 4999.
rule rule: Specifies the rule of an ACL, ranging from 0 to 65534; if not
specified, all subitems of the ACL will be activated. An ACL can have many rules.
They start at 0.
Description
Use the packet-filter command to activate the ACL on a specific interface.
Use the undo packet-filter command to disable the ACL on a specific
interface.
Example
Activate ACL 2000 for inbound traffic on interface Ethernet 1/0/1.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
ACL Commands List
191
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]packet-filter inbound ip-group 2000
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
reset acl counter
Syntax
reset acl counter { all | acl-number }
View
User View
Parameter
all: All ACLs.
acl-number: Specifies the sequence number of an ACL.
Description
Use the reset acl counters command to reset the ACL statistics information to
zero.
Example
Clear the statistics information of ACL 2000.
&lt;4500&gt;reset acl counters 2000
rule
Syntax
Define or delete the subrules of a basic ACL:
rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny }
any } fragment ]*
undo rule
[source { source-addr wildcard |
rule-id [ source | fragment ]*
Define or delete the subrules of an advanced ACL:
rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } protocol [ source { source-addr
wildcard | any } ] [ destination { dest-addr wildcard | any } ] [
source-port operator port1 [ port2 ] ] [ destination-port operator
port1 [ port2 ] ] [ icmp-type type code ] [ established ] [ [ {
precedence precedence tos tos ]* | dscp dscp ] [ vpn-instance instance
| fragment ]*
undo rule rule-id [ source | destination | source-port |
destination-port | icmp-type | precedence | tos | dscp | fragment |
time-range | vpn-instance ]*
Define or delete the subrules of a Layer 2 ACL:
rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } [ [ type protocol-type type-mask |
lsap lsap-type type-mask ] | format-type | cos cos | source {
source-vlan-id | source-mac-addr source-mac-wildcard }* | dest {
dest-mac-addr dest-mac-wildcard } ]*
undo rule rule-id
192
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
Define or cancel the subrules of user-defined ACL
rule [ rule-id ] { permit | deny } { rule-string rule-mask offset
}&amp;&lt;1-8&gt; ]
undo rule rule-id
View
Corresponding ACL View
Parameter
rule-id: Specifies the subitems of an ACL, ranging from 0 to 65534.
permit: Permits packets that meet the requirements.
deny: Denies packets that meet the requirements.
The following parameters are various property parameters carried by packets. The
ACL sets rules according to this parameter.
Parameters specific to basic ACLs:
source { source-addr wildcard | any }: source-addr wildcard represents
the source IP address and the wildcard digit represented in dotted decimal
notation. any represents all source addresses.
fragment: Means this rule is only effective fragment packets and is ignored for
non-fragment packets.
Parameters specific to advanced ACLs:
protocol: Specifies the protocol type which is represented by a name or a
number. When it is a name, this parameter can be adopted like: icmp, igmp, tcp,
udp, ip, gre, ospf, ipinip, etc. If the adopted value is IP, that means all the Internet
Protocols. When it is a number: it ranges from 1 to 225.
source { source-addr wildcard | any }: source-addr wildcard means the
source IP address and the wildcard digit represented in dotted decimal notation.
any means all source addresses.
destination { dest-addr wildcard | any }: dest-addr wildcard means the
destination IP address and the wildcard digit represented in dotted decimal
notation. any means all destination addresses.
source-port operator port1 [port2]: Source port number of TCP or UDP used
by the packet. operator is port operator, including eq (equal), gt (greater than), lt
(less than),neq (not-equal), range (within this range). Note that this parameter is
only available when the parameter protocol is TCP or UDP. port1 [port2]: Source
port number of TCP or UDP used by the packet, notated by a character or a
number which ranges from 0 to 65535 inclusive. For the value of the character,
please refer to mnemonic symbol table. The two parameters port1 and port2
appear at the same time only when the operator is “range”, but other operators
need “port1” only.
ACL Commands List
193
destination-port operator port1 [port2]: Destination port number of TCP or
UDP used by packets. For detailed description, please refer to source-port
operator port1 [port2].
icmp-type type code: Appears when protocol is icmp. type code specifies an
ICMP packet. type represents the type of ICMP packet, notated by a character or
a number which ranges from 0 to 255; code represents ICMP code, which appears
when the protocol is “icmp” and the type of packet is not notated by a character,
ranging from 0 to 255.
established: Means that it is only effective to the first SYN packet established by
TCP, appears when protocol is TCP.
precedence precedence: IP precedence, can be a name or a number ranging from
0 to 7.
tos tos: ToS (Type of Service) value, can be a name or a number ranging from 0 to
15. Packets can be classified according to TOS value.
dscp dscp: DSCP (Differentiated Services Code Point) value, can be a name or a
number ranging from 0 to 63. Packets can be classified according to DSCP value.
fragment: Means this rule is only effective for fragment packets and is ignored for
non-fragment packets.
Parameters specific to Layer 2 ACL:
| source-mac-addr source-mac-wildcard }*: The
source information of a packet, source-vlan-id represents source VLAN of the
packet, source-mac-addr source-mac-wildcard represents source MAC address
of the packet. For example, if you set source-mac-wildcard to 0-0-ffff, it means
that you will take the last 16 bits of source MAC address as the rule of traffic
classification.
source { source-vlan-id
dest { dest-vlan-id | dest-mac-addr dest-mac-wildcard }*: The
destination information of a packet: dest-mac-addr dest-mac-wildcard
represents the packet’s destination MAC address. For example, if you set
source-mac-wildcard to 0-0-ffff, it means that you will take the last 16 bits of
source MAC address as the rule of traffic classification.
type protocol-type protocol-type-mask: Protocol type carried by the Ethernet
frame.
lsap lsap-type lsap-type-mask: lsap type carried by the Ethernet frame.
The parameter for user-defined ACL
{ rule-string rule-mask offset }&amp;&lt;1-8&gt;: rule-string is a character string
of a rule defined by a user ranging from 2 to 80 characters. It is a hexadecimal
string with even digits. rule-mask offset is used to extract the packet
information. Here, rule-mask is rule mask, used for logical AND operation with
data packets, and offset determines to perform AND operation from which bytes
apart from the packet header. rule-mask offset extracts a character string from
the packet and compares it with the user-defined rule-string to get and process
194
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
the matched packets. &amp;&lt;1-8&gt; indicates that you can define up to 8 such rules at a
time. This parameter is used for the user-defined ACL.
Description
Use the rule command to add a subrule to an ACL.
Use the undo rule command to cancel a subrule from an ACL.
You can define several subrules for an ACL. If you include parameters when using
the undo rule command, the system only deletes the corresponding content of
the subrule.
For related configurations, refer to command acl.
Example
Add a subrule to an advanced ACL:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]acl number 3000
[4500-acl-adv-3000]rule 1 permit tcp established source 1.1.1.1 0
destination 2.2.2.2 0
Add a subrule to a basic ACL:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]acl number 2000
[4500-acl- basic-2000]rule 1 permit source 1.1.1.1 0 fragment
Add a subrule to a Layer 2 ACL:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]acl number 4000
[4500-acl-ethernetframe-4000] rule 1 permit source 1
Add a rule to a user-defined ACL:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]acl number 5000
[4500-acl-user-5000] rule 1 permit 88 ff 18
QoS Configuration
Commands List
display mirror
This section describes how to use the Quality of Service (QoS) configuration
commands on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
display mirror
View
Any view
QoS Configuration Commands List
195
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display mirror command to view port mirroring configuration,
including monitored ports, monitor port and monitor direction, and so on.
Related commands: mirroring-port, monitor-port.
Example
To display the port mirroring configuration, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500] display mirror
display qos
cos-local-precedencemap
Syntax
display qos cos-local-precedence-map
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display qos cos-local-precedence-map command to view COS and
Local-precedence map.
Example
Display COS and Local-precedence map.
&lt;4500&gt;display qos cos-local-precedence-map
cos-local-precedence-map:
802.1p &amp; local precedence : 0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
-------------------------------------------------------------------queue: 2
0
1
3
4
5
6
7
display qos-interface all
Syntax
display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } all
View
All views
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Interfaces of the Switch.
For more information, refer to the port command in this guide.
unit-id: Unit ID of the Switch.
196
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
Description
Using the display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } all command, you can view QoS information of all
interfaces. If you do not input interface parameters, this command will display all
QoS setting information for the Switch, including traffic policing, rate limit at
interface, and so on. If you input interface parameters, this command will display
QoS setting information of the specified interfaces, including traffic policing, rate
limit at interfaces, and so on.
Example
Display all the configurations of QoS parameters for unit 1.
&lt;4500&gt; display qos-interface 1 all
display qos-interface
line-rate
Syntax
display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } line-rate
View
Any view
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Interface of the Switch, for
detailed a description, refer to the port command in this guide.
unit-id: Unit ID of the Switch.
Description
Use the display qos-interface line-rate command to view the traffic rate
limitations of the interface output. If you do not specify interface parameters, you
will view the traffic rate limitations of all interfaces’ output. If you enter interface
parameters, you will view the parameter settings of traffic rate limitations of the
specified interfaces’ output.
Example
Display the parameter configuration of interface traffic rate limitation.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500] display qos-interface line-rate
Ethernet1/0/1: line-rate
Outbound: 128 kbps
display qos-interface
mirrored-to
Syntax
display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } mirrored-to
View
Any view
QoS Configuration Commands List
197
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num: Interface of the Switch,
for detailed description, refer to the port command in this guide.
unit-id: Unit ID of the Switch.
Description
Use the display qos-interface mirrored-to command to view the settings of
the traffic mirror.
This command is used for displaying the settings of traffic mirror. The information
displayed includes the ACL of traffic to be mirrored and the observing port.
Related command: mirrored-to.
Example
To display the settings of traffic mirror, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt; display qos-interface ethernet1/0/1 mirrored-to
Ethernet1/0/1: mirrored-to
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Mirrored to: monitor interface
display qos-interface
traffic-limit
Syntax
display qos-interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num | unit-id } traffic-limit
View
All views
Parameter
interface-name | interface-type interface-num:: Specifices an Interface of
the Switch, for more information, refer to the port command in this guide.
unit-id: Unit ID of the Switch.
Description
Use the display qos-interface traffic-limit command to view the traffic
limit settings. If you set the port parameters, the configuration information about
the specified port will be displayed. The information displayed includes the ACL of
the traffic to be limited, the limited average rate and the settings of some related
policing action.
Related commands: traffic-limit.
Example
Display the traffic limit settings.
&lt;4500&gt; display qos-interface ethernet1/0/1 traffic-limit
Ethernet1/0/1: traffic-limit
Inbound:
Matches: Acl 2000 rule 0 running
Target rate: 128 Kbps
198
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
Exceed action: remark-dscp 63
line-rate
Syntax
line-rate target-rate
undo line-rate
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
target-rate: The total limited rate of the packets sent by interfaces. Unit in
Kbps. The number input must be a multiple of 64. For 100 Mbps port, the range is
from 64 to 99968; for 1000 Mbps port, the range is from 64 to 1000000.
Description
Use the line-rate command, to limit the total rate of the packets received or
delivered by interfaces. Use the undo line-rate command, to cancel the
configuration of limit rate at interfaces.
The granularity of line rate is 64 kbps.
Example
Set the rate limitation of interface Ethernet1/0/1 to 128 kbps.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[4500]line-rate outbound 128
mirrored-to
Syntax
mirrored-to { inbound | outbound } { user-group acl-number [ rule
rule ] | ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group acl-number rule
rule ] ] | link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] } { cpu |
monitor-interface }
undo mirrored-to { inbound | outbound } { user-group acl-number [
rule rule ] | ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group acl-number
rule rule ] ] | link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] }
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
inbound: Performs traffic mirror for the packets received by the interface.
outbound: Performs traffic mirror for the packets sent by the interface.
user-group acl-number: Activates user-defined ACLs. acl-number: Sequence
number of ACL, ranging from 5000 to 5999.
QoS Configuration Commands List
199
ip-group acl-number: Activates IP ACLs, including basic and advanced ACLs.
acl-number: Sequence number of ACL, ranging from 2000 to 3999.
link-group acl-number: Activates Layer 2 ACLs. acl-number: Sequence number
of ACL, ranging from 4000 to 4999.
rule rule: Specifies the subitem of an active ACL, ranging from 0 to 65534; if
not specified, all subitems of the ACL will be activated. If only IP ACL or Layer 2
ACL is activated, this parameter can be omitted. If both IP and Layer 2 ACL are
activated at the same time, the rule parameter cannot be omitted.
cpu: Specifies the traffic will be mirror to CPU
monitor-interface: Specifies that the destination port is the monitor port.
Description
Use the mirrored-to command to enable ACL traffic identification and perform
traffic mirroring.
Use the undo mirrored-to command to disable traffic mirroring.
This command is used for mirroring the traffic matching the specified ACL (whose
action is permit). The observing port cannot be a Trunk port or aggregated port.
This command only supports one observing port. When you use the traffic mirror
for the first time, you have to designate the observing port.
Related command: display qos-interface mirrored-to.
Example
To mirror the packets matching the ACL 2000 rules, whose action is permit, to the
port Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]monitor-port
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]quit
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/2
[4500-Ethernet1/0/2] mirrored-to ip-group 2000 monitor-interface
4500-Ethernet1/0/2]
mirroring-port
Syntax
mirroring-port { inbound | outbound | both }
undo mirroring-port
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None.
200
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
Description
Use the mirroring-port command to configure a mirroring port.
Use the undo mirroring-port command to remove setting of mirroring port.
The Switch supports one monitor port and one mirroring port. If several Switches
form a Fabric, only one monitor port and one mirroring port can be configured in
the Fabric. You need to configure the monitor port before configuring the
monitored port.
Related command: display mirror.
Example
To configure Ethernet1/0/1 as a monitored port, and monitor packets in both
directions, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1] mirroring-port both
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
monitor-port
Syntax
monitor-port
undo monitor-port
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the monitor-port command to configure a monitor port.
Use the undo monitor-port command to remove the setting of monitor port.
The Switch supports one monitor port and one mirroring port. If several Switches
form a Fabric, only one monitor port and one mirroring port can be configured in
the Fabric. You need to configure monitor port before configuring monitored port.
Related command: display mirror.
Example
To configure the port Ethernet1/0/4 as a monitor port, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/4
[4500-Ethernet1/0/4] monitor-port
[4500-Ethernet1/0/4]
QoS Configuration Commands List
priority
201
Syntax
priority priority-level
undo priority
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
priority-level: Specifies the priority level of the port, ranging from 0 to 7.
Description
Use the priority command to configure the priority of Ethernet port.
Use the undo priority command to restore the default port priority.
By default, the priority level of the port is 0. The Switch replaces the 802.1p
priority carried by a packet with the port priority that is defined.
Every port on the Switch supports eight packet egress queues. The Switch puts the
packets into different egress queues according to their priorities.
When transmitting a packet, the Switch replaces the packet’s 802.1p priority with
the priority of the received port, according to which the packet will be put into the
corresponding egress queue.
Example
Set the priority of Ethernet1/0/1 port to 7.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]priority 7
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
priority trust
Syntax
priority trust
undo priority
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the priority trust command to configure the system to trust the packet’s
802.1p priority and not replace the 802.1p priorities carried by the packets with
the port priority. Use undo priority command to configure the system not to
trust the packet 802.1p priority.
202
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
By default, the system replaces the 802.1p priority carried by a packet with the
port priority.
For the related command, see priority.
Example
Configure the system to trust the packet 802.1p priority and not replace the
802.1p priorities carried by the packets with the port priority.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]priority trust
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
qos cos-local-precedence
-map
Syntax
qos cos-local-precedence-map cos0-map-local-prec cos1-map-local-prec
cos2-map-local-prec cos3-map-local-prec cos4-map-local-prec
cos5-map-local-prec cos6-map-local-prec cos7-map-local-prec
undo qos cos-local-precedence-map
View
System View
Parameter
cos0-map-local-prec: CoS 0 -&gt; Local precedence (queue) mapping value, in the
range of 0~7.
cos1-map-local-prec: CoS 1 -&gt; Local precedence (queue) mapping value, in the
range of 0~7.
cos2-map-local-prec: CoS 2 -&gt; Local precedence (queue) mapping value, in the
range of 0~7.
cos3-map-local-prec: CoS 3 -&gt; Local precedence (queue) mapping value, in the
range of 0~7.
cos4-map-local-prec: CoS 4 -&gt; Local precedence (queue) mapping value, in the
range of 0~7.
cos5-map-local-prec: CoS 5 -&gt; Local precedence (queue) mapping value, in the
range of 0~7.
cos6-map-local-prec: CoS 6 -&gt; Local precedence (queue) mapping value, in the
range of 0~7.
cos7-map-local-prec: CoS 7 -&gt; Local precedence (queue) mapping value, in the
range of 0~7.
Description
Use the qos cos-local-precedence-map command to configure “CoS
Local-precedence” mapping table. This will map a CoS value to a specific local
precedence (queue). Note that traffic which has been assigned a local precedence
via QOS will also be assigned to the same queue.
Use the undo qos cos-local-precedence-map command to restore its default
values.
QoS Configuration Commands List
203
The following is the default CoS and Local Precedence table.
Table 25 Default CoS and Local-precedence table
Cos and Local Precedence Value
Local Precedence Queue
0
2
1
0
2
1
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
Example
Configure CoS and Local Precedence table.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]qos cos-local-precedence-map 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
[4500]
The following is the configured &quot;CoS Local-precedence” mapping table.
Table 26 Default configure CoS and Local-precedence table
traffic-limit
Cos and Local Precedence Value
Local Precedence Queue
0
0
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
traffic-limit inbound { user-group acl-number [ rule rule ] |
ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group acl-number rule rule ]]
| link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] } target-rate [ exceed action
]
undo traffic-limit inbound { user-group { acl-number [ rule rule ] |
ip-group acl-number [ rule rule [ link-group acl-number rule rule ]
] | link-group acl-number [ rule rule ] }
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
inbound: Performs traffic limitation to the packets received by the interface.
204
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
user-group acl-number: Activates user-defined ACLs. acl-number: Sequence
number of ACL, ranging from 5000 to 5999.
ip-group acl-number: Activates IP ACLs, including basic and advanced ACLs.
acl-number : Sequence number of ACL, ranging from 2000 to 3999.
link-group acl-number: Activates Layer 2 ACLs. acl-number: Sequence number
of ACL, ranging from 4000 to 4999.
rule rule: Specifies the subitem of an active ACL, ranging from 0 to 65534; if not
specified, all subitems of the ACL will be activated. If only an IP ACL or a Layer 2
ACL is activated, this parameter can be omitted. If both IP and Layer 2 ACLs are
activated at the same time, the rule parameter cannot be omitted.
target-rate: The set normal traffic, unit in Kbps, the granularity of traffic limit is
64 kbps, if the number input is in ( N*64 &lt;the number input&lt;(N+1)*64), in which
N is a natural number, the Switch automaticaly sets (N+1)*64 as the parameter
value. For 100 Mbps ports, target-rate ranges from 64 to 99968 inclusive; for
1000 Mbps ports, from 64 to 1000000 inclusive.
exceed action: The action taken when the traffic exceeds the threshold. The
action can be:
■
drop: Drops the packets.
■
remark-dscp value: Sets new DSCP value.
Description
Use the traffic-limit command, to activate the ACL and perform traffic
limitation. Use the undo traffic-limit command to remove traffic limitation.
This command performs traffic limitation on the packets that match with a
specified ACL rule, and is only effective with a permit rule.
The granularity of traffic limit is 64 kbps.
You can only remark traffic with a DSCP value. The Switch 4500 does not permit
CoS remarking with this command.
Example
Perform traffic limitation on packets that match the permit rule of ACL 2000. The
target traffic rate is 128 kbps.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1] traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 128
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
wred
Syntax
wred
queue-index qstart probability
undo wred queue-index
Logon User’s ACL Control Command
205
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
queue-index: index of output queue, in the range of 0~7.
qstart: Start random discarding queue length, if the queue is shorter than the
value, no packet will be dropped. Ranging from 1 to 128. The value must be a
multiple of 16 KBytes.
probability: discarding probability.
Description
Use the wred command to configure WRED parameters. WRED (Weighted
Random Early Detection) is a queuing feature used in a network to mitigate the
effects of queue congestion.
Use the undo wred command to restore the default settings.
By default, the wred function is disabled.
Example
To configure ‘start random discarding queue length’ of queue 0 is 32kbytes,
discarding probability is 50%, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]wred 0 32 50
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
Logon User’s ACL
Control Command
This section describes how to use the logon user’s ACL control commands on your
Switch 4500.
acl
Syntax
acl acl-number { inbound | outbound }
undo acl { inbound | outbound }
View
User Interface View
Parameter
acl-number: The number identifier of basic and advanced number-based ACLs,
ranging from 2000 to 3999.
inbound: Performs ACL control to the users who access the local Switch using
TELNET.
outbound: Performs ACL control to the users who access other Switches from the
local Switch using TELNET.
206
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
Description
Using the acl command, you can reference ACL and implement the ACL control
to the TELNET users. Using the undo acl command, you can remove the control
from the TELNET users.
Example
Perform ACL control to the users who access the local Switch using TELNET (basic
ACL 2000 has been defined).
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]user-interface vty 0 4
[4500-ui-vty0-4]acl 2000 inbound
[4500-ui-vty0-4]
ip http acl
Syntax
ip http acl acl-number
undo ip http acl
View
User Interface View
Parameter
acl-number: Specifies a basic ACL with a number in the range of 2000 to 2999.
Description
Use the ip http acl command to call an ACL and perform ACL control over the
WEB network management users.
Use the undo ip http acl command to cancel the ACL control over the WEB
network management users.
This command calls numbered basic ACL only.
Example
To perform ACL control over the WEB network management users, enter the
following: (Suppose ACL 2020 has been defined.)
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]ip http acl 2020
[4500]
snmp-agent community
Syntax
snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ [ mib-view
view-name ] | [ acl acl-number ] ]*
undo snmp-agent community community-name
View
System View
Logon User’s ACL Control Command
207
Parameter
read: Indicates that this community name has the read-only right within the
specified view.
write: Indicates that this community name has the read-write right within the
specified view.
community-name: Character string of the community name.
mib-view: Set the MIB view name which can be accessed by the community
name.
view-name: MIB view name.
acl acl-number: The number identifier of basic number-based ACLs, ranging
from 2000 to 2999
Description
Using the snmp-agent community command, you can set the community access
name, permit the access to the Switch using SNMP, and reference the ACL to
perform ACL control to the network management users by acl-number. Using the
undo snmp-agent community command, you can remove the setting of
community access name.
By default, SNMPV1 and SNMPV2C use community name to perform access.
Example
Set the community name as &quot;MyCompany&quot;, permit the user to perform read-only
access by using this community name, and reference the ACL 2000 to perform
ACL control to the network management users (basic ACL 2000 has already been
defined ).
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]snmp-agent community read MyCompany acl 2000
[4500]
snmp-agent group
Syntax
snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name [ read-view read-view ] [
write-view write-view ] [ notify-view notify-view ] [acl acl-number]
undo snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name
snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] [
read-view read-view ] [ write-view write-view ] [ notify-view
notify-view ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]
View
System View
Parameter
v1: V1 security mode.
208
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
v2c: V2c security mode.
v3: V3 security mode.
groupname: Group name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
authentication: If this parameter is added to configuration command, the
system will authenticate but not encrypt SNMP data packets.
privacy: Authenticates and encrypts the packets.
read-view: Sets read-only view.
read-view: Read-only view name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
write-view: Sets read-write view.
write-view: Read-write view name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
notify-view: Sets notify view.
notify-view: Notify view name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
acl acl-number: the number identifier of basic number-based ACLs, ranging
from 2000 to 2999
Description
Using the snmp-agent group command, you can configure a new SNMP group
and reference the ACL to perform ACL control to the network management users
by acl acl-number. Using the undo snmp-agent group command, you can
remove a specified SNMP group.
Example
Creates a new SNMP group: MyCompany, and reference the ACL 2001 to perform
ACL control to the network management users (basic ACL 2001 has already been
defined).
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]snmp-agent group v1 MyCompany acl 2001
[4500]
snmp-agent usm-user
Syntax
snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name [ acl
acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } user-name group-name
snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name [ authentication-mode {
md5 | sha } auth-password ] [ acl acl-number ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user v3 user-name group-name { local | engineid
engineid-string }
Logon User’s ACL Control Command
209
View
System View
Parameter
v1: V 1 security mode.
v2c: V 2 security mode.
v3: V 3 security mode.
user-name: The user name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
group-name: The corresponding group name of the user, ranging from 1 to 32
bytes.
authentication-mode: Specifies the security level to &quot;to be authenticated&quot;
md5: Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC-MD5-96.
sha: Specifies the authentication protocol as HMAC-SHA-96.
auth-password: Authentication password, character string, ranging from 1 to 64
bytes.
privacy: Specifies the security level as encryption.
des56: Specifies the DES encryption protocol.
priv-password: Encryption password, character string, ranging from 1 to 64
bytes.
acl acl-number: The number identifier of basic number-based ACLs, ranging
from 2000 to 2999.
local: Local entity user.
engineid: Specifies the engine ID related to the user.
engineid-string: Engine ID character string.
Description
Using the snmp-agent usm-user command, you can add a new user to an SNMP
group, and reference the ACL to perform ACL control to the network
management users by acl acl-number. Using the undo snmp-agent usm-user
command, you can remove the user from the related SNMP group as well as the
configuration of the ACL control of the user.
Example
Add a user &quot;John&quot; to the SNMP group &quot;Mygroup&quot;. Specify the security level to
&quot;to be authenticated&quot;, the authentication protocol to HMAC-MD5-96 and the
authentication password to &quot;hello&quot;, and reference the ACL 2002 to perform ACL
control to the network management users (basic ACL 2002 has already been
defined).
210
CHAPTER 8: USING QOS/ACL COMMANDS
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500] snmp-agent usm-user v3 John Mygroup authentication-mode md5
hello acl 2002
9
USING STACK COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
Stack Configuration Commands
Stack Commands
change self-unit
■
change self-unit
■
change unit-id
■
display ftm
■
display xrn-fabric
■
fabric save-unit-id
■
fabric-port enable
■
ftm stacking-vlan
■
xrn-fabric authentication-mode
■
set unit name
■
sysname
This section describes how to use the stack configuration commands on your
Switch 4500.
Syntax
change self-unit to { &lt;1-8&gt; | auto-numbering }
View
System View
Parameter
self-unit: Unit ID of the device.
auto-numbering: Changes the unit ID automatically.
Description
Use the change self-unit command to change the unit ID of the current Switch.
By default, the unit ID of a Switch is set to 1. A unit ID can be set to a value in the
range from 1 to the maximum number of devices supported in the stack.
Example
To change the unit ID of the current Switch to 3, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
[4500]change self-unit to 3
212
CHAPTER 9: USING STACK COMMANDS
change unit-id
Syntax
change unit-id to &lt; 1-8 &gt;{ &lt; 1-8 &gt; | auto-numbering }
View
System View
Parameter
&lt; 1-8 &gt;: Unit ID of the unit in a stack.
auto-numbering: Change the unit ID automatically.
Description
Use the change unit-id command to change the unit ID of a Switch in the stack.
By default, the unit ID of a Switch is set to 1. A unit ID can be set to a value in the
range from 1 to the maximum number of devices supported in the stack.
■
If the modified unit ID does not exist in the stack, the system sets its priority to
5 and saves it in the unit Flash memory.
■
If the modified unit is an existing unit, the system will prompt you to confirm if
you do want to change the unit ID. If you choose to change, the existing unit
ID is replaced and the priority is set to 5. You can then use the fabric
save-unit-id command to save the modified unit ID into the unit Flash
memory and clear the information about the existing unit ID.
■
If auto-numbering is selected, the system sets the unit ID priority to 10. You
can use the fabric save-unit-id command to save the modified unit ID into
the unit Flash memory and clear the information about the existing unit ID.
Example
To change the unit ID from6 to 4, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display ftm topology-database
Total number of UNITs in fabric : 8, My CPU ID : 6
UID CPU-Mac
Prio Fabric-port Chips Mid
Pid
1
00e0-fc00-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
0/1
3
2
00e0-fc03-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
2/3
3
3
00e0-fc04-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
4/5
3
4
00e0-fc05-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
6/7
3
5
00e0-fc06-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
8/9
3
6
00e0-fc07-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
10/11 3
7
00e0-fc04-6502 10
UP/DOWN
2
12/13 3
8
00e0-fc01-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
14/15 5
A/M
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
[4500]change unit-id 6 to 4
The unit exists in fabric.
Continue? [Y/N] y
[4500]
%Apr 2 00:48:34:574 2000 4500 FTM/3/DDPFLA:- 6 -Change unitid
successful, un
it 4 saved UnitID(4) in flash!
&lt;4500&gt;display ftm topology-database
Total number of UNITs in fabric : 8, My CPU ID : 4
UID CPU-Mac
Prio Fabric-port Chips Mid
Pid A/M
1
00e0-fc00-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
0/1
3
A
Stack Commands
2
3
6
5
4
7
8
display ftm
00e0-fc03-5502
00e0-fc04-5502
00e0-fc05-5502
00e0-fc06-5502
00e0-fc07-5502
00e0-fc04-6502
00e0-fc01-5502
10
10
10
10
5
10
10
UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN
UP/DOWN
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2/3
4/5
10/11
8/9
6/7
12/13
14/15
3
3
3
3
3
3
5
213
A
A
A
A
M
A
A
Syntax
display ftm { information | route | topology-database }
View
Any view
Parameter
information: Displays the FTM protocol information.
route: Displays the MAC forwarding table of the fabric.
topology-database: Displays the topology database information of the fabric.
Description
Use the display ftm information command to view the FTM protocol
information, including DDP status, unit ID, fabric link status, stacking port status
and DDp packet statistics.
Use the display ftm route command to view the MAC forwarding table of the
fabric, which is stored in the CPU.
Use the display ftm topology-database command to view the topology
database information of the fabric.
Example
To display the FTM protocol information of the Switch, enter the following:
[4500]display ftm information
DDP Protocol : disabled
stacking VLAN : NONE
stacking Auth : NONE
display xrn-fabric
Syntax
display xrn-fabric [ port ]
View
Any view
Parameter
port: display the stacking port information.
Description
Use the display xrn-fabric command to view the information of the entire
stack, including unit ID, unit name, operation mode. If the stack information is
214
CHAPTER 9: USING STACK COMMANDS
displayed on the console port of a device, an asterisk (*) next to the unit ID
indicates the current device.
Example
To display fabric information on the console port of unit 1, enter the following:
[4500]display xrn-fabric
Fabric name is 4500 , system mode is L3.
Fabric authentication: no authentication, number of units in stack:
1.
Unit Name
Unit ID
First
1(*)
fabric save-unit-id
Syntax
fabric save-unit-id
undo fabric save-unit-id
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the fabric save-unit-id command to save the unit ID of all units in a stack,
into the unit Flash memory and set the priority to 5.
Use the undo fabric save-unit-id command to restore the unit ID of the units
in a stack.
Example
To save the unit ID of all units in a stack to the unit Flash memory, enter the
following:
[4500]display ftm topology-database
Total number of UNITs in fabric : 8, My CPU ID : 4
UID CPU-Mac
Prio stacking-port Chips Mid
Pid A/M
1
00e0-fc00-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
0/1
3
A
4
00e0-fc03-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
6/7
3
A
3
00e0-fc04-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
4/5
3
A
6
00e0-fc05-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
10/11 3
A
5
00e0-fc06-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
8/9
3
A
2
00e0-fc07-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
2/3
3
A
7
00e0-fc04-6502 10
UP/DOWN
2
12/13 3
A
8
00e0-fc01-5502 10
UP/DOWN
2
14/15 5
A
[4500]quit
&lt;4500&gt;fabric save-unit-id
The unit ID will be saved to the device.
Are you sure? [Y/N] y
%Apr 2 02:13:44:413 2000 3200 FTM/3/DDPFLA:- 4 -Save self unitid,
unit 4 sav
ed UnitID(4) in flash!
Unit 1 saved unit ID successfully.
Unit 2 saved unit ID successfully.
Stack Commands
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
3
4
5
6
7
8
saved
saved
saved
saved
saved
saved
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
ID
ID
ID
ID
ID
ID
215
successfully.
successfully.
successfully.
successfully.
successfully.
successfully.
&lt;4500&gt;display ftm topology-database
Total number of UNITs in fabric : 8, My CPU ID : 4
UID CPU-Mac
Prio stacking-port Chips Mid
Pid A/M
1
00e0-fc00-5502 5
UP/DOWN
2
0/1
3
M
4
00e0-fc03-5502 5
UP/DOWN
2
6/7
3
M
3
00e0-fc04-5502 5
UP/DOWN
2
4/5
3
M
6
00e0-fc05-5502 5
UP/DOWN
2
10/11 3
M
5
00e0-fc06-5502 5
UP/DOWN
2
8/9
3
M
2
00e0-fc07-5502 5
UP/DOWN
2
2/3
3
M
7
00e0-fc04-6502 5
UP/DOWN
2
12/13 3
M
8
00e0-fc01-5502 5
UP/DOWN
2
14/15 5
M
fabric-port enable
Syntax
fabric-port { interface-type interface-num } enable
undo fabric-port { interface-type interface-num } enable
View
System View
Parameter
interface-type interface-num Displays the interface type and number
Description
Use the fabric-port enable command to specify the Fabric port of the Switch.
Use the undo fabric-port enable command to cancel the Fabric port of the
Switch.
Example
To set GigabitEthernet1/0/51 to stacking port mode, enter the following:
[4500]fabric-port gigabitEthernet1/0/51 enable
ftm stacking-vlan
Syntax
ftm stacking-vlan vlan-id
undo ftm stacking-vlan
View
System View
Parameter
vlan-id: Specifies the VLAN used for stacking. By default, the stacking VLAN is
VLAN 4093.
216
CHAPTER 9: USING STACK COMMANDS
Description
Use the ftm stacking-vlan command to specify the stacking VLAN of the
Switch.
Use the undo ftm stacking-vlan command to set the stacking VLAN of the
Switch to its default value.
You should specify the stacking VLAN before the stack is established.
Example
Set VLAN 2 as stacking VLAN:
[4500]ftm stacking-vlan 2
xrn-fabric
authentication-mode
Syntax
xrn-fabric authentication-mode { simple password | md5 key }
undo xrn-fabric authentication-mode
View
System View
Parameter
password: Password, in the range of 1 to 16 characters.
key: Key word, in the range of 1 to 16 characters.
Description
Use the xrn-fabric authentication-mode command to configure or delete the
authentication mode of the fabric.
By default, no authentication mode is configured on the stack.
CAUTION: All units must have the same stack authentication settings in order to
form a stack of units.
Example
To set the authentication mode of the stack to simple, with the password &quot;hello&quot;,
enter the following:
[4500]xrn-fabric authentication-mode simple hello
set unit name
Syntax
set unit unit-id name unit-name
View
System View
Parameter
unit-id: Unit ID of a device.
unit-name: Unit name of a device. It is a string comprising 0 to 64 characters.
Stack Commands
217
Description
You can use this command to set a name for a device.
Example
To set the name “hello” for the device with unit ID 1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display xrn-fabric
Fabric name(HostName): 4500
Fabric authentication: md5, Fabric mode: L3, number of units in
stack: 2
Unit Name
Hello
Second
sysname
Unit ID
1
2(*)
Syntax
sysname sysname
undo sysname
View
System View
Parameter
sysname: A string comprising 1 to 30 characters. By default, the stack name of
Ethernet Switch is 4500.
Description
Use the sysname command to change the name of the stack. The modification
will affect the prompt character in the command line interface. For example, if the
stack name of the Switch is 4500, the prompt character in user view is &lt;4500&gt;.
Use the undo sysname command to restore the default fabric name.
Example
To change the fabric name of the device to “hello”, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display xrn-fabric
Fabric name(HostName): 4500
Fabric authentication: md5 Fabric mode: L3, number of units in stack:
2
Unit Name
First
Second
Unit ID
1
(2)*
[4500]sysname hello
[hello]display xrn-fabric
Fabric name(HostName): hello
Fabric authentication md5, Fabric mode :L3, number of units in stack:
2.
218
CHAPTER 9: USING STACK COMMANDS
Unit Name
First
Second
Unit ID
1
2 (*)
10
USING RSTP COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
RSTP Configuration Commands
■
display stp
■
reset stp
■
stp
■
stp bpdu-protection
■
stp cost
■
stp edged-port
■
stp loop-protection
■
stp mcheck
■
stp mode
■
stp pathcost-standard
■
stp point-to-point
■
stp port priority
■
stp priority
■
stp root primary
■
stp root secondary
■
stp root-protection
■
stp timeout-factor
■
stp timer forward-delay
■
stp timer hello
■
stp timer max-age
■
stp transmit-limit
220
CHAPTER 10: USING RSTP COMMANDS
RSTP Configuration
Commands
display stp
This section describes how to use the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP)
configuration commands on your Switch.
Syntax
display stp [ interface interface_list ]
display stp brief
View
All views
Parameter
interface interface_list: Specifies the Ethernet port list, including multiple
Ethernet ports. Expressed as interface _list={ { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num
| interface_name } ] }&amp;&lt;1-10&gt;.
For details about interface_type, interface_num and interface_name, refer
to the port command in this guide.
&amp;&lt;1-10&gt;: Indicates the preceding parameter can be input up to 10 times.
Description
Use the display stp command to view the status information of the current
RSTP.
Use the display stp brief command to view summary information of the STP
state of the Switch.
Related command: reset stp.
Example
To display the RSTP status information for Ethernet1/0/2, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display stp interface Ethernet1/0/2
Protocol mode: IEEE RSTP
The bridge ID (Pri.MAC): 32768.00e0-fc00-3900
The bridge times: Hello Time 2 sec, Max Age 20 sec, Forward Delay 15
sec
Root bridge ID(Pri.MAC): 32768.00e0-fc00-3900
Root path cost: 0
Bridge bpdu-protection: disabled
Default path cost standard is dot1t
Timeout factor: 3
Port 2 (Ethernet1/0/2) of bridge is DOWN
Port spanning tree protocol: enabled
Port role: Disabled Port
Port path cost: 2000000
Port priority: 128
Designated bridge ID(Pri.MAC): 32768.00e0-fc00-3900
The Port is a non-edged port
Connected to a non-point-to-point LAN segment
Maximum transmission limit is 3 Packets / hello time
RSTP Configuration Commands
221
Times: Hello Time 2 sec,
Max Age 20 sec
Forward Delay 15 sec, Message Age 0
BPDU sent:
0
TCN: 0, RST: 0, Config BPDU: 0
BPDU received: 0
TCN: 0, RST: 0, Config BPDU: 0
Table 27 Display information
Field
Description
Protocol mode
Current Switch is executing RSTP.
The bridge ID (Pri.MAC):
32768.00e0-fc00-3900
The RSTP configuration of the Switch, including
priority and MAC address of local bridge, Configured
time parameter (Hello Time, Max Age, Forward
The bridge times: Hello Time 2 sec, Max
Delay), priority and MAC address of root bridge, the
Age 20 sec, Forward Delay 15 sec
path cost from this Switch to the root path cost
mode, timeout time.
Root bridge ID(Pri.MAC):
32768.00e0-fc00-3900
Root path cost: 0
Bridge bpdu-protection: disabled
Default path cost standard is dot1t
Timeout factor: 3
Port 2 (Ethernet1/0/2) of bridge is
DOWN
The RSTP configuration of port 2, including the
port’s status is down, the port RSTP is enabled, this
port is Disabled Port, the cost to root of this port ,
Port spanning tree protocol: enabled
the priority of this port, the priority and MAC address
of Designated bridge, this port is configured as a
Port role: Disabled Port
non-edge port, the link of this port is
Port path cost: 200000 Port priority:
non-point-to-point, Maximum transmission limit is 3
128
BPDUs per hello time, configured RSTP time
parameters(Hello Time, Max Age, Forward Delay,
Designated bridge ID(Pri.MAC):
Message Age), the statistics of BPDU (TCN specifies
32768.00e0-fc00-3900
the number of topology-change-notify datagram,
The Port is a non-edged port
RST specifies the number of RSTP datagram, Config
Connected to a non-point-to-point LAN BPDU specifies the number of STP datagram)
segment
Maximum transmission limit is 3
Packets / hello time
Times: Hello Time 2 sec,
sec
Max Age 20
Forward Delay 15 sec, Message Age 0
BPDU sent:
0
TCN: 0, RST: 0, Config BPDU: 0
BPDU received: 0
TCN: 0, RST: 0, Config BPDU: 0
reset stp
Syntax
reset stp [ interface interface_list ]
View
User view
222
CHAPTER 10: USING RSTP COMMANDS
Parameter
interface interface_list: Specifies the Ethernet port list, including multiple
Ethernet ports. Expressed as interface _list = { { interface_type
interface_num | interface_name } [ to { interface_type interface_num
| interface_name } ] }&amp;&lt;1-10&gt;.
For details about interface_type, interface_num and interface_name, refer to
the port command in this guide.
&amp;&lt;1-10&gt;: Indicates the preceding parameter can be input up to 10 times.
Description
Use the reset stp command to reset the statistics information about Rapid
Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
This command can be used to clear the statistics information about a specified
port. If no port is specified, the statistics information of all the ports of the device
will be cleared.
Related command: display stp.
Example
To clear the statistics information about Ethernet1/0/1 through Ethernet1/0/3,
enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;reset stp interface Ethernet1/0/1 to Ethernet1/0/3
stp
Syntax
stp { enable | disable }
undo stp
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
enable: Enables RSTP on a device or a port.
disable: Disables RSTP on a device or a port.
Description
Use the stp enable command to enable RSTP on a device or port.
Use the stp disable command to disable RSTP on a device or port.
Use the undo stp command to disable RSTP on a device.
By default, RSTP is enabled on the Switch and all ports.
If the parameters of RSTP have not been set for the device or the ports before
RSTP is enabled on the device, they will take the default values. Before or after
RSTP is enabled, you can use the configuration command to set RSTP parameters
RSTP Configuration Commands
223
for the device and ports. This command enables/disables RSTP on a device in
system view and enables/disables RSTP on a port in Ethernet Port View.
Related command: stp mode.
Example
To enable RSTP on a Switch, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]stp enable
To disable RSTP on Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
[4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]stp disable
stp bpdu-protection
Syntax
stp bpdu-protection
undo stp bpdu-protection
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the stp bpdu-protection command to enable BPDU protection on a Switch.
Use the undo stp bpdu-protection command to resume the default status of
BPDU protection function.
By default, BPDU protection is not enabled.
For an access layer device, its ports are generally directly connected to a user
terminal (such as a PC) or file server, and configured as an edge port to implement
fast transition. When such a port receives BPDU packets, the system will set it to a
non-edge port and recalculate the spanning tree, which will cause network
topology flapping. In normal circumstances, these ports should not receive any
BPDU packets. However, someone may forge BPDU to maliciously attack the
Switch and cause network flapping.
RSTP provides the BPDU protection function against such an attack. After the
BPDU protection function is enabled on a Switch, the system will disable an edge
port that has received BPDUs and notify the network manager about it. The
disabled port can only be re-enabled by the network manager.
Example
To enable BPDU protection function on a Switch, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
224
CHAPTER 10: USING RSTP COMMANDS
[4500]stp bpdu-protection
stp cost
Syntax
stp cost cost
undo stp cost
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
cost: Specifies the path cost, ranging from 1 to 2000000.
Description
Use the stp cost command to configure the path cost on a spanning tree for the
current Ethernet port.
Use the undo stp cost command to restore the default cost.
By default, the bridge gets the path cost directly through the speed of the link
connected to the port.
The path cost of an Ethernet port is related to the link speed. You can refer to the
following table. RSTP will check the link speed of the port and get the path cost
directly. It is recommended to set the cost to the default value and let RSTP query
the path cost of the port.
Table 28 Path cost for ports at different link speeds
Link Speed
IEEE Recommended
Value
IEEE Recommended
Range
Switch Range
10Mbps
2000000
20000 to 20000000
1 to 2000000
100Mbps
200000
20000 to 2000000
1 to 2000000
1Gbps
20000
2000 to 200000
1 to 2000000
10Gbps
2000
200 to 20000
1 to 2000000
Example
To configure the path cost of Ethernet1/0/1 to 200000, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]stp cost 200000
stp edged-port
Syntax
stp edged-port { enable | disable }
undo stp edged-port
View
Ethernet Port View
RSTP Configuration Commands
225
Parameter
enable: Sets the current Ethernet port as an edge port.
disable: Sets the current Ethernet port as a non-edge port.
Description
Use the stp edged-port enable command to configure the current port as an
edge port.
Use the stp edged-port disable command to configure the current port as a
non-edge port.
Use the undo stp edged-port command to restore the default setting.
By default, all the Ethernet ports of the bridge are configured as non-edge ports.
If the current Ethernet port is connected to other Switch, you can use the stp
edged-port disable or undo stp edged-port command to specify it as a
non-edge port. The stp edged-port enable command can be used to configure the
current Ethernet port as an edge port. All the Ethernet ports have been set to
non-edge ports by default. You can configure the Ethernet ports directly
connected to the user terminals as edge ports, so that they can transition to
forwarding state quickly.
Related command: stp point-to-point.
Example
To set Ethernet1/0/1 as a non-edge port, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]stp edged-port disable
stp loop-protection
Syntax
stp loop-protection
undo stp loop-protection
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
none
Description
Use the stp loop-protection command to enable loop protection function.
Use the undo stp loop-protection command to restore the setting.
By default, the loop protection function is not enabled.
226
CHAPTER 10: USING RSTP COMMANDS
Example
To enable loop protection function in Ethernet1/0/1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]stp loop-protection
stp mcheck
Syntax
stp mcheck
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
If the network is unstable, even when the bridge running STP on the segment is
removed, the corresponding port will still work in the STP compatible mode.
Use the stp mcheck command to force the port to work in RSTP mode.
If there is any bridge running STP on the segment connected to the current
Ethernet port, the port will Switch to run RSTP in STP compatible mode. If the
network is rather stable, even when the bridge running STP on the segment is
removed, the corresponding port will still work in the STP compatible mode. In this
case, you can use this command to force the port to work in RSTP mode. In RSTP
mode, when the port receives an STP packet, it will transition to the STP
compatible mode.
The configuration can only be performed when the bridge runs in RSTP mode. If
the bridge is configured to work in STP compatible mode, the command will not
make any sense.
Related command: stp mode.
Example
To set the port Ethernet1/0/1 to work in RSTP mode, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]stp mcheck
stp mode
Syntax
stp mode { stp | rstp }
undo stp mode
View
System view
RSTP Configuration Commands
227
Parameter
stp: Specifies to run Spanning Tree in STP compatible mode.
rstp: Specifies to run Spanning Tree in RSTP mode.
Description
Use the stp mode command to configure Spanning Tree’s running mode.
Use the undo stp mode command to restore the default Spanning Tree’s running
mode.
By default, the value is rstp.
This command can be used for specifying the current Ethernet Switch to run the
Spanning Tree in RSTP mode or in STP compatible mode.
Related commands: stp, stp mcheck.
Example
To set Spanning Tree to work in STP compatible mode, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]stp mode stp
stp pathcost-standard
Syntax
stp pathcost-standard { dot1d-1998 | dot1t }
undo stp pathcost-standard
View
System view
Parameter
dot1d-1998: The Switch calculates the default Path Cost of a port by the IEEE
802.1D-1998 standard.
dot1t: The Switch calculates the default Path Cost of a port by the IEEE 802.1t
standard.
Description
Use the stp pathcost-standard command to specify the standard to be used by
the Switch in calculating the default Path Cost.
Use the undo stp pathcost-standard command to restore the default choice of
the standard.
By default, the Switch calculates the default Path Cost of a port by the IEEE 802.1t
standard.
Example
To configure the Switch to calculate the default Path Cost of a port by the IEEE
802.1D-1998 standard, enter the following:
228
CHAPTER 10: USING RSTP COMMANDS
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]stp pathcost-standard dot1d-1998
To configure the Switch to calculate the default Path Cost of a port by the IEEE
802.1t standard, enter the following:
[4500]stp pathcost-standard dot1t
stp point-to-point
Syntax
stp point-to-point { force-true | force-false | auto }
undo stp point-to-point
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
force-true: Indicates that the link to the current Ethernet port is a point-to-point
link.
force-false: Indicates that the link to the current Ethernet port is not a
point-to-point link.
auto: Specifies to automatically check if the link to the Ethernet port is a
point-to-point link or not.
Description
Use the stp point-to-point command to configure the state of the link to the
current Ethernet port as a point-to-point link or not a point-to-point link.
Use the undo stp point-to-point command to restore the default status of the
link, that is, RSTP is responsible for checking whether the link to the current
Ethernet port is a point-to-point link or not.
By default, the value is auto.
Example
To indicate that the link to Ethernet1/0/1 is a point-to-point link, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]stp point-to-point force-true
stp port priority
Syntax
stp port priority port-priority
undo stp port priority
View
Ethernet Port View
RSTP Configuration Commands
229
Parameter
port-priority: Specifies the priority of the port, ranging from 0 to 240. The
values are not consecutive integers. Step length is 16. By default, the value is 128.
Description
Use the stp port priority command to configure the priority of the current
Ethernet port.
Use the undo stp port priority command to restore the default priority.
The priority value shall be a multiple of 16, such as 0, 16, 32, 48 etc. The smaller
value represents the higher priority. A port with higher priority (lower numerical
value) is more likely to be a root port.
Example
To set the priority of Ethernet1/0/1 to 64, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]stp port priority 64
stp priority
Syntax
stp priority bridge-priority
undo stp priority
View
System View
Parameter
bridge-priority: Specifies the priority of a Switch, ranging from 0 to 61440.
The values are not consecutive integers. The step length is 4096. By default, the
value is 32768.
Description
Use the stp priority command to configure the bridge priority of the Switch.
Using undo stp priority command, you can restore the default bridge priority
of the Switch.
The priority value shall be a multiple of 4096, such as 0, 4096, 8192 etc. The
smaller value represents the higher priority. A Switch with higher priority is more
likely to be a root bridge.
Example
To set the priority of the Switch to 4096, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]stp priority 4096
230
CHAPTER 10: USING RSTP COMMANDS
stp root primary
Syntax
stp root primary
undo stp root
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the stp root primary command to configure the current Switch as the
primary root of a spanning tree.
Use the undo stp root command to cancel the current Switch for primary root of
a spanning tree.
By default, the Switch is not a primary root.
You can designate a primary root for the spanning tree without caring about the
priority configuration of the Switch.
CAUTION: In a switching network, you can configure no more than one primary
root for a spanning tree but you can configure one or more secondary roots for it.
Remember not to designate more than one primary root in a spanning tree;
otherwise, the switching behavior will be unpredictable.
After a Switch is configured as a primary root bridge or secondary root bridge, you
can not modify the bridge priority of the Switch.
Example
To designate the current Switch as the primary root of a spanning tree, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]stp root primary
stp root secondary
Syntax
stp root secondary
undo stp root
View
System view
Parameter
None
RSTP Configuration Commands
231
Description
Use the stp root secondary command to configure the current Switch as a
secondary root of a specified spanning tree.
Use the undo stp root command to cancel the designation of the current Switch
for a secondary root of a specified spanning tree.
By default, a Switch is not a secondary root.
You can designate one or more secondary roots for a spanning tree. When the
primary root fails or is powered off, a secondary root can take its place. If more
than one secondary root exists, the one with the smallest MAC address will
become the primary root of the specified spanning tree.
You can configure no more than one primary root for a spanning tree but you can
configure one or more secondary roots for it. You cannot change the bridge
priority of a Switch if you configure it as a secondary root of a spanning tree.
Example
To designate the Switch as a secondary root of the STP, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]stp root secondary
stp root-protection
Syntax
stp root-protection
undo stp root-protection
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the stp root-protection command to enable Root protection function on a
Switch.
Use the undo stp root-protection command to restore the default status of
Root protection function.
By default, root protection is not enabled.
Following incorrect configuration or malicious attack, a legal root of the network
may receive a BPDU with higher priority and lose its status as root, which causes
problems with the network topology. Such problems may pull the higher-speed
traffic to lower-speed links and cause network congestion.
To avoid this problem, RSTP provides Root protection function. After being
configured with Root protection, a port always stays as a designated port. Once
this port receives a BPDU with higher priority, it turns to listening status and will
232
CHAPTER 10: USING RSTP COMMANDS
not forward any packets (as if the link to it is disconnected). It will resume normal
status if it receives no BPDU with higher-priority for a period of time.
Example
To enable Root protection function on Ethernet1/0/1 of the Switch, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]stp root-protection
stp timeout-factor
Syntax
stp timeout-factor number
undo stp timeout-factor
View
System View
Parameter
number: Specifies the multiple of hello time, ranging from 3 to 7.
Description
Use the stp timeout-factor command to configure the multiple of hello time
for the Switch.
Use the undo stp timeout-factor command to restore the default multiple
value.
By default, the multiple is 3.
The Ethernet Switch transmits RSTP packets every hello time seconds. By default, if
the Switch does not receive RSTP packets from the upstream Switch for 3 x hello
time seconds, the Switch will decide the upstream Switch is dead and will
recalculate the topology of the network. In a congested network, a system
administrator may want to increase the timeout interval to prevent an unnecessary
network topology change. This can be accomplished by using the timeout-factor
command to set the multiplier to the desired value. The higher the multiplier the
greater the timeout interval. It is recommended to set 5, 6 or 7 as the value of
multiple in the steady network.
Example
To set the multiple value of hello time to 7, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]stp timeout-factor 7
stp timer forward-delay
Syntax
stp timer forward-delay centiseconds
RSTP Configuration Commands
233
undo stp timer forward-delay
View
System View
Parameter
centiseconds: Specifies the time of forward delay in centiseconds, ranging from
400 to 3000. By default, the value is 1500 centiseconds.
Description
Use the stp timer forward-delay command to configure the time of forward
delay for the Switch.
Use the undo stp timer forward-delay command to restore the default
forward delay time.
The value of forward delay is related to the “diameter” of the switching network.
The more extensive the switching network is, the longer the forward delay should
be set. You can use this command to modify the value of forward delay. The
default value, 1500, is recommended.
Related commands: stp timer hello, stp timer max-age.
Example
To set the forward delay of the device to 2000 centiseconds, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]stp timer forward-delay 2000
stp timer hello
Syntax
stp timer hello centiseconds
undo stp timer hello
View
System View
Parameter
centiseconds: Specifies the value of hello time in centiseconds, ranging from
100 to 1000. By default, the value is 200 centiseconds.
Description
Use the stp timer hello command to configure hello time of the Switch.
Use the undo stp timer hello command to restore the default hello time.
The Ethernet Switch transmits RSTP packets every hello time seconds. A longer
hello time can ease the CPU load of the Switch, but it will also affect the
performances of RSTP in how rapidly it responds to changes. The stp timer
hello command can be used to modify the value of hello time. The default value
is recommended.
234
CHAPTER 10: USING RSTP COMMANDS
Related commands: stp timer forward-delay, stp timer max-age, stp
transmit-limit.
Example
To set the hello time of the Switch to 300 centiseconds, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]stp timer hello 300
stp timer max-age
Syntax
stp timer max-age centiseconds
undo stp timer max-age
View
System View
Parameter
centiseconds: Specifies the maximum age in centiseconds, ranging from 600 to
4000. By default, the value is 2000 centiseconds.
Description
Use the stp timer max-age command to configure the Max Age of the Switch.
Use the undo stp timer max-age command to restore the default Max Age.
Maximum age is used for judging if an RSTP packet is outdated. If the value is set
too small, the spanning tree will be computed too frequently because the network
congestion may be considered as a link failure. However, if the value is set too
large, the link failure may not be discovered in time. Maximum age is related to
the network “diameter”, or complexity of the switched network. The default
value, 2000, is recommended.
Related commands: stp timer forward-delay, stp timer hello.
Example
To set the Max Age of the Switch to 1000 centiseconds, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]stp timer max-age 1000
stp transmit-limit
Syntax
stp transmit-limit packetnum
undo stp transmit-limit
View
Ethernet Port View
RSTP Configuration Commands
235
Parameter
packetnum: The maximum number of STP packets a port can send within one
hello time. It ranges from 1 to 255 and defaults to 3.
Description
Use the stp transmit-limit command to set the maximum number of STP
packets the current port can send within one hello time.
Use the undo stp transmit-limit command to restore the default value.
The larger the value of packetnum is, the larger the transmission rate is. However,
more Switch resources will be used.
Example
To set the packetnum parameter of Ethernet1/0/1 to 5, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[4500-Ethernet1/0/1]stp transmit-limit 5
236
CHAPTER 10: USING RSTP COMMANDS
11
USING AAA AND RADIUS
COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
802.1x Configuration Commands
■
display dot1x
■
dot1x
■
dot1x authentication-method
■
dot1x dhcp-launch
■
dot1x max-user
■
dot1x port-control
■
dot1x port-method
■
dot1x quiet-period
■
dot1x retry
■
dot1x supp-proxy-check
■
dot1x timer
■
reset dot1x statistics
Centralized MAC Address Authentication Configuration Commands
■
debugging mac-authentication event
■
display mac-authentication
■
mac-authentication
■
mac-authentication authmode
■
mac-authentication authpassword
■
mac-authentication authusername
■
mac-authentication domain
■
mac-authentication timer
AAA Configuration Commands
■
access-limit
■
attribute
■
cut connection
■
display connection
■
display domain
■
display local-user
238
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
■
domain
■
idle-cut
■
level
■
local-user
■
local-user password-display-mode
■
messenger
■
password
■
radius-scheme
■
scheme
■
self-service-url
■
service-type
■
state
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
■
accounting optional
■
data-flow-format
■
display local-server statistics
■
display radius
■
display radius statistics
■
display stop-accounting-buffer
■
key
■
local-server
■
nas-ip
■
primary accounting
■
primary authentication
■
radius nas-ip
■
radius scheme
■
reset radius statistics
■
reset stop-accounting-buffer
■
retry
■
retry realtime-accounting
■
retry stop-accounting
■
secondary accounting
■
secondary authentication
■
server-type
■
state
■
stop-accounting-buffer enable
■
timer
■
timer quiet
239
■
timer realtime-accounting
■
timer response-timeout
■
user-name-format
240
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
802.1x Configuration
Commands
display dot1x
This section describes how to use the 802.1x configuration commands on your
Switch 4500.
Syntax
display dot1x [ sessions | statistics [ interface interface-list ]]
View
All views
Parameter
interface: Displays the 802.1x information on the specified interface.
sessions: Displays the session connection information of 802.1x.
statistics: Displays the relevant statistics information of 802.1x.
interface-list: Ethernet interface list including several Ethernet interfaces,
expressed in the format interface-list = { interface-num [ to
interface-num ] } &amp; &lt; 1-10 &gt;. interface-num specifies a single Ethernet
interface in the format interface-num = { interface-type interface-num |
interface-name }, where interface-type specifies the interface type,
interface-num specifies the interface number and interface-name specifies the
interface name. For the respective meanings and value ranges, refer to
“Parameter” in “Using Port Commands”.
Description
Use the display dot1x command to view the relevant information of 802.1x,
including configuration information, running state (session connection
information) and relevant statistics information.
By default, all the relevant 802.1x information about each interface will be
displayed.
This command can be used to display the following information on the specified
interface: 802.1x configuration, state or statistics. If no port is specified when
executing this command, the system will display all 802.1x related information.
For example, 802.1x configuration of all ports, 802.1x session connection
information, and 802.1x data statistical information. The output information of
this command can help the user to verify the current 802.1x configurations so as
to troubleshoot 802.1x.
Related commands: reset dot1x statistics, dot1x, dot1x retry, dot1x
max-user, dot1x port-control, dot1x port-method, dot1x timer.
Example
Display the configuration information of 802.1x.
&lt;4500&gt;display dot1x
Equipment 802.1X protocol is enabled
DHCP-launch is disabled
EAP-relay is enabled
Proxy trap checker is disabled
Proxy logoff checker is disabled
802.1x Configuration Commands
241
Configuration: Transmit Period 30 s, Handshake Period 15 s
Quiet Period 60 s, Quiet Period Timer is disabled
Supp Timeout 30 s, Server Timeout 100 s
The Max-Req 3
Total maximum 802.1x user resource number is 1024
Total current used 802.1x resource number is 0
Ethernet1/0/1 is link-up
802.1X protocol is disabled
Proxy trap checker is disabled
Proxy logoff checker is disabled
The port is a(n) authenticator
Authentication Mode is Auto
Port Control Type is Mac-based
Max number of on-line users is 256
… (Omitted)
dot1x
Syntax
dot1x [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x [ interface interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
interface interface-list: Ethernet port list including several Ethernet ports.
interface-list = { interface-num [ to interface-num ] } &amp; &lt; 1-10 &gt;.
interface-num specifies a single Ethernet port in the format interface-num = {
interface-type interface-num | interface-name }, where interface-type
specifies the port type, interface-num specifies the port number and
interface-name specifies the port name. For the respective meanings and value
ranges, read the Parameter of the Port Configuration section.
Description
Use the dot1x command to enable 802.1x on the specified port or globally, (that is
on the current device). Use the undo dot1x command to disable the 802.1x on
the specified port or globally.
By default, 802.1x is disabled on all the ports and globally on the device.
This command is used to enable the 802.1x on the current device or on the
specified port. When it is used in System View, if the parameter ports-list is not
specified, 802.1x will be globally enabled. If the parameter ports-list is
specified, 802.1x will be enabled on the specified port. When this command is
used in Ethernet Port View, the parameter interface-list cannot be entered and
802.1x can only be enabled on the current port.
The configuration command can be used to configure the global or port 802.1x
performance parameters before or after 802.1x is enabled. Before 802.1x is
242
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
enabled globally, if the parameters are not configured globally or for a specified
port, they will maintain the default values.
After the global 802.1x performance is enabled, only when port 802.1x
performance is enabled will the configuration of 802.1x become effective on the
port.
Related commands: display dot1x.
Example
To enable 802.1x on Ethernet 1/0/1, enter the following.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl-Z
[4500]dot1x interface ethernet 1/0/1
To enable 802.1x globally, enter the following.
[4500]dot1x
dot1x
authentication-method
Syntax
dot1x authentication-method { chap | pap | eap md5-challenge }
undo dot1x authentication-method
View
System View
Parameter
Chap: Use CHAP authentication method.
Pap: Use PAP authentication method.
eap: Use EAP authentication method. At present, only md5 encryption method is
available
Description
Use the dot1x authentication-method command to configure the
authentication method for the 802.1x user. Use the undo dot1x
authentication-method command to restore the default authentication method
of the 802.1x user.
By default, CHAP authentication is used for 802.1x user authentication.
Password Authentication Protocol (PAP) is a kind of authentication protocol with
two handshakes. It sends the password in the form of simple text.
Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP) is a kind of authentication
protocol with three handshakes. It only transmits the username, not the password.
CHAP is more secure and reliable.
In the process of EAP authentication, the Switch directly sends authentication
information of an 802.1x user to a RADIUS server in the form of an EAP packet. It
802.1x Configuration Commands
243
is not necessary to transfer the EAP packet to a standard RADIUS packet first and
then send it to RADIUS server.
To use PAP, CHAP or EAP authentication, RADIUS server should support PAP, CHAP
or EAP authentication respectively.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example
Configure 802.1x user to use PAP authentication
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl-Z
[4500]dot1x authentication-method pap
dot1x dhcp-launch
Syntax
dot1x dhcp-launch
undo dot1x dhcp-launch
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the dot1x dhcp-launch command to set 802.1x to prevent the Switch from
triggering user ID authentication for users who configure static IP addresses in a
DHCP environment. Use the undo dot1x dhcp-launch command to allow the
Switch to trigger ID authentication.
By default, the Switch can trigger user ID authentication for users who configure
static IP addresses in a DHCP environment.
Related command: dot1x.
Example
Prevent the Switch from triggering the authentication ID for users who configure
static IP addresses in a DHCP environment.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl-Z
[4500]dot1x dhcp-launch
dot1x max-user
Syntax
dot1x max-user user-number [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x max-user [ interface interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View
244
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Parameter
user-number: Specifies the limit to the amount of supplicants on the port,
ranging from 1 to 1024.
By default, the maximum user number is 1024.
interface interface-list: Ethernet interface list including several Ethernet
interfaces, expressed in the format interface-list = { interface-num [ to
interface-num ] } &amp; &lt; 1-10 &gt;. interface-num specifies a single Ethernet
interface in the format interface-num = { interface-type interface-num |
interface-name }, where interface-type specifies the interface type,
interface-num specifies the interface number and interface-name specifies the
interface name. For the respective meanings and value ranges, see the parameters
in the Port Command chapter.
Description
Use the dot1x max-user command to configure a limit to the amount of
supplicants on the specified interface using 802.1x. Use the undo dot1x
max-user command to restore the default value.
This command is used for setting a limit to the amount of supplicants that 802.1x
can hold on the specified interface. This command takes effect on the interface
specified by the parameter interface-list when executed in System View. It
takes effect on all the interfaces when no interface is specified. The parameter
interface-list cannot be entered when the command is executed in Ethernet
Port View and it takes effect only on the current interface.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example
Configure the interface Ethernet 1/0/2 to hold no more than 32 802.1x users.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl-Z
[4500]dot1x max-user 32 interface ethernet 1/0/2
dot1x port-control
Syntax
dot1x port-control { auto | authorized-force | unauthorized-force-}
[ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x port-control [ interface interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
auto: Automatic identification mode, configuring the initial state of the interface
as unauthorized. The user is only allowed to receive or transmit EAPoL packets but
not to access the network resources. If the user passes the authentication flow, the
interface will Switch over to the authorized state and then the user is allowed to
access the network resources. This is the most common case.
802.1x Configuration Commands
245
authorized-force: Forced authorized mode, configuring the interface to always
stay in authorized state and the user is allowed to access the network resources
without authentication/authorization.
unauthorized-force: Forced unauthorized mode, configuring the interface to
always stay in non-authorized mode and the user is not allowed to access the
network resources.
interface interface-list: Ethernet interface list including several Ethernet
interfaces, expressed in the format interface-list = { interface-num [ to
interface-num ] } &amp; &lt; 1-10 &gt;. interface-num specifies a single Ethernet
interface in the format interface-num = { interface-type interface-num |
interface-name }, where interface-type specifies the interface type,
interface-num specifies the interface number and interface-name specifies the
interface name. For the respective meanings and value ranges, see the parameters
of the Port Command chapter.
Description
Use the dot1x port-control command to configure the mode for 802.1x to
perform access control on the specified interface. Use the
undo dot1x port-control command to restore the default access control mode.
By default, the value is auto.
This command is used to set the mode, or the interface state, for 802.1x to
perform access control on the specified interface. This command has an effect on
the interface specified by the parameter interface-list when executed in
System View. It has an effect on all the interfaces when no interface is specified.
The parameter interface-list cannot be entered when the command is
executed in Ethernet Port View and it has an effect only on the current interface.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example
To configure the interface Ethernet 1/0/2 to be in force-unauthorized state, enter
the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl-Z
[4500]dot1x port-control force-unauthorized interface ethernet 1/0/2
dot1x port-method
Syntax
dot1x port-method { macbased | portbased } [ interface
interface-list ]
undo dot1x port-method [ interface interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
macbased: Configures the 802.1x authentication system to perform
authentication on the supplicant based on MAC address.
246
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
portbased: Configures the 802.1x authentication system to perform
authentication on the supplicant based on interface number.
interface interface-list: Ethernet interface list including several Ethernet
interfaces, expressed in the format interface-list = { interface-num [ to
interface-num ] } &amp; &lt; 1-10 &gt;. interface-num specifies a single Ethernet
interface in the format interface-num = { interface-type interface-num |
interface-name }, where interface-type specifies the interface type,
interface-num specifies the interface number and interface-name specifies the
interface name. For the respective meanings and value ranges, see the parameters
in the Port Command chapter.
Description
Use the dot1x port-method command to configure the base for 802.1x to
perform access control on the specified interface. Use the undo dot1x
port-method command to restore the default access control base.
By default, the value is macbased.
This command is used to set the base for 802.1x to perform access control,
namely authenticate the users, on the specified interface. When macbased is used,
the users accessing this interface must be authenticated independently, and as
such will be able to access the network as long as they independently require.
When portbased is used, only the first user on that port needs to be
authenticated. Subsequent users accessing the network through this port are
considered authenticated. However if the original user terminates his connection,
the other users will need to be re-authenticated.
This command has an effect on the interface specified by the parameter
interface-list when executed in System View. It has an effect on all the interfaces
when no interface is specified. The parameter interface-list cannot be input when
the command is executed in Ethernet Port View and it has an effect only on the
current interface.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example
To authenticate the supplicant based on the port on Ethernet 1/0/3, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl-Z
[4500]dot1x port-method portbased interface ethernet 1/0/3
dot1x quiet-period
Command
dot1x quiet-period
undo dot1x quiet-period
View
System View
802.1x Configuration Commands
247
Parameter
None
Description
Use the dot1x quiet-period command to enable the quiet-period timer. Use the
undo dot1x quiet-period command to disable this timer.
If an 802.1x user has not been authenticated, the Authenticator will keep quiet for
a while (which is specified by quiet-period timer) before launching the
authentication again. During the quiet period, the Authenticator does not do
anything related to 802.1x authentication.
By default, the quiet-period timer is disabled.
Related command: display dot1x, dot1x timer.
Example
To enable quiet-period timer, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl-Z
[4500]dot1x quiet-period
dot1x retry
Syntax
dot1x retry max-retry-value
undo dot1x retry
View
System View
Parameter
max-retry-value: Specifies the maximum times an Ethernet switch can
retransmit the authentication request frame to the supplicant, ranging from 1 to
10.
By default, the value is 3, that is, the Switch can retransmit the authentication
request frame to the supplicant 3 times.
Description
Use the dot1x retry command to configure the maximum times a Switch can
retransmit the authentication request frame to the supplicant. Use the undo dot1x
retry command to restore the default maximum retransmission time.
After the Switch has transmitted an authentication request frame to the user for
the first time, if no user response is received during the specified time-range, the
Switch will re-transmit authentication request to the user. This command is used to
specify how many times the Switch can re-transmit the authentication request
frame to the supplicant. When the time is 1, the Switch is configured to transmit
the authentication request frame only once. 2 indicates that the Switch is
configured to transmit authentication request frame once again when no response
is received for the first time and so on. This command has an effect on all the
ports after configuration.
248
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Related commands: display dot1x.
Example
To configure the current device to transmit an authentication request frame to the
user for no more than 9 times, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl-Z
[4500]dot1x retry 9
dot1x supp-proxy-check
Syntax
dot1x supp-proxy-check { logoff | trap } [ interface interface-list ]
undo dot1x supp-proxy-check { logoff | trap } [ interface
interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View
Parameter
logoff: Cuts network connection to a user upon detecting the use of proxy.
trap: Sends a trap message upon detecting a user using proxy to access the
Switch.
interface interface-list: Ethernet interface list including several Ethernet
interfaces, expressed in the format interface-list = { interface-num [ to
interface-num ] } &amp; &lt; 1-10 &gt;. interface-num specifies a single Ethernet
interface in the format interface-num = { interface-type interface-num |
interface-name }, where interface-type specifies the interface type,
interface-num specifies the interface number and interface-name specifies the
interface name. For the respective meanings and value ranges, see the parameters
in the Port Command chapter.
Description
Use the dot1x supp-proxy-check command to configure the control method for
802.1x proxy users on the specified interface. Use the undo dot1x
supp-proxy-check command to cancel the control method set for 802.1x proxy
users.
Note that when performing this function, the user logging on via proxy needs to
run the 3Com 802.1x client program, (3Com 802.1x client program version V1.29
or above is needed).
This command is used to set a control method on the specified interface when
executed in System View. The parameter interface-list cannot be input when the
command is executed in Ethernet Port View and it takes effect only on the current
interface. After globally enabling proxy user detection and control in System View,
only if you enable this feature on a specific port can this configuration take effect
on the port.
Related command: display dot1x.
802.1x Configuration Commands
249
Example
To configure the Switch to cut the network connection to a user upon detecting
the use of proxy on Ethernet 1/0/1 ~ Ethernet 1/0/8, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]dot1x supp-proxy-check logoff
[4500]dot1x supp-proxy-check logoff interface Ethernet 1/0/1 to
Ethernet 1/0/8
To configure the Switch to send a trap message upon detecting the use of proxy to
login to Ethernet 1/0/9, enter the following:
[4500]dot1x supp-proxy-check trap
[4500]dot1x supp-proxy-check trap interface ethernet 1/0/9
or
[4500]dot1x supp-proxy-check trap
[4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/9
[4500-ethernet1/0/9]dot1x supp-proxy-check trap
dot1x timer
Syntax
dot1x timer { handshake-period handshake-period-value | quiet-period
quiet-period-value | tx-period tx-period-value | supp-timeout
supp-timeout-value | server-timeout server-timeout-value }
undo dot1x timer { handshake-period | quiet-period | tx-period |
supp-timeout | server-timeout }
View
System View
Parameter
handshake-period: This timer begins after the user has passed authentication.
After setting the handshake-period, the system will send a handshake packet
every handshake period seconds. Suppose the dot1x handshake-period time is
configured as N, the system will consider the user as having logged off and will set
the user state as logoff if the system does not receive a response from the user for
N consecutive times.
handshake-period-value: Handshake period. The value ranges from 1 to 1024 in
units of second and defaults to 15.
quiet-period: Specify the quiet timer. If an 802.1x user has not passed the
authentication, the Authenticator will keep quiet for a while (which is specified by
quiet-period timer) before launching the authentication again. During the quiet
period, the Authenticator does not do anything related to 802.1x authentication.
quiet-period-value: Specify how long the quiet period is. The value ranges
from 10 to 120 in units of second and defaults to 60.
server-timeout: Specify the timeout timer of an Authentication Server. If an
Authentication Server has not responded before the specified period expires, the
Authenticator will resend the authentication request.
250
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
server-timeout-value: Specify how long the duration of a timeout timer of an
Authentication Server is. The value ranges from 100 to 300 seconds and defaults
to 100 seconds.
supp-timeout: Specify the authentication timeout timer of a Supplicant. After
the Authenticator sends Request/Challenge request packet which requests the
MD5 encrypted text, the supp-timeout timer of the Authenticator begins to run. If
the Supplicant does not respond back successfully within the time range set by
this timer, the Authenticator will resend the above packet.
supp-timeout-value: Specify how long the duration of an authentication
timeout timer of a Supplicant is. The value ranges from 10 to 120 seconds and
defaults to 30 seconds.
tx-period: Specify the transmission timeout timer. After the Authenticator sends
the Request/Identity request packet which requests the user name or user name
and password together, timer of the Authenticator begins to run. If the Supplicant
does not respond back with authentication reply packet successfully, then the
Authenticator will resend the authentication request packet.
tx-period-value: Specify how long the duration of the transmission timeout
timer is. The value ranges from 10 to 120 seconds and defaults to 30 seconds.
Description
Use the dot1x timer command to configure the 802.1x timers. Use the undo
dot1x timer command to restore the default values.
802.1x has many timers that control the rational and orderly interacting of the
Supplicant, the Authenticator and the Authentication Server. This command can
set some of the timers (while other timers cannot be set) to adapt the interaction
process. Changing the timers could be necessary in some special cases, but
generally the user should keep the default values.
Related command: display dot1x.
Example
To set the Authentication Server timeout timer to 150s, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt; system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]dot1x timer server-timeout 150
reset dot1x statistics
Syntax
reset dot1x statistics [ interface interface-list ]
View
User View
Parameter
interface interface-list: Ethernet port list including several Ethernet ports.
interface-list = { interface-num [ to interface-num ] } &amp; &lt; 1-10 &gt;.
interface-num specifies a single Ethernet port in the format port-num = {
Centralized MAC Address Authentication Configuration Commands
251
interface-type interface-num | interface-name }, where interface-type
specifies the port type, interface-num specifies the port number and
interface-name specifies the port name. For the respective meanings and value
ranges, read the Parameter of the Port Configuration section.
Description
Use the reset dot1x statistics command to reset the statistics of 802.1x.
This command can be used to re-perform statistics if the user wants to delete the
former statistics of 802.1x.
When the original statistics are cleared, if no port type or port number is specified,
the global 802.1x statistics of the Switch and 802.1x statistics on all the ports will
be cleared. If the port type and port number are specified, the 802.1x statistics on
the specified port will be cleared.
Related commands: display dot1x.
Example
Clear the 802.1x statistics on Ethernet 1/0/2.
&lt;4500&gt;reset dot1x statistics interface ethernet 1/0/2
Centralized MAC
Address
Authentication
Configuration
Commands
debugging
mac-authentication
event
Syntax
debugging mac-authentication event
undo debugging mac-authentication event
View
User View
Parameter
None
252
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Description
Use the debugging mac-authentication event command to enable centralized
MAC address authentication event debugging. Use the undo debugging
mac-authentication event command to disable event debugging.
Example
To enable centralized MAC address authentication event debugging, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;debugging mac-authentication event
display
mac-authentication
Syntax
display mac-authentication [ interface interface-list ]
View
Any view
Parameter
interface interface-list: Ethernet interface list including several Ethernet
interfaces, expressed in the format interface-list = { interface-num [ to
interface-num ] } &amp; &lt; 1-10 &gt;. interface-num specifies a single Ethernet
interface in the format interface-num = { interface-type interface-num |
interface-name }, where interface-type specifies the interface type,
interface-num specifies the interface number and interface-name specifies the
interface name. For the respective meanings and value ranges, see the parameters
in the Port Command chapter.
Description
Use the display mac-authentication command to display the global
information on centralized MAC address authentication, including centralized
MAC address authentication features, value of each current timer, number of
online users, the MAC address in silent periods, and the authentication status of
the MAC address on each interface.
Example
Display the global information of centralized MAC address authentication
&lt;4500&gt;display mac-authentication
mac address authentication is Enabled.
authentication mode is UsernameAsMacAddress
the Fixed username is mac
the Fixed password is NULL
offline detect period is 300s
quiet period is 1 minute
server response timeout value is 100s
max allowed user number is 1024
current user number amounts to 0
current domain:
Silent Mac User info:
MAC ADDR
From Port
Ethernet1/0/1 is link-up
MAC address authentication is Disabled
Authenticate success: 0, failed: 0
Current online user number is 0
Port Index
Centralized MAC Address Authentication Configuration Commands
MAC ADDR
Authenticate state
253
AuthIndex
Table 29 Description of MAC address authentication configuration information
mac-authentication
Field
Description
mac address authentication
is Enabled
The centralized MAC address authentication feature
is enabled on the switch
authentication mode
The centralized MAC address authentication mode.
By default, it is MAC address mode.
the Fixed username
The username for fixed mode. By default, the
username is mac.
the Fixed password
The password for fixed mode. By default it is not
configured.
offline detect period
Offline-detect timer, set the time interval for the
Switch to detect whether the user is offline. By
default, it is 300 seconds.
quiet period
Quiet timer. A period of quiet time that the Switch
needed after failing to authenticate the user. By
default, it is 1 minute.
server response timeout
value
Server timeout timer, set the timeout period to the
connection between the Switch to the RADIUS
server. By default, it is 100 seconds.
max allowed user number
The maximum number of users allowed by the
Switch.
current user number amounts
Current user number.
current domain
Current domain, by default, it is not configured.
Silent Mac User info
The silent user information. If a user does not pass
the MAC address authentication, the Switch sets this
user to be silent, in this period of time, the Switch
does not authenticate this user.
Ethernet1/0/1 is link-up
Interface Ethernet1/0/1 link is in the up state.
MAC address authentication
is Enabled
MAC address authentication is enabled on interface
Ethernet1/0/1
Authenticate success: 0,
failed: 0
The statistics of the MAC address authentication on
the interface, including the number of users passing
the authentication and the number of users failing
the authentication.
Authenticate state
There are four states of the online users:
■
Connecting: the user is connecting
■
Success: the user has passed the authentication
■
Failure: the user has failed the authentication
■
Logoff: the user is offline.
Syntax
mac-authentication [ interface interface-list ]
undo mac-authentication [ interface interface-list ]
View
Ethernet Port View
254
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Parameter
interface interface-list: Ethernet interface list including several Ethernet
interfaces, expressed in the format interface-list = { interface-num [ to
interface-num ] } &amp; &lt; 1-10 &gt;. interface-num specifies a single Ethernet
interface in the format interface-num = { interface-type interface-num |
interface-name }, where interface-type specifies the interface type,
interface-num specifies the interface number and interface-name specifies the
interface name. For the respective meanings and value ranges, see the parameters
in the Port Command chapter.
Description
Use the mac-authentication command to enable the centralized MAC address
authentication feature on a specified port or globally. Use the undo
mac-authentication command to disable the feature on a specified port or
globally.
By default, the centralized MAC address authentication feature is disabled on each
port and globally.
In System View, if the interface-list parameter is not specified, the centralized
MAC address authentication feature is enabled globally; if the interface-list
parameter is specified, the feature is enabled on the specified interfaces. In the
Ethernet Port View, the interface-list parameter cannot be specified, and you
can use the command only to enable the feature on the current interface.
Before or after the enabling of the centralized MAC address authentication, you
can configure related parameters both globally or on the port through their
respective commands. If the parameters are not configured before enabling this
feature, then the parameters will be in their default state when it is enabled.
You must first enable the centralized MAC address authentication globally and
then on the port to make the related configurations on the port effective.
Example
To enable the centralized MAC address authentication feature on port Ethernet
1/0/1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]mac-authentication interface Ethernet 1/0/1
To enable the centralized MAC address authentication feature globally, enter the
following:
[4500]mac-authentication
mac-authentication
authmode
Syntax
mac-authentication authmode { usernameasmacaddress | usernamefixed }
undo mac-authentication authmode
View
System View
Centralized MAC Address Authentication Configuration Commands
255
Parameter
usernamemacaddress: Specify the MAC address mode for authentication.
usernamefixed: Specify the fixed mode for authentication.
Description
Use the mac-authentication authmode command to set the MAC address
authentication mode. Use the undo mac-authentication authmode command to
remove the configuration.
■
If you set the authentication mode to usernameasmacaddress, the MAC
address mode is used for authentication (both the username and password are
the MAC address of the user).
■
If you set the authentication mode to usernamefixed, the fixed mode is used
for authentication (both the username and password are pre-defined).
By default, the MAC address authentication mode is usernameasmacaddress.
Example
To set the MAC address authentication mode to usernamefixed, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]mac-authentication authmode usernamefixed
mac-authentication
authpassword
Syntax
mac-authentication authpassword password
undo mac-authentication authpassword
View
System View
Parameter
password: Password for authentication, a string ranging from 1 to 16 characters in
length.
Description
Use the mac-authentication authpassword command to set the password to
use when the centralized MAC authentication mode is set to usernamefixed.
Use the undo mac-authentication authpassword command to remove the
configured password.
By default, the password is configured when the centralized MAC authentication
mode is set to usernamefixed.
Example
To set the password for the fixed mode to mac, enter the following:
256
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]mac-authentication authpassword mac
mac-authentication
authusername
Syntax
mac-authentication authusername text
undo mac-authentication authusername
View
System View
Parameter
text: User name for authentication, a string ranging from 1 to 55 characters in
length.
Description
Use the mac-authentication authusername command to set the user name to
use when the MAC authentication mode is set to usernamefixed.
Use the undo mac-authentication authusername command to restore the
default user name.
By default, the user name for the fixed MAC address authentication mode is mac.
Example
To set the user name for the fixed mode to vip user, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]mac-authentication authusername vipuser
To restore the default user name for the fixed mode, enter the following:
[4500]undo mac-authentication authusername
mac-authentication
domain
Syntax
mac-authentication domain isp-name
undo mac-authentication domain
View
System View
Parameter
isp-name: ISP domain name, character string with no more than 24 characters,
excluding characters like “/”, “:”, “*”, “?”, “&lt;”, and &quot;&gt;&quot;.
Description
Use the mac-authentication domain command to configure the ISP domain
used by the centralized MAC address authentication user. Use the undo
mac-authentication domain command to return to the default ISP domain.
Centralized MAC Address Authentication Configuration Commands
257
By default, the domain used by centralized MAC address authentication user is
null, that is, not configured.
Example
To configure the domain used by the MAC address to Cams, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt; system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]mac-authentication domain Cams
mac-authentication
timer
Syntax
mac-authentication timer { offline-detect offline-detect-value |
quiet quiet-value | server-timeout server-timeout-value }
undo mac-authentication timer { offline-detect | quiet |
server-timeout }
View
System View
Parameter
offline-detect: Offline-detect timer, set the time interval for the Switch to
detect whether the user is offline.
offline-detect-value: Period set by the offline-detect timer, ranging from 1 to
65535, in seconds. The default value is 300 seconds.
quiet: Quiet timer. If the user fails authentication, the Switch needs a period of
quiet time (set by the quiet timer) before it re-authenticates. The Switch does not
authenticate during the quiet time.
quiet-value: Period set by the quiet timer, ranging from 1 to 65535, in seconds.
The default value is 60.
server-timeout: Server timeout timer. During the authentication to the user, if
the connection between the Switch and the RADIUS server times out, the Switch
denies the user’s access to the network on corresponding ports.
server-timeout-value: Period set by the server timeout timer, ranging form 1 to
65535, in seconds. The default value is 100 seconds.
Description
Use the mac-authentication timer command to configure timer parameters of
the centralized MAC address authentication. Use the undo mac-authentication
timer command to restore the value to the defaults.
For the related command, see display mac-authentication.
Example
To set the timeout timer of the server to 150 seconds, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]mac-authentication timer server-timeout 150
258
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
AAA and RADIUS
Configuration
Commands
access-limit
This section describes how to use the AAA and RADIUS configuration commands
on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
access-limit { disable | enable max-user-number }
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
disable: No limit to the supplicant number in the current ISP domain.
enable max-user-number: Specifies the maximum supplicant number in the
current ISP domain, ranging from 1 to 1048
Description
Use the access-limit command to configure a limit to the amount of
supplicants in the current ISP domain.
By default, there is no limit to the amount of supplicants in the current ISP domain.
This command limits the amount of supplicants contained in the current ISP
domain. The supplicants may contend with each other for the network resources.
So setting a suitable limit to the amount will guarantee the reliable performance
for the existing supplicants.
Example
Sets a limit of 500 supplicants for the ISP domain, marlboro.net.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]domain marlboro.net
New domain added.
[4500-isp-marlboro.net]access-limit enable 500
attribute
Syntax
attribute { ip ip-address | mac mac-address | idle-cut second |
access-limit max-user-number | vlan vlanid | location { nas-ip
ip-address port portnum | port portnum }
undo attribute {ip | mac | idle-cut | access-limit | vlan | location
}
View
Local User View
Parameter
ip: Specifies the IP address of a user.
AAA and RADIUS Configuration Commands
259
mac mac-address: Specifies the MAC address of a user. Where, mac-address
takes on the hexadecimal format of HHHH-HHHH-HHHH-HHHH.
idle-cut second: Allows/disallows the local users to enable the idle-cut
function. (The specific data for this function depends on the configuration of the
ISP domain where the users are located.) The argument minute defines the
idle-cut time, which is in the range of 60 to 7200 seconds.
access-limit max-user-number: Specifies the maximum number of users who
access the device using the current user name. The argument max-user-number is
in the range of 1 to 1024.
vlan vlanid: Sets the VLAN attribute of user, in other words, the VLAN to which
a user belongs. The argument vlanid is an integer in the range of 1 to 4094.
location: Sets the port binding attribute of user.
nas-ip ip-address: The IP address of the access server in the event of binding a
remote port with a user. The argument ip-address is an IP address in dotted
decimal format and defaults to 127.0.0.1.
port portnum: Sets the port to which a user is bound. The argument portnum is
represented by “SlotNumber SubSlotNumber PortNumber”. If any of these three
items is absent, the value 0 will be used to replace it.
Description
Use the attribute command to configure some attributes for specified local user.
Use the undo attribute command to cancel the attributes that have been
defined for this local user.
It should be noted that the argument nas-ip must be defined for a user bound
with a remote port, which is unnecessary, however, in the event of a user bound
with a local port.
Related command: display local-user.
Example
To configure the IP address 10.110.50.1 to the user JohnQ, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt; system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user JohnQ
New local user added.
[4500-luser-JohnQ]ip 10.110.50.1
cut connection
Syntax
cut connection { all | access-type { dot1x | mac-authentication } |
domain domain-name | interface interface-type interface-number | ip
ip-address | mac mac-address | radius-scheme radius-scheme-name |
vlan vlanid | ucibindex ucib-index | user-name user-name }
View
System View
260
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Parameter
all: Configures to disconnect all connection.
access-type { dot1x | mac authentication }: Configures to cut a category
of connections according to logon type. dot1x means the 802.1x users. mac
authentication means the centralized MAC address authentication users.
domain domain-name: Configures to cut the connection according to ISP domain.
domain-name specifies the ISP domain name with a character string not exceeding
24 characters. The specified ISP domain shall have been created.
mac mac-address: Configures to cut the connection of the supplicant whose
MAC address is mac-address. The argument mac-address is in the hexadecimal
format (H-H-H).
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Configures to cut the connection
according to RADIUS server name. radius-scheme-name specifies the RADIUS
server name with a character string not exceeding 32 characters.
interface interface-type interface-number: Configures to cut the
connection according to the port.
ip ip-address: Configures to cut the connection according to IP address. The
argument ip-address is in the hexadecimal format (ip-address).
vlan vlanid: Configures to cut the connection according to VLAN ID. Here,
vlanid ranges from 1 to 4094.
ucibindex ucib-index: Configures to cut the connection according to
ucib-index. Here, ucib-index ranges from 0 to 1047.
user-name user-name: Configures to cut the connection according to user name.
user-name is the argument specifying the username. It is a character string not
exceeding 80 characters, excluding “/”, “:”, “*”, “?”, “&lt;” and “&gt;”. The @
character can only be used once in one username. The pure username (the part
before @, namely the user ID) cannot exceed 55 characters.
Description
Use the cut connection command to disconnect a user or a category of users by
force.
Related command: display connection.
Example
To cut all the connections in the ISP domain, marlboro.net, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt; system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]cut connection domain marlboro.net
display connection
Syntax
display connection [ access-type { dot1x | mac-authentication } |
domain domain-name | interface interface-type interface-number | ip
AAA and RADIUS Configuration Commands
261
ip-address | mac mac-address | radius-scheme radius-scheme-name |
vlan vlanid | ucibindex ucib-index | user-name user-name ]
View
All views
Parameter
access-type { dot1x | mac-authentication }: Configures to display the
supplicants according to their logon type. dot1x means the 802.1x users.
mac-authentication means the centralized mac address authentication users.
domain domain-name: Configures to display all the users in an ISP domain.
domain-name specifies the ISP domain name with a character string not exceeding
24 characters. The specified ISP domain shall have been created.
mac mac-address: Configures to display the supplicant whose MAC address is
mac-address. The argument mac-address is in the hexadecimal format (H-H-H).
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Configures to display the supplicant
according to RADIUS server name. radius-scheme-name specifies the RADIUS
server name with a character string not exceeding 32 characters.
interface interface-type interface-number: Configures to display the
supplicant according the port.
ip ip-address: Configures to display the user specified with IP address. The
argument ipt-address is in the hexadecimal format (ip-address).
vlan vlanid: Configures to display the user specified with VLAN ID. Here,
vlanid ranges from 1 to 4094.
ucibindex ucib-index: Configures to display the user specified with
ucib-index. Here, ucib-index ranges from 0 to 1047.
user-name user-name: Configures to display a user specifies with user-name.
user-name is the argument specifying the username. It is a character string not
exceeding 32 characters.
Description
Use the display connection command to view the relevant information of all
the supplicants or the specified one(s).
The output can help you with the user connection diagnosis and troubleshooting.
If no parameter is specified, this command displays the related information about
all connected users
Related command: cut connection.
Example
To display the relevant information of all the users, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display connection
Total 0 connections matched ,0 listed.
262
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
display domain
Syntax
display domain [ isp-name ]
View
All views
Parameter
isp-name: Specifies the ISP domain name, with a character string not exceeding
24 characters. The specified ISP domain shall have been created.
Description
Use the display domain command to view the configuration of a specified ISP
domain or display the summary information of all ISP domains.
This command is used to output the configuration of a specified ISP domain or
display the summary information of all ISP domains. If an ISP domain is specified,
the configuration information (content and format) will be displayed exactly the
same as the displayed information of the display domain command. The output
information can help with ISP domain diagnosis and troubleshooting. Note that
the accounting scheme to be displayed should have been created.
Related commands: access-limit, domain, radius scheme, state, display
domain.
Example
To display the summary information of all ISP domains of the system, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;display domain
0 Domain = system
State = Active
Access-limit = Disable
Scheme = LOCAL
Domain User Template:
Idle-cut = Disable
Self-service = Disable
Messenger Time = Disable
Default Domain Name: system
Total 1 domain (s). 1 listed.
display local-user
Syntax
display local-user [ domain isp-name | idle-cut { enable | disable }
| service-type { telnet | ftp | ssh | terminal | lan-access } |
state { active | block } | user-name user-name | vlan vlanid ]
View
All views
Parameter
domain isp-name: Configures to display all the local users in the specified ISP
domain. isp-name specifies the ISP domain name with a character string not
exceeding 24 characters. The specified ISP domain shall have been created.
AAA and RADIUS Configuration Commands
263
idle-cut: Configures to display the local users according to the state of idle-cut
function. disable means that the user disables the idle-cut function and enable
means the user enables the function. This parameter only takes effect on the users
configured as lan-access type. For other types of users, the display local-user
idle-cut enable and display local-user idle-cut disable commands do
not display any information.
service-type: Configures to display local user of a specified type. telnet means
that the specified user type is telnet. ftp means that the specified user type is ftp.
ssh means the specified user type is ssh. terminal means that the specified user
type is terminal which refers to users who use the terminal service (login from the
console port). lan-access means that the specified user type is lan-access which
mainly refers to Ethernet accessing users, 802.1x supplicants for example.
state { active | block }: Configures to display the local users in the specified
state. active means that the system allows the user requesting network service
and block means the system does not allow the user requesting network service.
user-name user-name: Configures to display a user specified with user-name.
user-name is the argument specifying the username. It is a character string not
exceeding 80 characters.
vlan vlanid: Configures to display the users bound to the specified VLAN.
vlanid is the integer, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Description
Use the display local-user command to view the relevant information of all
the local users or the specified one(s).
This command displays the relevant information about a specified or all the local
users. The output can help you with the fault diagnosis and troubleshooting
related to local user.
Related command: local-user.
Example
To display the relevant information of all the local users, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display local-user
The contents of local user xxx:
State:
Active
ServiceType Mask:
Idle Cut:
Disable
AccessLimit:
Disable
Current AccessNum: 0
Bind location: Disable
Vlan ID:
Disable
Total 1 local user(s) Matched,1 listed.
264
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Table 30 Output description of the display local-user command
domain
Field
Description
State
The state of the user
Idle-Cut
The state of the idle-cut Switch
Access-Limit
The limit of the number of access users
Bind location
Indicates whether a port is bound with or not
VLAN ID
The ID of the VLAN to which the user is bound
IP address
The bound ip address of the user
MAC address
The bound MAC address of the user
FTP Directory
The directory authorized to FTP users
Syntax
domain { isp-name | default { disable | enable isp-name }}
undo domain isp-name
View
System View
Parameter
isp-name: Specifies an ISP domain name. The name is expressed with a character
string not exceeding 24 characters, excluding “/”, “: ”, “*”, “? ”, “&lt;”, and “&gt;”.
default enable isp-name: Enables the default ISP domain specified by
isp-name.
default disable: Restores the default ISP domain to system.
Description
Use the domain command to configure an ISP domain or enter the view of an
existing ISP domain. Use the undo domain command to cancel a specified ISP
domain.
By default, a domain named system has been created in the system. The
attributes of system are all default values.
ISP domain is a group of users belonging to the same ISP. Generally, for a
username in the userid@isp-name format, taking [email protected] as an
example, the isp-name (that is, 3Com163.net) following the @ is the ISP domain
name. When 3Com 4500 Series Ethernet Switches control user access, as for an
ISP user whose username is in userid@isp-name format, the system will take
userid part as username for identification and take isp-name part as domain
name.
The purpose of introducing ISP domain settings is to support the application
environment with several ISP domains. In this case, an access device may have
supplicants from different ISP domains. Because the attributes of ISP users, such as
username and password structures, service types, may be different, it is necessary
to separate them by setting ISP domains. In ISP Domain View, you can configure a
complete set of exclusive ISP domain attributes for each ISP domain, which
includes AAA schemes ( RADIUS scheme applied and so forth.)
AAA and RADIUS Configuration Commands
265
For a Switch, each supplicant belongs to an ISP domain. The system supports up to
16 ISP domains. If a user has not reported its ISP domain name, the system will
put it into the default domain.
When this command is used, if the specified ISP domain does not exist, the system
will create a new ISP domain. All the ISP domains are in the active state when
they are created.
Related commands: access-limit, radius scheme, state, display domain.
Example
To create a new ISP domain, marlboro.net, and enters its view, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]domain marlboro.net
New Domain added.
[4500-isp-marlboro.net]
idle-cut
Syntax
idle-cut { disable | enable minute flow }
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
disable: means disabling the user to use idle-cut function .
enable: means enabling the user to use the function.
minute: Specifies the maximum idle time, ranging from 1 to 120 and measured in
minutes.
flow: The minimum data traffic, ranging from 1 to 10,240,000 and measured in
bytes.
Description
Use the idle-cut command to configure the user template in the current ISP
domain.
By default, after an ISP domain is created, this attribute in user template is
disable, that is, the user idle-cut is disabled.
The user template is a set of default user attributes. If a user requesting for the
network service does not have some required attributes, the corresponding
attributes in the template will be endeavored to him as default ones. The user
template of the Switch you are using may only provide user idle-cut settings. After
a user is authenticated, if the idle-cut is configured to enable or disable by neither
the user nor the RADIUS server, the user will adopt the idle-cut state in the
template.
Because a user template only works in one ISP domain, it is necessary to configure
user template attributes for users from different ISP domain respectively.
266
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Related command: domain
Example
To enable the user in the current ISP domain, 3Com163.net, to use the idle-cut
attribute specified in the user template (that is, enabling the user to use the
idle-cut function). The maximum idle time is 50 minutes and the minimum data
traffic is 500 bytes.
&lt;4500&gt; system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]domain marlboro.net
[4500-isp-marlboro.net]idle-cut enable 50 500
level
Syntax
level level
undo level
View
Local User View
Parameter
level: Specifies user priority level, an integer ranging from 0 to 3.
Description
Use the level command to configure user priority level. Use the undo level
command to restore the default user priority level.
By default, the user priority level is 0.
Related command: local-user
If the configured authentication mode is none authentication or password
authentication, the command level that a user can access after login depends on
the priority of user interface. In the case of authentication requiring both
username and password, however, the accessible command level depends on user
priority level.
Example
To set the priority level of the user 3Com to 3, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user 3Com1
[4500-luser-3Com1]level 3
local-user
Syntax
local-user user-name
undo local-user { user-name | all [ service-type { telnet | ftp |
lan-access | ssh | terminal } ] }
AAA and RADIUS Configuration Commands
267
View
System View
Parameter
user-name: Specifies a local username with a character string not exceeding 80
characters, excluding “/”, “:”, “*”, “?”, “&lt;” and “&gt;”. The @ character can only
be used once in one username. The pure username (the part before @, namely the
user ID) cannot exceed 55 characters. The user-name parameter is not case
sensitive.
service-type: Specifies the service type.
telnet: The specified user type is telnet.
ftp: The specified user type is ftp.
lan-access: The specified user type is lan-access which mainly refers to Ethernet
accessing users, 802.1x supplicants for example.
ssh: The specified user type is ssh.
terminal: The specified user type is terminal which refers to users who use the
terminal service (login from the console port).
all: All the users.
Description
Use the local-user command to configure a local user and enter the local user
view. Use the undo local-user command to cancel a specified local user.
By default, no local user.
Related commands: display local-user, server-type.
Example
To add a local user named 3Com1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user 3Com1
[4500-luser-3Com1]
local-user
password-display-mode
Syntax
local-user password-display-mode { cipher-force | auto }
undo local-user password-display-mode
View
System View
Parameter
cipher-force: Forced cipher mode specifies that the passwords of all the
accessed users must be displayed in cipher text.
268
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
auto: The auto mode specifies that a user is allowed to use the password
command to set a password display mode.
Description
Use the local-user password-display-mode command, you can configure the
password display mode of all the accessing user. Use the undo local-user
password-display-mode command to cancel password display mode that has
been set for all the accessing users.
The password display mode of all the accessing users defaults to auto.
Related commands: display local-user, password
Example
To force all accessing users to display passwords in cipher text, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user password-display-mode cipher-force
messenger
Syntax
messenger time { enable limit interval | disable }
undo messenger time
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
limit: Remaining-online-time threshold in minutes, in the range of 1 to 60. When
the remaining online time of a user is equal to this threshold, the Switch begins to
send alert messages to the client.
interval: Sending interval of alert messages in minutes, in the range of 5 to 60
(must be a multiple of 5).
Description
Use the messenger time enable command to enable messenger alert and
configure the related parameters.
Use the messenger time disable command to disable messenger alert.
Use the undo messenger time command to restore messenger alert to default
settings.
By default, the messenger alert is disabled on the Switch.
This function allows the clients to inform the online users about their remaining
online time through message alert dialog box.
The implementation of this function is as follows:
■
On the Switch, use the messenger time enable command to enable this
function and to configure the remaining-online-time threshold (the limit
argument) and the alert message interval.
■
If the threshold is reached, the Switch sends messages containing the user's
remaining online time to the client at the interval you configured.
AAA and RADIUS Configuration Commands
■
269
The client keeps the user informed of the remaining online time through a
message alert dialog box.
Example
To configure to start the sending of alert messages when the user's remaining
online time is 30 minutes and send the messages at an interval of five minutes,
enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]domain system
[4500-isp-system]messenger time enable 30 5
password
Syntax
password { simple | cipher } password
undo password
View
Local User View
Parameter
cipher: Configure to display passwords in encrypted text.
simple: Configure to display passwords in plain text.
password: Defines a password. For simple mode, the password must be in plain
text. For cipher mode, the password can be either in encrypted text or in plain
text. The result is determined by the input. A plain text password is a character
string of no more than 16 characters.
Description
Use the password command to configure a password display mode for local users.
Use the undo password command to cancel the specified password display mode.
Related command: display local-user.
Example
To set the user 3Com1 to display the password in simple text, given the password
is 20030422, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user 3Com1
[4500-luser-3Com1]password simple 20030422
radius-scheme
Syntax
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name
View
ISP Domain View
270
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Parameter
radius-scheme-name: Specifies a RADIUS scheme, with a character string not
exceeding 32 characters.
Description
Use the radius-scheme command to configure the RADIUS scheme used by the
current ISP domain.
This command is used to specify the RADIUS scheme for the current ISP domain.
The specified RADIUS scheme shall have been created.
Related commands: radius scheme, display radius.
Example
The following example designates the current ISP domain, marlboro.net, to use
the RADIUS server, Radserver.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]domain marlboro.net
[4500-isp-marlboro.net]radius-scheme Radserver
scheme
Syntax
scheme { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name [ local ] | local | none }
undo scheme { radius-scheme | none }
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
radius-scheme-name: RADIUS scheme, a character string not exceeding 32
characters.
local: Local authentication.
none: No authentication.
Description
Use the scheme command to configure the AAA scheme to be referenced by the
current ISP domain. Use the undo scheme command to restore the default AAA
scheme.
The default AAA scheme in the system is local.
The system adopts three types of AAA schemes to perform authentication and/or
accounting: local authentication, no authentication and RADIUS scheme.
■
When using radius-scheme radius-scheme-name local in the configuration
command, the local refers to the alternative authentication scheme if the
RADIUS server does not respond normally. Therefore, when the RADIUS server
operates normally, the local scheme is not used otherwise, the local scheme is
used.
AAA and RADIUS Configuration Commands
■
If the local or none scheme applies, no RADIUS scheme can be adopted.
■
If you want to specify the ISP domain to adopt RADIUS scheme, then the
RADIUS scheme must have already been configured.
271
You can use either scheme or radius-scheme command to specify the RADIUS
scheme for an ISP domain. If both of these two commands are used, the latest
configuration will take effect.
Related command: radius scheme, display radius
Example
To specify the current ISP domain, 3Com163.net, to use the RADIUS scheme
3Com, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]domain marlboro.net
[4500-isp-marlboro.net]scheme radius-scheme 3Com
self-service-url
Syntax
self-service-url enable url-string
self-service-url disable
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
url-string: The URL address of the page used to change the user password on
the self-service server, a string with 1 to 64 characters. This string cannot contain
&quot;?&quot; character. If &quot;?&quot; is contained in the URL address, you must replace it with &quot;|&quot;
when inputting the URL address in the command line.
Description
Use the self-service-url enable command to configure self-service server
URL.
Use the self-service-url disable command to remove the configuration.
By default, self-service server URL is not configured on the Switch.
This command must be incorporated with a RADIUS server (such as a CAMS
server) that supports self-service. Self-service means that users can manage their
accounts and card numbers by themselves. And a server with the self-service
software is called a self-service server.
Once this function is enabled on the Switch, users can locate the self-service server
and perform self-management through the following operations:
■
Select &quot;Change user password&quot; on the 802.1x client.
■
After the client opens the default explorer (IE or NetScape), locate the specified
URL page used to change the user password on the self-service server.
■
Change user password on this page.
272
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
The &quot;Change user password&quot; option is available only after the user passed the
authentication; otherwise, this option is in grey and unavailable.
Example
In the ISP domain &quot;marlboro.net&quot;, configure the URL address of the page used to
change the user password on the self-service server to
http://10.153.89.94/selfservice/modPasswd1x.jsp|userName.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]domain marlboro.net
[4500-isp-marlboro.net] self-service-url enable
http://10.153.89.94/selfservice/modPasswd1x.jsp|userName
service-type
Syntax
service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory directory ] | lan-access | ssh |
telnet [ level level ] }
undo service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory ] | lan-access | { ssh |
telnet * }
View
Local User View
Parameter
telnet: Specifies user type as Telnet.
level level: Specifies the level of Telnet users. The argument level is an integer
in the range of 0 to 3 and defaults to 0.
ftp: Specifies user type as ftp.
ftp-directory directory: Specifies the directory of ftp users, directory is a
character string of up to 64 characters.
lan-access: Specifies user type to lan-access, which mainly refers to Ethernet
accessing users, 802.1x supplicants for example.
ssh: The specified user type is ssh.
Description
Use the service-type command to configure a service type for a particular user.
Use the undo service-type command to cancel the specified service type for the
user.
When you configure the service type ssh, Telnet or Terminal, note the following:
■
When you configure a new service type for a user, the system adds the new
service type to the existing one.
■
You can set a user level when you configure a service type. If you set multiple
service types and specify the user levels, only the last configured user level is
valid. Service types do not have individual user levels.
AAA and RADIUS Configuration Commands
273
You can use either level or service-type commands to specify the level for a
local user. If both of these commands are used, the latest configuration takes
effect.
Example
To set to provide the lan-access service for the user JohnQ, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user JohnQ
[4500-luser-JohnQ]service-type lan-access
state
Syntax
state { active | block }
View
ISP Domain View
Local User View
Parameter
active: Configures the current ISP domain (ISP Domain View)/current user (Local
User View) as being in active state, that is, the system allows the users in the
domain (ISP Domain View) or the current user (Local User View) to request
network service.
block: Configures the current ISP domain (ISP Domain View)/current user (Local
User View) as being in block state, that is, the system does not allow the users in
the domain (ISP Domain View) or the current user (Local User View) to request
network service.
Description
Use the state command to configure the state of the current ISP domain/current
user.
By default, after an ISP domain is created, it is in the active state (in ISP Domain
View).
A local user will be active (in Local User View) upon its creation.
In ISP Domain View, every ISP can either be in active or block state. If an ISP
domain is configured to be active, the users in it can request for network service,
while in block state, its users cannot request for any network service, which will
not affect the users currently online.
Related command: domain.
Example
To set the current ISP domain marlboro.net to be in the block state. The
supplicants in this domain cannot request for the network service, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
274
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
[4500]domain marlboro.net
[4500-isp-marlboro.net]state block
[4500-isp-marlboro.net]quit
To set the user 3Com1 to be in the block state, enter the following:
[4500-user-3Com1]state block
RADIUS Protocol
Configuration
Commands
accounting optional
This section describes how to use the RADIUS Protocol configuration commands
on your Switch.
Syntax
accounting optional
undo accounting optional
View
ISP Domain View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the accounting optional command to enable the selection of the RADIUS
accounting option. Use the undo accounting optional command to disable the
selection of RADIUS accounting option.
By default, selection of the RADIUS accounting option is disabled.
If no RADIUS server is available or if RADIUS accounting server fails when the
accounting optional is configured, the user can still use the network resource,
otherwise, the user will be disconnected.
The user configured with accounting optional command in RADIUS scheme will
no longer send real-time accounting update packet or stop accounting packet.
The accounting optional command in RADIUS Scheme View is only effective on
the accounting that uses this RADIUS scheme.
Example
Enable the selection of RADIUS accounting of the RADIUS scheme named as
CAMS.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme cams
New Radius scheme
[4500-radius-cams]accounting optional
data-flow-format
Syntax
data-flow-format data { byte | giga-byte | kilo-byte | mega-byte }
packet { giga-packet | kilo-packet | mega-packet | one-packet }
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
275
undo data-flow format
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
data: Set data unit.
byte: Set 'byte' as the unit of data flow.
giga-byte: Set 'giga-byte' as the unit of data flow.
kilo-byte: Set 'kilo-byte' as the unit of data flow.
mega-byte: Set 'mega-byte' as the unit of data flow.
packet: Set data packet unit.
giga-packet: Set 'giga-packet' as the unit of packet flow.
kilo-packet: Set 'kilo-packet' as the unit of packet flow.
mega-packet: Set 'mega-packet' as the unit of packet flow.
one-packet: Set 'one-packet' as the unit of packet flow.
Description
■
Use the data-flow-format command to configure the unit of data flow that
is sent to the RADIUS Server.
■
Use the undo data-flow format command to restore the unit to the default
setting.
By default, the data unit is byte and the data packet unit is one-packet.
Related command: display radius.
Example
To set the unit of data flow that is sent to kilo-byte and the data packet to
kilo-packet, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
New Radius scheme
[4500-radius-3Com]data-flow-format data kilo-byte packet kilo-packet
display local-server
statistics
Syntax
display local-server statistics
View
All views
276
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display local-server statistics command to view the statistics of
local RADIUS authentication server.
Related command: local-server.
Example
To display the statistics of local RADIUS authentication server, enter the following
&lt;4500&gt;display local-server statistics
The localserver packet statistics:
Receive:
0
Discard:
0
Auth Receive:
0
Acct Receive:
0
display radius
Send:
Receive Packet Error:
Auth Send:
Acct Send:
0
0
0
0
Syntax
display radius [ radius-scheme-name ]
View
All views
Parameter
radius-scheme-name: Specifies the RADIUS scheme name with a character string
not exceeding 32 characters. Display all RADIUS schemes when the parameter is
not set.
Description
Use the display radius command to view the configuration information of all
RADIUS schemes or a specified one.
By default, this command outputs the configuration information about the
specified or all the RADIUS schemes. The output can help with RADIUS diagnosis
and troubleshooting.
Related command: radius scheme.
Example
To display the configuration information of all the RADIUS schemes, enter the
following.
&lt;4500&gt;display radius
-----------------------------------------------------------------SchemeName =system
Index=0
Type=3Com
Primary Auth IP =127.0.0.1
Port=1645
State=active
Primary Acct IP =127.0.0.1
Port=1646
State=active
Second Auth IP =0.0.0.0
Port=1812
State=active
Second Acct IP =0.0.0.0
Port=1813
State=active
Auth Server Encryption Key= 3Com
Acct Server Encryption Key= 3Com
Accounting method = required
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
277
TimeOutValue(in second)=3 RetryTimes=3 RealtimeACCT(in minute)=12
Permitted send realtime PKT failed counts
=5
Retry sending times of noresponse acct-stop-PKT =500
Quiet-interval(min)
=5
Username format
=without-domain
Data flow unit
=Byte
Packet unit
=1
-----------------------------------------------------------------Total 1 RADIUS scheme(s). 1 listed
display radius statistics
Syntax
display radius statistics
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display radius statistics command to view the statistics information
of RADIUS packet.
This command outputs the statistics information about the RADIUS packets. The
displayed packet information can help with RADIUS diagnosis and
troubleshooting.
Related command: radius scheme.
Example
To display the statistics information of RADIUS packets, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display radius statistics
state statistic(total=1048):
DEAD=1048
AuthProc=0
AuthSucc=0
AcctStart=0
RLTSend=0
RLTWait=0
AcctStop=0
OnLine=0
Stop=0
StateErr=0
Receive and Send packets statistic:
Send PKT total :0
Receive PKT total:0
RADIUS received packets statistic:
Code= 2,Num=0
,Err=0
Code= 3,Num=0
,Err=0
Code= 5,Num=0
,Err=0
Code=11,Num=0
,Err=0
Code=22,Num=0
,Err=0
Running statistic:
RADIUS received messages statistic:
Normal auth request
,Num=0
EAP auth request
,Num=0
Account request
,Num=0
Account off request
,Num=0
Leaving request
,Num=0
,Err=0
,Err=0
,Err=0
,Err=0
,Err=0
,Succ=0
,Succ=0
,Succ=0
,Succ=0
,Succ=0
278
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
PKT auth timeout
display
stop-accounting-buffer
,Num=0
,Err=0
,Succ=0
Syntax
display stop-accounting-buffer { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name |
session-id session-id | time-range start-time stop-time | user-name
user-name }
View
All views
Parameter
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Configures to display the saved stopping
accounting requests according to RADIUS server name. radius-scheme-name
specifies the RADIUS server name with a character string not exceeding 32
characters.
session-id session-id: Configures to display the saved stopping accounting
requests according to the session ID. session-id specifies the session ID with a
character string not exceeding 50 characters.
time-range start-time stop-time: Configures to display the saved stopping
accounting requests according to the saving time. Start-time specifies the start
time of the saving time range and stop-time specifies the stop time of the saving
time range. The time is expressed in the format hh:mm:ss-yyyy/mm/dd. When this
parameter is specified, all the stopping accounting requests saved in the time
range since start-time to stop-time will be displayed.
user-name user-name: Configures to display the saved stopping accounting
requests according to the username. User-name specifies the username, a
character string not exceeding 32 characters.
Description
Use the display stop-accounting-buffer command to view the stopping
accounting requests, which have not been responded and saved in the buffer.
After transmitting the stopping accounting requests, if there is no response from
the RADIUS server, the Switch will save the packet in the buffer and retransmit it
for several times, which is set through the retry realtime-accounting.
This command is used to display the stopping accounting requests saved in the
Switch buffer. You can select to display the packets sent to a certain RADIUS
server, or display the packets according to user session ID or username. You may
also display the request packets saved during a specified time range. The displayed
packet information can help with diagnosis and troubleshooting.
Related commands: reset stop-accounting-buffer, stop-accounting-buffer
enable, retry stop-accounting.
Example
To display the stopping accounting requests saved in the system buffer since 0:0:0
to 23:59:59 on August 31, 2002, enter the following:
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
279
&lt;4500&gt;display stop-accounting-buffer time-range 0:0:0-2003/08/31
23:59:59-2003/08/31
Total find
0 record
key
Syntax
key { accounting | authentication } string
undo key { accounting | authentication }
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
accounting: Configures to set/delete the authentication key for the RADIUS
accounting packet.
authentication: Configures to set/delete the encryption key for RADIUS
authentication/authorization packet.
string: Specifies the key with a character string not exceeding 16 characters. By
default, the key is “3Com”.
Description
Use the key command to configure encryption key for RADIUS
authentication/authorization or accounting packet. Use the undo key command
to restore the default key.
RADIUS client (Switch) and RADIUS server use MD5 algorithm to hash the
exchanged packets. The two ends verify the packet through setting the key. Only
when the keys are identical can both ends accept the packets from each other and
give responses. So it is necessary to ensure that the keys set on the Switch and the
RADIUS server are identical. If the authentication/authorization and accounting are
performed on two different servers with different keys, you should set two keys
respectively.
Related commands: primary accounting, primary authentication, radius
scheme.
Example
Example 1:
To set the authentication/authorization key of the RADIUS scheme to “hello”,
enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]key authentication hello
280
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Example 2:
To set the accounting packet key of the RADIUS scheme to “ok”, enter the
following:
[4500-radius]key accounting ok
local-server
Syntax
local-server nas-ip ip-address key string
undo local-server nas-ip ip-address
View
System View
Parameter
nas-ip ip-address: set NAS-IP address of access server. ip-address is expressed
in the format of dotted decimal. By default, there is a local server with the NAS-IP
address of 127.0.0.1.
key string: Set the shared key, string is a character string containing up to 16
characters.
Description
Use the local-server command to configure the parameters of local RADIUS
server. Use the undo local-server command to cancel a local RADIUS server.
RADIUS service, which adopts authentication/authorization/accounting servers to
manage users, is widely used in the Switch 4500. Besides, local
authentication/authorization service is also used in these products and it is called
local RADIUS function, that is, realize basic RADIUS function on the Switch.
When using local RADIUS server function, remember the number of the UDP port
used for authentication is 1645 and that for accounting is 1646.
The key configured by this command must be the same as that of the RADIUS
authentication/authorization packet configured by the command key
authentication in the RADIUS Scheme View.
The Switch 4500 Series supports up to 16 local RADIUS authentication servers.
Related commands: radius scheme, state and key.
Example
To set the IP address of local RADIUS authentication server to 10.110.1.2 and the
password to 3Com, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-server nas-ip 10.110.1.2 key 3Com
nas-ip
Syntax
nas-ip ip-address
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
281
undo nas-ip
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
ip-address: IP address in dotted decimal format.
Description
Use the nas-ip command to set the source IP address of the network access
server (NAS, the Switch in this guide), so that all packets destined for the RADIUS
server carry the same source IP address. Use the undo nas-ip command to cancel
the configuration.
Specifying a source address for the RADIUS packets to be transmitted can avoid
the situation where the packets sent back by the RADIUS server cannot be
received as the result of a physical interface failure. The address of a loopback
interface is usually used as the source address.
By default, the source IP address of packets is the IP address of the output port.
Related commands: display radius, radius nas-ip.
Example
To set the source IP address that is carried in the RADIUS packets sent by the NAS
(the Switch) to 10.1.1.1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme test1
New radius scheme
[4500-radius-test1]nas-ip 10.1.1.1
primary accounting
Syntax
primary accounting ip-address [ port-number ]
undo primary accounting
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal format.
port-number: Specifies UDP port number. ranging from 1 to 65535.
Description
Use the primary accounting command to configure the IP address and port
number for the primary accounting server. Use the undo primary accounting
command to restore the default IP address and port number of the primary
RADIUS accounting server.
282
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
By default, as for the newly created RADIUS scheme, the IP address of the primary
accounting server is 0.0.0.0, and the UDP port number of this server is 1813; as
for the &quot;system&quot; RADIUS scheme created by the system, the IP address of the
primary accounting server is 127.0.0.1, and the UDP port number is 1646. For the
newly created RADIUS scheme, the IP address of the primary accounting server is
0.0.0.0 and the UDP port number of this server is 1813.
After creating a RADIUS scheme, you are supposed to set IP addresses and UDP
port numbers for the RADIUS servers, including primary/second
authentication/authorization servers and accounting servers. In real networking
environments, the above parameters shall be set according to the specific
requirements. However, you must set at least one authentication/authorization
server and an accounting server. Besides, ensure that the RADIUS service port
settings on the Switch is consistent with the port settings on the RADIUS server.
Related commands: key, radius scheme, state.
Example
To set the IP address of the primary accounting server of RADIUS scheme,
“3Com”, to 10.110.1.2 and the UDP port 1813 to provide RADIUS accounting
service, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]primary accounting 10.110.1.2 1813
primary authentication
Syntax
primary authentication ip-address [ port-number ]
undo primary authentication
View
RADIUS Server Group View
Parameter
ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal format. By default, the IP addresses of
the primary authentication/authorization is at 0.0.0.0.
port-number: Specifies UDP port number. ranging from 1 to 65535. By default,
the UDP port for authentication/authorization service is 1812.
Description
Use the primary authentication command to configure the IP address and port
number for the primary RADIUS authentication/authorization. Use the undo
primary authentication command to restore the default IP address and port
number of the primary RADIUS authentication/authorization.
By default, for the RADIUS scheme created by the system, the IP address of the
primary authentication server is 127.0.0.1 and the UDP port number is 1645. For
the newly created RADIUS scheme, the IP address of the primary authentication
server is 0.0.0.0 and the UDP port number of this server is 1812.
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
283
After creating a RADIUS server group, you are supposed to set IP addresses and
UDP port numbers for the RADIUS servers, including primary/second
authentication/authorization servers and accounting servers. In real networking
environments, the above parameters shall be set according to the specific
requirements. However, you set at least one authentication/authorization server
and an accounting server. Besides, ensure that the RADIUS service port settings on
the Switch is consistent with the port settings on the RADIUS server.
Related commands: key, radius scheme, state.
Example
To set the IP address of the primary authentication/authorization server of RADIUS
server group, “3Com”, to 10.110.1.1 and the UDP port 1812 to provide RADIUS
authentication/authorization service, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]primary authentication auth 10.110.1.1 1812
radius nas-ip
Syntax
radius nas-ip ip-address
undo radius nas-ip
View
System View
Parameter
ip-address: IP address in dotted decimal format.
Description
Use the radius nas-ip command to specify the source address of the RADIUS
packet sent from NAS. Use the undo radius nas-ip command to restore the
default setting.
By specifying the source address of the RADIUS packet, you can avoid unreachable
packets as returned from the server upon interface failure. The source address is
normally recommended to be a loopback interface address.
By default, the source address is not specified, that is, the address of the interface
sending the packet serves as the source address.
This command specifies only one source address; therefore, the newly configured
source address may overwrite the original one.
Example
To configure the Switch to send RADIUS packets from 129.10.10.1, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius nas-ip 129.10.10.1
284
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
radius scheme
Syntax
radius scheme radius-scheme-name
undo radius scheme radius-scheme-name
View
System View
Parameter
radius-scheme-name: Specifies the Radius server name with a character string
not exceeding 32 characters.
Description
Use the radius scheme command to configure a RADIUS scheme group and enter
its view. Use the undo radius scheme command to delete the specified RADIUS
scheme.
A default RADIUS scheme named system has been created in the system. The
attributes of system are all default values.
RADIUS protocol configuration is performed on a per-RADIUS-scheme basis. Every
RADIUS scheme shall at least have the specified IP address and UDP port number
of the RADIUS authentication/authorization/accounting server and some necessary
parameters exchanged with the RADIUS client end (Switch). It is necessary to
create the RADIUS scheme and enter its view before performing other RADIUS
protocol configurations.
A RADIUS scheme can be used by several ISP domains at the same time. You can
configure up to 16 RADIUS schemes, including the default RADIUS scheme named
as System.
Although undo radius scheme can remove a specified RADIUS scheme, the
default one cannot be removed. Note that a scheme currently in use by the online
user cannot be removed.
Related commands: key, retry realtime-accounting, radius-scheme, timer
realtime-accounting, stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry
stop-accounting, server-type, state, user-name-format, retry, display
radius, display radius statistics.
Example
To create a RADIUS scheme named “3Com” and enter its view, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
New Radius scheme
[4500-radius-3Com]
reset radius statistics
Syntax
reset radius statistics
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
285
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset radius statistics command to clear the statistic information related to
the RADIUS protocol.
Related command: display radius.
Example
To clear the RADIUS protocol statistics, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;reset radius statistics
reset
stop-accounting-buffer
Syntax
reset stop-accounting-buffer { radius-scheme radius-scheme-name |
session-id session-id | time-range start-time stop-time | user-name
user-name }
View
User View
Parameter
radius-scheme radius-scheme-name: Configures to delete the stopping
accounting requests from the buffer according to the specified RADIUS server
name. radius-scheme-name specifies the RADIUS server name with a character
string not exceeding 32 characters.
session-id session-id: Configures to delete the stopping accounting requests
from the buffer according to the specified session ID. session-id specifies the
session ID with a character string not exceeding 50 characters.
time-range start-time stop-time: Configures to delete the stopping
accounting requests from the buffer according to the saving time. Start-time
specifies the start time of the saving time range and stop-time specifies the stop
time of the saving time range. The time is expressed in the format
hh:mm:ss-yyyy/mm/dd. When this parameter is set, all the stopping accounting
requests saved since start-time to stop-time will be deleted.
user-name user-name: Configures to delete the stopping accounting requests
from the buffer according to the username. User-name specifies the username, a
character string not exceeding 32 characters.
Description
Use the reset stop-accounting-buffer command to reset the stopping
accounting requests, which are saved in the buffer and have not been responded.
By default, after transmitting the stopping accounting requests, if there is no
response from the RADIUS server, the Switch will save the packet in the buffer and
286
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
retransmit it for several times, which is set through the retry
realtime-accounting command.
This command is used to delete the stopping accounting requests from the Switch
buffer. You can select to delete the packets transmitted to a specified RADIUS
server, or according to the session-id or username, or delete the packets
transmitted during the specified time-range.
Related commands: stop-accounting-buffer enable, retry
stop-accounting, display stop-accounting-buffer.
Example
To delete the stopping accounting requests saved in the system buffer by the user,
[email protected], enter the following:
[4500]reset stop-accounting-buffer user-name [email protected]
To delete the stopping accounting requests saved in the system buffer since 0:0:0
to 23:59:59 on August 31, 2002, enter the following:
[4500]reset stop-accounting-buffer time-range 0:0:0-2002/08/31
23:59:59-2002/08/31
retry
Syntax
retry retry-times
undo retry
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
retry-times: Specifies the maximum times of retransmission, ranging from 1 to
20. By default, the value is 3.
Description
Use the retry command to configure the RADIUS request retransmission times.
Use the undo retry command to restore the retry-times to default value.
Because RADIUS protocol uses UDP packets to carry the data, its communication
process is not reliable. If the RADIUS server has not responded NAS until timeout,
NAS has to retransmit RADIUS request packet. If it transmits more than the
specified retry-time, NAS considers that the communication with the current
RADIUS server has been disconnected and it will transmit request packet to other
RADIUS servers.
Setting a suitable retry-time according to the network situation can speed up the
system response.
Related command: radius scheme
Example
To set to retransmit the RADIUS request packet no more than 5 times via the server
3Com in the RADIUS scheme, enter the following:
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
287
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]retry 5
retry
realtime-accounting
Syntax
retry realtime-accounting retry-times
undo retry realtime-accounting
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
retry-times: Specifies the maximum times of real-time accounting request
failing to be responded, ranging from 1 to 255. By default, the accounting request
can fail to be responded up to 5 times.
Description
Use the retry realtime-accounting command to configure the maximum
number of retries for real-time accounting requests. Use the undo retry
realtime-accounting command to restore the maximum number of retries for
real-time accounting requests to the default value.
RADIUS server usually checks if a user is online with timeout timer. If the RADIUS
server has not received the real-time accounting packet from NAS, it will consider
that there is line or device failure and stop accounting. Therefore, it is necessary to
disconnect the user at the NAS end and on the RADIUS server synchronously when
unexpected failure occurs. The Switch 4500 Series supports a maximum number
of times that real-time accounting requests can fail to be responded to. NAS will
disconnect the user if it has not received a real-time accounting response from the
RADIUS server for the number of specified times.
How is the value of count calculated? Suppose RADIUS server connection will
timeout in T and the real-time accounting interval of NAS is t, then the integer
part of the result from dividing T by t is the value of count. Therefore, when
applied, T is suggested the numbers which can be divided exactly by t.
Related command: radius scheme.
Example
To allow the real-time accounting request failing to be responded for up to 10
times, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt; system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]retry realtime-accounting 10
retry stop-accounting
Syntax
retry stop-accounting retry-times
undo retry stop-accounting
288
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
retry-times: Specifies the maximal retransmission times after stopping
accounting request,. ranging from 10 to 65535. By default, the value is 500.
Description
Use the retry stop-accounting command to configure the maximal
retransmission times after stopping accounting request. Use the undo retry
stop-accounting command to restore the retransmission times to the default
value.
Because the stopping accounting request concerns account balance and will affect
the amount of charge, which is very important for both the user and ISP, NAS shall
make its best effort to send the message to RADIUS accounting server.
Accordingly, if the message from the Switch to RADIUS accounting server has not
been responded, the Switch shall save it in the local buffer and retransmit it until
the server responds or discard the messages after transmitting for specified times.
Related commands: reset stop-accounting-buffer, radius scheme, display
stop-accounting-buffer.
Example
To indicate that, when stopping accounting request for the server “3Com” in the
RADIUS server group, the Switch will retransmit the packets for up to 1000 times,
enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]retry stop-accounting 1000
secondary accounting
Syntax
secondary accounting ip-address [ port-number ]
undo secondary accounting
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal format. By default, the IP addresses of
second accounting server is at 0.0.0.0.
port-number: Specifies the UDP port number, ranging from 1 to 65535. By
default, the accounting service is provided via UDP 1813.
Description
Use the secondary accounting command to configure the IP address and port
number for the second RADIUS accounting server. Use the undo secondary
accounting command to restore the IP address and port number to default
values.
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
289
For detailed information, read the Description of the primary accounting
command.
Related commands: key, radius scheme, state.
Example
To set the IP address of the second accounting server of RADIUS scheme, 3Com, to
10.110.1.1 and the UDP port 1813 to provide RADIUS accounting service, enter
the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]secondary accounting 10.110.1.1 1813
secondary
authentication
Syntax
secondary authentication ip-address [ port-number ]
undo secondary authentication
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
ip-address: IP address, in dotted decimal format. By default, the IP addresses of
second authentication/authorization is at 0.0.0.0.
port-number: Specifies the UDP port number, ranging from 1 to 65535. By
default, the authentication/authorization service is provided via UDP 1812
Description
Use the secondary authentication command to configure the IP address and
port number for the second RADIUS authentication/authorization. Use the undo
secondary authentication command to restore the IP address and port number
to default values.
For detailed information, read the Description of the primary authentication
command.
Related commands: key, radius scheme, state.
Example
To set the IP address of the second authentication/authorization server of RADIUS
scheme, “3Com”, to 10.110.1.2 and the UDP port 1812 to provide RADIUS
authentication/authorization service, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]secondary authentication 10.110.1.2 1812
server-type
Syntax
server-type { 3com | standard }
290
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
undo server-type
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
3Com: Configures the Switch to support the extended RADIUS server type, which
requires the RADIUS client end (Switch) and RADIUS server to interact according
RADIUS extensions.
standard: Configures the Switch to support the RADIUS server of Standard type,
which requires the RADIUS client end (Switch) and RADIUS server to interact
according to the regulation and packet format of standard RADIUS protocol (RFC
2138/2139 or newer).
Description
Use the server-type command to configure the RADIUS server type supported by
the Switch. Use the undo server-type to restore the RADIUS server type to the
default value.
By default, the newly created RADIUS scheme supports the server of standard.
type, while the &quot;system&quot; RADIUS scheme created by the system supports the
server of 3Com type.
The Switch 4500 supports standard RADIUS protocol and the extended RADIUS
service platform independently developed by 3Com. This command is used to
select the supported RADIUS server type.
Related command: radius scheme.
Example
To set the RADIUS server type of RADIUS scheme, “3Com” to 3Com, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]server-type 3Com
state
Syntax
state { primary | secondary } { accounting | authentication } { block
| active }
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
primary: Configures to set the state of the primary RADIUS server.
secondary: Configures to set the state of the second RADIUS server.
accounting: Configures to set the state of RADIUS accounting server.
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
291
authentication: Configures to set the state of RADIUS
authentication/authorization.
block: Configures the RADIUS server to be in the state of block.
active: Configures the RADIUS server to be active, namely the normal
operation state.
Description
Use the state command to configure the state of RADIUS server.
By default, as for the newly created RADIUS scheme, the primary and secondary
accounting/authentication servers are in the state of block; as for the &quot;system&quot;
RADIUS scheme created by the system, the primary accounting/authentication
servers are in the state of active, and the secondary accounting/authentication
servers are in the state of block.
For the primary and second servers (no matter an authentication/authorization or
an accounting server), if the primary server is disconnected to NAS for some fault,
NAS will automatically turn to exchange packets with the second server. However,
after the primary one recovers, NAS will not resume the communication with it at
once, instead, it continues communicating with the second one. When the second
one fails to communicate, NAS will turn to the primary one again. This command
is used to set the primary server to be active manually, in order that NAS can
communicate with it right after the troubleshooting.
When the primary and second servers are all active or block, NAS will send the
packets to the primary server only.
Related commands: radius scheme, primary authentication, secondary
authentication, primary accounting, secondary accounting.
Example
To set the second authentication server of RADIUS scheme, “3Com”, to be active,
enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]state secondary authentication active
stop-accounting-buffer
enable
Syntax
stop-accounting-buffer enable
undo stop-accounting-buffer enable
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
None
292
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Description
Use the stop-accounting-buffer enable command to configure to save the
stopping accounting requests without response in the Switch buffer. Use the undo
stop-accounting-buffer enable command to cancel the function of saving the
stopping accounting requests without response in the Switch buffer.
By default, enable to save the stopping accounting requests in the buffer.
Because the stopping accounting request concerns the account balance and will
affect the amount of charge, which is very important for both the user and ISP,
NAS shall make its best effort to send the message to the RADIUS accounting
server. Accordingly, if the message from the Switch to the RADIUS accounting
server has not been responded to, the Switch shall save it in the local buffer and
retransmit it until the server responds or discard the messages after transmitting
for a specified number of times.
Related commands: reset stop-accounting-buffer, radius scheme, display
stop-accounting-buffer.
Example
To indicate that, for the server “3Com” in the RADIUS scheme, the Switch will
save the stopping accounting request packets in the buffer, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]stop-accounting-buffer enable
timer
Syntax
timer seconds
undo timer
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
seconds: RADIUS server response timeout timer, ranging from 1 to 10 and
measured in seconds. By default, the value is 3.
Description
Use the timer command to configure RADIUS server response timer. Use the undo
timer command to restore the default value of the timer.
After a RADIUS (authentication/authorization or accounting) request packet has
been transmitted for a period of time, if NAS has not received the response from
the RADIUS server, it has to retransmit the message to guarantee RADIUS service
for the user. The period taken is called RADIUS server response timeout time,
which is controlled by the RADIUS server response timeout timer in the Switch.
This command is used to set this timer.
Setting a suitable timer according to the network situation will enhance system
performance.
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
293
Related commands: radius scheme, retry.
Example
To set the response timeout timer of RADIUS scheme, 3Com, to 5 seconds, enter
the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]timer 5
timer quiet
Syntax
time quiet minutes
undo timer quiet
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
minutes: Quiet time interval, ranging from 1 to 255 in minutes. The default value
is 5.
Description
Use the timer quiet command to set the quiet time interval after which the
primary and secondary RADIUS scheme servers switch over. Use the undo timer
quiet to set the quiet time interval to its default value.
The functions of the quite time interval are as follows:
1 The Switch sends RADIUS packets to the primary RADIUS server.
2 If the Switch affirms that the primary server does not respond, it then sends
RADIUS packets to the secondary RADIUS server.
3 After each quiet time interval, the Switch sets the status of the primary RADIUS
server to active and sends RADIUS packets to it next time.
Example
To set the quiet time interval of the RADIUS server group ‘3Com’ to 3 minutes,
enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]radius scheme 3com
[4500-radius-3com]timer quiet 3
timer
realtime-accounting
Syntax
timer realtime-accounting minutes
undo timer realtime-accounting
View
RADIUS Scheme View
294
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
Parameter
minutes: Real-time accounting interval, ranging from 3 to 60, measured in
minutes in multiples of 3. By default, the value is 12.
Description
Use the timer realtime-accounting command to configure the real-time
accounting interval. Use the undo timer realtime-accounting command to
restore the default interval.
To implement real-time accounting, it is necessary to set a real-time accounting
interval. After the attribute is set, NAS will transmit the accounting information of
online users to the RADIUS server regularly.
The value of minutes is related to the performance of NAS and RADIUS server. The
smaller the value is, the higher the requirement for NAS and RADIUS server is.
When there are a large amount of users (more than 1000, inclusive), we suggest a
larger value. The following table recommends the ratio of minutes value to
number of users.
Table 31 Recommended ratio of minutes to number of users
Number of users
Real-time accounting
interval (minute)
1 to 99
3
100 to 499
6
500 to 999
12
&gt;1000
&gt;15
Related commands: retry realtime-accounting, radius scheme.
Example
To set the real-time accounting interval of RADIUS scheme, “3Com”, to 15
minutes, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]timer realtime-accounting 15
timer response-timeout
Syntax
timer response-timeout seconds
undo timer response-timeout
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
seconds: RADIUS server response timeout timer, ranging from 1 to 10 seconds. By
default, the value is 3.
RADIUS Protocol Configuration Commands
295
Description
Use the timer response-timeout command to configure the RADIUS server
response timer.
Use the undo timer command to restore the default.
If the NAS receives no response from the RADIUS server after sending a RADIUS
request (authentication/authorization or accounting request) for a period of time,
the NAS resends the request, thus ensuring the user can obtain the RADIUS
service. You can specify this period by setting the RADIUS server response timeout
timer, taking into consideration the network condition and the desired system
performance.
Related commands: radius scheme, retry.
Example
To set the response timeout timer in the RADIUS scheme 3Com to 5 seconds,
enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]timer response-timeout 5
user-name-format
Syntax
user-name-format { with-domain | without-domain }
View
RADIUS Scheme View
Parameter
with-domain: Specifies to send the username with domain name to RADIUS
server.
without-domain: Specifies to send the username without domain name to
RADIUS server.
Description
Use the user-name-format command to configure the username format sent to
RADIUS server.
By default, the username sent to RADIUS servers includes the ISP domain name.
The supplicants are generally named in userid@isp-name format. The part
following “@” is the ISP domain name. The Switch will put the users into certain
ISP domains according to the domain names. However, some earlier RADIUS
servers reject the username including the ISP domain name. In this case, the
username will be sent to the RADIUS server after its domain name is removed.
Accordingly, the Switch provides this command to decide whether the username
that is to be sent to RADIUS server carries the ISP domain name or not.
If a RADIUS scheme is configured to reject usernames including ISP domain names,
the RADIUS scheme shall not be simultaneously used in more than one ISP
296
CHAPTER 11: USING AAA AND RADIUS COMMANDS
domains. Otherwise, the RADIUS server will regard two users in different ISP
domains as the same user by mistake, if they have the same username (excluding
their respective domain names.)
Related command: radius scheme.
Example
To specify to send the username without domain name to RADIUS server, enter
the following:
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]radius scheme 3Com
[4500-radius-3Com]user-name-format without-domain
12
USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT
COMMANDS
This chapter describes how to use the following commands:
File System Management Commands
■
cd
■
copy
■
delete
■
dir
■
execute
■
file prompt
■
format
■
mkdir
■
more
■
move
■
pwd
■
rename
■
reset recycle-bin
■
rmdir
■
undelete
Configuration File Management Commands
■
display current-configuration
■
display saved-configuration
■
display this
■
display startup
■
reset saved-configuration
■
save
■
startup bootrom-access enable
■
startup saved configuration
FTP Server Configuration Commands
■
display ftp-server
■
display ftp-user
■
ftp server
298
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
■
ftp timeout
■
local-user
■
password
■
service-type
FTP Client Commands
■
ascii
■
binary
■
bye
■
cd
■
cdup
■
close
■
delete
■
dir
■
disconnect
■
ftp
■
get
■
lcd
■
ls
■
mkdir
■
passive
■
put
■
pwd
■
quit
■
remotehelp
■
rmdir
■
user
■
verbose
TFTP Configuration Commands
■
tftp get
■
tftp put
MAC Address Table Management Commands
■
display mac-address
■
display mac-address aging-time
■
mac-address
■
mac-address max-mac-count
■
mac-address timer
299
Device Management Commands
■
boot boot-loader
■
boot bootrom
■
display boot-loader
■
display cpu
■
display device
■
display fan
■
display memory
■
display power
■
display schedule reboot
■
reboot
■
schedule reboot at
■
schedule reboot delay
Basic System Configuration and Management Commands
■
clock datetime
■
clock summer-time
■
clock timezone
■
sysname
System Status and System Information Display Commands
■
display clock
■
display config-agent
■
display debugging
■
display version
System Debug Commands
■
debugging
■
display diagnostic-information
Network Connection Test Commands
■
end-station polling ip-address
■
ping
■
tracert
Log Commands
■
display channel
■
display info-center
■
info-center channel name
■
info-center console channel
■
info-center enable
300
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
■
info-center logbuffer
■
info-center loghost
■
info-center loghost source
■
info-center monitor channel
■
info-center snmp channel
■
info-center source
■
info-center switch-on
■
info-center timestamp
■
info-center trapbuffer
■
reset logbuffer
■
reset trapbuffer
■
terminal debugging
■
terminal logging
■
terminal monitor
■
terminal trapping
SNMP Configuration Commands
■
display snmp-agent
■
display snmp-agent community
■
display snmp-agent group
■
display snmp-agent mib-view
■
display snmp-agent statistics
■
display snmp-agent sys-info
■
display snmp-agent usm-user
■
display snmp-proxy unit
■
enable snmp trap
■
snmp-agent community
■
snmp-agent group
■
snmp-agent local-engineid
■
snmp-agent mib-view
■
snmp-agent packet max-size
■
snmp-agent sys-info
■
snmp-agent target-host
■
snmp-agent trap enable
■
snmp-agent trap life
■
snmp-agent trap queue-size
■
snmp-agent trap source
■
snmp-agent usm-user
■
undo snmp-agent
301
RMON Configuration Commands
■
display rmon alarm
■
display rmon event
■
display rmon eventlog
■
display rmon history
■
display rmon prialarm
■
display rmon statistics
■
rmon alarm
■
rmon event
■
rmon history
■
rmon prialarm
■
rmon statistics
SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands
■
debugging ssh server
■
display rsa local-key-pair public
■
display rsa peer-public-key
■
display ssh server
■
display ssh user-information
■
peer-public-key end
■
protocol inbound
■
public-key-code begin
■
public-key-code end
■
rsa local-key-pair create
■
rsa local-key-pair destroy
■
rsa peer-public-key
■
ssh server authentication-retries
■
ssh server rekey-interval
■
ssh server timeout
■
ssh user assign rsa-key
■
ssh user authentication-type
SSH Client Configuration Commands
■
display ssh server-info
■
peer-public-key end
■
public-key-code begin
■
public-key-code end
■
quit
■
rsa peer-public-key
302
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
■
ssh client assign rsa-key
■
ssh client first-time enable
■
ssh2
SFTP Server Configuration Commands
■
sftp server enable
■
ssh user service-type
SFTP Client Configuration Commands
File System
Management
Commands
■
bye
■
cd
■
cdup
■
delete
■
dir
■
exit
■
get
■
help
■
ls
■
mkdir
■
put
■
pwd
■
quit
■
remove
■
rename
■
rmdir
■
sftp
This section describes the commands you can use to manage the file system on
your Switch 4500.
In switches supporting the XRN feature, the file path must start with
&quot;unit[No.]&gt;flash:/:&quot;, the [No.] is the unit ID. For example, suppose unit ID is 1, and
the path of the &quot;text.txt&quot; file under the root directory must be
&quot;unit1&gt;flash:/text.txt&quot;.
cd
Syntax
cd directory
View
User view
File System Management Commands
303
Parameter
directory: Destination directory. The default directory is the working path
configured by the user when the system starts.
Description
Use the cd command to change the current user configuration path on the
Switch.
Example
Change the current working directory of the switch to flash.
&lt;4500&gt;cd flash:
&lt;4500&gt;pwd
unit1&gt;flash:
&lt;4500&gt;
copy
Syntax
copy filepath-source filepath-dest
View
User view
Parameter
filepath-source: Source file name.
filepath-dest: Destination file name.
Description
Use the copy command to copy a file.
When the destination filename is the same as that of an existing file, the system
will ask whether to overwrite it.
Example
Display current directory information.
&lt;4500&gt;dir
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/
0
-rw595 Jul 12 2001 19:41:50
test.txt
16125952 bytes total (13975552 bytes free)
Copy the file test.txt and save it as test.bak.
&lt;4500&gt;copy test.txt test.bak
%Copy file unit1&gt;flash:/test.txt to unit1&gt;flash:/test.bak
...Done
Display current directory information.
&lt;4500&gt;dir
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/
0
-rw595 Jul 12 2001 19:41:50
1
-rw595 Jul 12 2001 19:46:50
16125952 bytes total (13974528 bytes free)
test.txt
test.bak
304
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
delete
Syntax
delete [ / unreserved ] file-path
View
User view
Parameter
/unreserved: The file will be deleted permanently if the user chooses this
parameter
file-path: Path and name of the file you want to delete.
Description
Use the delete command to delete a specified file from the storage device of the
Switch.
The deleted files are kept in the recycle bin and will not be displayed when you use
the dir command. However they will be displayed, using the dir /all command.
The files deleted by the delete command can be recovered with the undelete
command or deleted permanently from the recycle bin, using the
reset recycle-bin command.
If two files with the same name in a directory are deleted, only the latest deleted
file will be kept in the recycle bin.
Example
Delete the file flash:/test/test.txt
&lt;4500&gt;delete flash:/test/test.txt
Delete unit1&gt;flash:/test/test.txt?[Y/N]:y
%Delete file unit1&gt;flash:/test/test.txt...Done.
&lt;4500&gt;
dir
Syntax
dir [ /all ] [ file-path ]
View
User view
Parameter
/all: Display all the files (including the deleted ones).
file-path: File or directory name to be displayed. The file-path parameter
supports “*” matching. For example, using dir *.txt will display all the files with
the extension txt in the current directory.
dir without any parameters will display the file information in the current
directory.
Description
Use the dir command to display the information about the specified file or
directory in the storage device of the Switch.
File System Management Commands
305
Example
Display the information for file flash:/test/test.txt
&lt;4500&gt;dir flash:/test/test.txt
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/test/test.txt
1 -rw248
Aug 29 2000 17:49:36 text.txt
20578304 bytes total (3104544 bytes free)
Display information for directory flash:/test/
&lt;4500&gt;dir flash:/test/
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/test/
1 -rw- 248 Aug 29 2000 17:49:36 test.txt
20578304 bytes total (3104544 bytes free)
Display all of the files with names starting with &quot;t&quot; in directory flash:/test/
&lt;4500&gt;dir flash:/test/t*
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/test/t*
1 -rw- 248 Aug 29 2000 17:49:36 test.txt
20578304 bytes total (3104544 bytes free)
Display information about all of the files (including the deleted files) in directory
flash:/test/
&lt;4500&gt;dir /all flash:/test/
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/test/
1 -rw- 248
Aug 29 2000 17:49:36 text.txt
20578304 bytes total (3104544 bytes free)
Display information about all of the files (including the deleted files) with names
starting with &quot;t&quot; in flash:/test/
&lt;4500&gt;dir /all flash:/test/t*
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/test/t*
1 -rw- 248
Aug 29 2000 17:49:36 text.txt
20578304 bytes total (3104544 bytes free)
execute
Syntax
execute filename
View
System view
Parameter
filename: Name of the batch file, which is a string up to 256 characters in length,
with a suffix of “.bat”.
Description
Use the execute command to execute the specified batch file.
The batch command executes the command lines in the batch file one by one.
There should be no invisible character in the batch file. If invisible characters are
found, the batch command will quit the current execution. The forms and
contents of the commands are not restricted in the batch file.
306
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Example
To execute the batch file “test.bat” in the directory of “flash:/”, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]execute test.bat
file prompt
Syntax
file prompt { alert | quiet }
View
System view
Parameter
alert: Select confirmation on dangerous file operations.; the default value is
alert.
quiet: No confirmation prompt on file operations.
Description
Use the file prompt command to modify the prompt mode of file operations on
the Switch.
If the prompt mode is set as quiet, so no prompts are shown for file operations,
some non-recoverable operations may lead to system damage.
Example
Configure the prompt mode of file operation as quiet.
&lt;4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z
[4500]file prompt quiet
[4500]
format
Syntax
format filesystem
View
User view
Parameter
filesystem: Device name.
Description
Use the format command to format the storage device. All of the files on the
storage device will be lost and non-recoverable. Specially, configuration files will
be lost after formatting flash memory.
Example
Format flash:
&lt;4500&gt;format unit1&gt;flash:
File System Management Commands
307
All data on unit1&gt;flash: will be lost , proceed with format ? [Y/N] y
% Now begin to format flash, please wait for a while...
Format unit1&gt;flash: completed
mkdir
Syntax
mkdir directory
View
User view
Parameter
directory: Directory name.
Description
Use the mkdir command to create a directory in the specified directory on the
storage device.
The directory to be created cannot have the same name as that of any other
directory or file in the specified directory.
Example
Create the directory dd.
&lt;4500&gt;mkdir dd
Created dir unit1&gt;flash:dd
&lt;4500&gt;
more
Syntax
more file-path
View
User view
Parameter
file-path: File name.
Description
Use the more command to display the contents f of the specified file formatted as
text.
Example
Display contents of file test.txt.
&lt;4500&gt;more test.txt
AppWizard has created this test application for you.
This file contains a summary of what you will find in each of the
files that make up your test application.
Test.dsp
This file (the project file) contains information at the project
level and is used to build a single project or subproject. Other
users can share the project (.dsp) file, but they should export the
makefiles locally.
&lt;4500&gt;
308
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
move
Syntax
move filepath-source filepath-dest
View
User view
Parameter
filepath-source: Source file name.
filepath-dest: Destination file name.
Description
Use the move command to move files.
When the destination filename is the same as that of an existing file, the system
will ask whether to overwrite the existing file.
Example
Display the current directory information.
&lt;4500&gt;dir
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/
0
-rw2145718 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08
1
drw0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20
16125952 bytes total (13970432 bytes free)
&lt;4500&gt;dir unit1&gt;flash:/test/
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/test/
0
drw0 Jul 12 2001 20:23:37
1
-rw50 Jul 12 2001 20:08:32
16125952 bytes total (13970432 bytes free)
ne80.bin
test
subdir
sample.txt
Move flash:/test/sample.txt to flash:/sample.txt.
&lt;4500&gt;move flash:/test/sample.txt flash:/sample.txt
Move unit1&gt;flash:/test/sample.txt to unit1&gt;flash:/sample.txt
?[confirm]:y
% Moved file unit1&gt;flash:/test/sample.txt unit1&gt;flash:/sample.txt
Display the directory after moving a file.
&lt;4500&gt;dir
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/
0
-rw- 2145718 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08
3Com.bin
1
drw0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20
test
2
-rw50 Jul 12 2001 20:26:48
sample.txt
16125952 bytes total (13970432 bytes free)
&lt;4500&gt;dir flash:/test/
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/test/
0
drw0 Jul 12 2001 20:23:37
subdir
16125952 bytes total (13970432 bytes free)
pwd
Syntax
pwd
File System Management Commands
309
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the pwd command to display the current path.
Example
Display the current path.
&lt;4500&gt;pwd
unit1&gt;flash:
&lt;4500&gt;
rename
Syntax
rename filepath-source filepath-dest
View
User view
Parameter
filepath-source: Source file name.
filepath-dest: Destination file name.
Description
Use the rename command to rename a file.
If the destination file name is the same as an existing directory name, the rename
operation will fail. If the destination file name is the same as an existing file name,
a prompt will be displayed asking whether to overwrite the existing file.
Example
Display the current directory information.
&lt;4500&gt;dir
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:
0 drw0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20
test
1 -rw50 Jul 12 2001 20:26:48
sample.txt
16125952 bytes total (13970432 bytes free)
Rename the file sample.txt with sample.bak.
&lt;4500&gt;rename sample.txt sample.bak
Rename flash:/sample.txt to flash:/sample.bak ?[confirm]:y
% Renamed file unit1&gt;flash:/sample.txt unit1&gt;flash:/sample.bak
Display the directory after renaming sample.txt with sample.bak.
&lt;4500&gt;dir
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:
0
-rw2145718 Jul 12 2001 12:28:08
1
drw0 Jul 12 2001 19:41:20
2
-rw50 Jul 12 2001 20:29:55
ne80.bin
test
sample.bak
310
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
16125952 bytes total (13970432 bytes free)
reset recycle-bin
Syntax
reset recycle-bin file-path
View
User view
Parameter
file-path: Name of the file to be deleted.
Description
Use the reset recycle-bin command to permanently delete files from the
recycle bin.
The delete command only puts the file into the recycle bin, but the reset
recycle-bin command will delete this file permanently.
Example
Delete the file from the recycle bin.
&lt;4500&gt;reset recycle-binflash:/p1h_logic.out
Clear unit1&gt;flash:/plh_logic.out? [Y/N]:y
Clearing files from flash may take a long time. Please wait.
%Cleared file unit1&gt;flash:/~/ plh_logic.out.
rmdir
Syntax
rmdir directory
View
User view
Parameter
directory: Directory name.
Description
Use the rmdir command to delete a directory. The directory to be deleted must be
empty.
Example
Delete the directory test.
&lt;4500&gt;rmdir test
Rmdir unit1&gt;flash:/test?[Y/N]:y
Removed directory unit1&gt;flash:/test
undelete
Syntax
undelete file-path
Configuration File Management Commands
311
View
User view
Parameter
file-path: Name of the file to be recovered.
Description
Use the undelete command to recover the deleted file.
The file name to be recovered cannot be the same as an existing directory name. If
the destination file name is the same as an existing file name, a prompt will be
displayed asking whether to overwrite the existing file.
Example
Display the information for all of the files in the current directory, including the
deleted files.
&lt;4500&gt;dir /all
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/
0
-rw595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19
1
-rw50 Jul 12 2001 20:09:23
16125952 bytes total (13972480 bytes free)
test.txt
[sample.bak]
Recover the deleted file sample.bak.
&lt;4500&gt;undelete sample.bak
Undelete unit1&gt;flash:/sample.bak ?[confirm]:y
% Undeleted file unit1&gt;flash:/sample.bak
Display the information for all of the files in the current directory, including the
deleted files .
&lt;4500&gt;dir /all
Directory of unit1&gt;flash:/
0
-rw50 Jul 12 2001 20:34:19
1
-rw595 Jul 12 2001 20:13:19
16125952 bytes total (13972480 bytes free)
Configuration File
Management
Commands
display
current-configuration
sample.bak
test.txt
This section describes the commands you can use to manage the configuration
files on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
display current-configuration [ controller | interface
interface-type [ interface-number ] | configuration [ configuration
] ] [ | { begin | exclude | include } regular-expression ]
View
All views
Parameter
controller: View the configuration information of controllers.
312
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
interface: View the configuration information of interfaces.
interface-type: Type of the interface.
interface-number: Number of the interface.
configuration configuration: View specific parts of the current configuration.
The value of configuration is the key word of the configuration, such as:
acl-adv: View the configuration information of advanced ACL.
ospf: View the configuration information of OSPF.
system: View the configuration information of sysname.
timerange: View the configuration information of time range.
user-interface: View the configuration information of user-interface.
|: Filter the configuration information to be output via regular expression.
begin: Begin with the line that matches the regular expression.
exclude: Exclude lines that match the regular expression.
include: Include lines that match the regular expression.
regular-expression: Define the regular expression.
Description
Use the display current-configuration command to display the current
configuration parameters of the switch.
By default, if some running configuration parameters are the same with the
default operational parameters, they will not be displayed.
If a user needs to authenticate whether the configurations are correct after
finishing a set of configuration, the display current-configuration command
can be used to display the running parameters. Although the user has configured
some parameters, but the related functions are not effective, they are not
displayed.
When there is much configuration information to use the regular expression to
filter the output information. For specific rules about the regular expression, refer
to the Switch 4500 Configuration Guide.
Related commands: save, reset saved-configuration, display
saved-configuration.
Example
To view the running configuration parameters of the switch, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display current-configuration
local-server nas-ip 127.0.0.1 key 3com
domain default enable system
queue-scheduler wrr 1 2 3 4 5 9 13 15
ip http acl 2000
radius scheme system
Configuration File Management Commands
313
domain system
acl number 2000 match-order auto
rule 0 permit
acl number 3000
acl number 4000
rule 0 permit
qos-profile student
packet-filter inbound ip-group 2000 rule 0
---- More ----
To view the lines containing the character string “10*” in the configuration
information, enter the following. The “*” indicates that the “0” before it can
appear 0 times or multiple consecutive times.
&lt;4500&gt;display current-configuration | include 10*
local-server nas-ip 127.0.0.1 key 3com
queue-scheduler wrr 1 2 3 4 5 9 13 15
traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 rule 0 128 exceed drop
vlan 1
ip address 1.1.1.2 255.255.255.0
interface Aux1/0/0
interface Ethernet1/0/1
webcache address 1.1.1.1 mac 00e0-fc01-0101 vlan 40
traffic-limit inbound ip-group 2000 rule 0 128
traffic-redirect inbound ip-group 2000 rule 0 interface
Ethernet1/0/1
line-rate inbound 128
queue-scheduler wrr 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
interface Ethernet1/0/2
interface Ethernet1/0/3
interface Ethernet1/0/4
interface Ethernet1/0/5
interface Ethernet1/0/6
interface Ethernet1/0/7
interface Ethernet1/0/8
interface Ethernet1/0/9
interface Ethernet1/0/10
interface Ethernet1/0/11
interface Ethernet1/0/12
---- More ----
To view configuration information beginning with “user”, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display current-configuration | include ^user
user-interface aux 0 7
user-interface vty 0 4
To view the pre-positive and post-positive configuration information, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;display current-configuration configuration
local-server nas-ip 127.0.0.1 key 3com
domain default enable system
queue-scheduler wrr 1 2 3 4 5 9 13 15
ip http acl 2000
radius scheme system
domain system
acl number 2000 match-order auto
rule 0 permit
314
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
acl number 3000
acl number 4000
rule 0 permit
qos-profile student
packet-filter inbound ip-group 2000 rule 0
---- More ----
display
saved-configuration
Syntax
display saved-configuration [ unit unit-id ]
View
All views
Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of switch.
Description
Use the display saved-configuration command to view the configuration files
in the flash memory of the Switch.
If the Switch works abnormally after power on, execute the display
saved-configuration command to view the startup configuration of the Switch.
Related commands: save, reset saved-configuration, display
current-configuration.
Example
To display configuration files in flash memory of the Switch, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;display saved-configuration
local-server nas-ip 127.0.0.1 key 3com
domain default enable system
queue-scheduler wrr 1 2 3 4 5 9 13 15
ip http acl 2000
radius scheme system
domain system
acl number 2000 match-order auto
rule 0 permit
acl number 3000
acl number 4000
rule 0 permit
qos-profile student
---- More ----
display this
Syntax
display this
View
All views
Parameter
None
Configuration File Management Commands
315
Description
Use the display this command, to display the configuration of the current view.
If you need to authenticate whether the configurations are correct, after you have
finished a set of configurations under a view to use the display this command
to view the parameters.
Some effective parameters are not displayed if they are the same as the default
ones. Some ineffective parameters that were configured by the user, are not
displayed either.
Associated configuration of the interface is displayed when executing the
command in different interface views, related configuration of the protocol view is
displayed when excecuting this command in different protocol views, and all the
configurations of the protocol views are displayed when executing this command
in protocol sub-views.
For the related command, see save, reset, saved-configuration, display
current-configuration, display saved-configuration.
Example
Display the configuration parameters for the current view of the switch system.
&lt;4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]display this
return
[4500]
display startup
Syntax
display startup
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display startup command, to display the related system software and
configuration filenames used for the current and the next start-ups.
This command is used to display the following information:
■
Filename of the system software configured by the user
■
Filename of the system software actually used for this startup
■
Filename of the system software configured for the next startup
■
Configuration filename used for the current startup
■
Configuration filename configured for the next startup.
For the related command, see startup saved-configuration.
316
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Example
Display the filenames related to the current and the next enabling.
&lt;4500&gt;display startup
UNIT1:
Startup saved-configuration file:
Next startup saved-configuration file:
Bootrom-access enable state:
reset
saved-configuration
flash:/4500cfg.cfg
flash:/4500cfg.cfg
enabled
Syntax
reset saved-configuration
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset saved-configuration command to erase configuration files from
the flash memory of the Switch.
Consult with technical support personnel before executing this command.
Generally, this command is used in the following situations:
■
After upgrade of software, configuration files in flash memory may not match
the new version's software. Perform reset saved-configuration command
to erase the old configuration files.
■
When a Switch 4500 is reused on a network but in a different manner to
previously, the original configuration file should be erased and the switch
reconfigured.
If the configuration files do not exist in the flash memory when the Switch is
powered on and initialized, it will choose the default setting automatically.
Related commands: save, display current-configuration, display
saved-configuration.
Example
Erase the configuration files from the flash memory of the Switch.
&lt;4500&gt;reset saved-configuration
The saved configuration will be erased.
Are you sure?[Y/N]y
Configuration in flash memory is being cleared.
Please wait ...
..
Configuration in flash memory is cleared.
&lt;4500&gt;
Configuration File Management Commands
save
317
Syntax
save [ filename | safely ]
View
Any view
Parameter
file-name: the name of the configuration file. It is a character string of 5 to 56
characters.
safely: save the configuration file in safely mode.
Description
Use the save command, to save the current configuration files to flash memory.
After finishing a group of configurations and achieving corresponding functions,
get the current configuration files stored in the flash memory.
After a fabric is formed, if you execute the save command, every switch in the
fabric saves the current configurations to its individual configuration file.
If you do not enter the file-name parameter in this command, for the switches that
have specified the configuration file for booting by startup saved-configuration
command, the current configurations will be stored to the specified configuration
file; and for the switches that have not specified the configuration file for booting,
the current configurations will be stored to the default configuration file,
4500cfg.cfg.
Related commands: reset saved-configuration, display
current-configuration, display saved-configuration.
Example
Get the current configuration files stored in flash memory.
&lt;4500&gt;save
The configuration will be written to the device.
Are you sure?[Y/N] y
Please input the file name(*.cfg)[flash:/4500cfg.cfg]:
Now saving current configuration to the device.
Saving configuration. Please wait .....
..........
Configuration is saved to flash memory successfully.
Unit1 save configuration flash:/4500cfg.cfg successfully
&lt;4500&gt;
%Apr 2 01:22:58:141 2000 3Com CFM/3/CFM_LOG:- 1 -Unit1 save
configuration successfully.
startup bootrom-access
enable
Syntax
startup bootrom-access enable
undo startup bootrom-access enable
318
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
View
User view
Parameter
None.
Description
Use the startup bootrom-access enable command to enable the BOOTROM
access function.
Use the undo startup bootrom-access enable command to disable the
BOOTROM access functi
on.
Example
To enable BOOTROM access function, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;startup bootrom-access enable
startup saved
configuration
Syntax
startup saved-configuration cfgfile
View
User view
Parameter
cfgfile: The name of the configuration file. It is a string with a length of 5 to 56
characters.
Description
Use the startup saved-configuration command to configure the configuration
file used for enabling the system for the next time.
The configuration file must have &quot;.cfg&quot; as its extension name and must be saved
under the root directory of the Flash.
For the related command, please see display startup
Example
Configure the configuration file for the next start-up.
&lt;4500&gt;startup saved-configuration 4500cfg.cfg
Please wait............Done!
&lt;4500&gt;
%Apr 2 01:24:57:661 2000 3Com CFM/3/CFM_LOG:- 1 -Unit1 set the
configuration successfully.
FTP Server
Configuration
Commands
This section describes how to use the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) configuration
commands on your Switch 4500.
FTP Server Configuration Commands
display ftp-server
319
Syntax
display ftp-server
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ftp-server command to display the parameters of the current
FTP Server. You can perform this command to verify the configuration after setting
FTP parameters.
Example
Display the configuration of FTP Server parameters.
&lt;4500&gt;display ftp-server
Ftp server is running
Max user number
1
User count
0
Timeout(minute)
30
&lt;4500&gt;
display ftp-user
Syntax
display ftp-user
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ftp-user command to display the parameters of current FTP
user. You can perform this command to examine the configuration after setting
FTP parameters.
Example
Show the configuration of FTP user parameters.
&lt;4500&gt;display ftp-user
% No ftp user
&lt;4500&gt;
ftp server
Syntax
ftp server enable
undo ftp server
View
System view
320
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter
enable: Start FTP Server.
Description
■
Use the ftp server command to start FTP Server and enable FTP user logon.
■
Use the undo ftp server command to close FTP Server and disable FTP user
logon.
By default, FTP Server is shut down.
Perform this command to easily start or shut down FTP Server, preventing the
Switch from being attacked by an unknown user.
Example
Shut down FTP Server.
&lt;4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]undo ftp server
% Close FTP server
[4500]
ftp timeout
Syntax
ftp timeout minute
undo ftp timeout
View
System view
Parameter
minute: Connection timeouts (measured in minutes), ranging from 1 to 35791;
The default connection timeout time is 30 minutes.
Description
■
Use the ftp timeout command to configure connection timeout interval.
■
Use the undo ftp timeout command to restore the default connection
timeout interval.
After a user logs on to an FTP Server and has established connection, if the
connection is interrupted or cut abnormally by the user, FTP Server will still hold
the connection. The connection timeout can avoid this problem. If the FTP server
has no command interaction with a client for a specific period of time, it considers
the connection to have failed and disconnects the client.
Example
Set the connection timeout to 36 minutes.
&lt;4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]ftp timeout 36
[4500]
FTP Server Configuration Commands
local-user
321
Syntax
local-user user_name
undo local-user { user_name | all [ service-type { telnet | ftp |
lan-access | ssh | terminal }]}
View
System view
Parameter
user_name: Enter a local user name, up to 80 characters in length, excluding &quot;/&quot;,
&quot;:&quot;, &quot;*&quot;, &quot;?&quot;, &quot;&lt;&quot; and &quot;&gt;&quot;. (The @ character can be used once in a user_name;
that part of the user name which precedes the @ symbol must not be more than
55 characters in length. The user-name is case-insensitive, so that UserA is the
same as usera.
all: Specifies all users.
service-type: Specifies the service type, which can be one of the following:
telnet: Specifies the user type of Telnet.
ftp: Specifies the user type of FTP.
lan-access: Specifies the user type of LAN access, which mainly refers to
Ethernet-accessing users.
ssh:Specifies that the user type is SSH.
terminal: Specifies that the user type is terminal which refers to users who use
the terminal service (login from the Console, AUX or Asyn port).
Description
Use the local-user command to configure a local user and enter the local user
view.
Use the undo local-user command to cancel a specified local user, a type of
user or all users. By default, a local user is not configured.
Related commands: display local-user, service-type.
Example
To add a local user named 3Com1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user 3Com1
New local user added
[4500-luser-3Com1]
password
Syntax
password {simple | cipher } password
undo password
322
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
View
Local user view
Parameters
simple: Specifies that passwords are displayed in simple text.
cipher: Specifies that passwords are displayed in cipher text.
password: Enter a password, up to 16 characters in length for simple text, and up
to 24 characters in length for cipher text.
Description
■
Use the password command to configure the password display mode for local
users.
■
Use the undo password command to cancel the specified password display
mode.
The settings in the local-user password-display-mode cipher-force,
command override the settings in the password command.
Related command: display local-user
Example
To set the user 3Com1 to display the password 20030422 in simple text, enter the
following:
&lt;4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user 3Com1
New local user added
[4500-luser-3Com1]password simple 20030422
service-type
Syntax
service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory directory ] | lan-access | { ssh |
telnet | terminal }* [ level level ] }
undo service-type { ftp [ ftp-directory ] | lan-access | { ssh |
telnet | terminal }* [ level level ] }
View
Local user view
Parameters
telnet: Specifies the user’s service type as Telnet.
ssh: Specifies the user type as SSH.
level level: Specifies the level of Telnet, SSH or terminal users. The argument
level is an integer in the range of 0 to 3 and defaults to 1.
FTP Client Commands
323
ftp: Specifies the user’s service type as FTP.
ftp-directory directory: Enter an FTP directory, up to 64 characters in length.
Optional.
lan-access: Specifies user type to lan-access, which mainly refers to Ethernet
accessing users, 802.1x supplicants for example.
terminal: Authorizes the user to use the terminal service (login from the Console,
AUX or Asyn port).
Description
Use the service-type command to configure a service type for a particular user.
Use the undo service-type command to cancel the currently configured service
type for a particular user.
If configuring service types: SSH, Telnet or Terminal:
When you configure a new service type for a user, the system adds the new
service type to the existing one.
You can set user level when you configure a service type. If you set multiple service
types and specify the user levels, then only the last configured user level is valid.
Different service type does not have its individual user level.
You can use either level or service-type command to specify the level for a
local user. If both of these two commands are used, the latest configuration will
take effect.
Example
To configure a service type of LAN access for the user 3Com1, enter the following:
&lt;4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user-3Com1
New local user added.
[4500-luser-3Com1]service-type lan-access
FTP Client Commands
ascii
This section describes the File Transfer Protocol (FTP) Client commands on your
Switch 4500.
Syntax
ascii
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the ascii command to configure data transmission mode as ASCII mode.
324
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
By default, the file transmission mode is ASCII mode.
Perform this command if the user needs to change the file transmission mode to
default mode.
Example
Configure to transmit data in the ASCII mode.
&lt;4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]ascii
200 Type set to A.
[ftp]
binary
Syntax
binary
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the binary command to configure file transmission type as binary mode.
Example
Configure to transmit data in the binary mode.
&lt;4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]binary
200 Type set to I.
[ftp]
bye
Syntax
bye
View
FTP Client view
FTP Client Commands
325
Parameter
None
Description
Use the bye command to disconnect with the remote FTP Server and return to
user view.
After performing this command, you can terminate the control connection and
data connection with the remote FTP Server.
Example
Terminate connection with the remote FTP Server and return to user view.
&lt;4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]bye
221 Server closing.
&lt;4500&gt;
cd
Syntax
cd pathname
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
pathname: Path name.
Description
Use the cd command to change the working path on the remote FTP Server.
This command is used to access another directory on FTP Server. Note that the
user can only access the directories authorized by the FTP server.
Example
Change the working path to flash:/temp
&lt;4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
326
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
[ftp]cd flash:/temp
250 CWD command successful.
[ftp]
cdup
Syntax
cdup
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the cdup command to change working path to the upper level directory.
This command is used to exit the current directory and return to the upper level
directory.
Example
Change working path to the upper level directory
&lt;4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]cdup
501 Change to no authenticated directory.
[ftp]
close
Syntax
close
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the close command to disconnect FTP client side from FTP server side without
exiting FTP client side view so that you terminate the control connection and data
connection with the remote FTP server at the same time.
Example
Terminate connection with the remote FTP Server and stay in FTP Client view.
&lt;4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
FTP Client Commands
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]close
221 Server closing.
[ftp]
delete
Syntax
delete remotefile
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
remotefile: File name.
Description
Use the delete command to delete the specified file.
This command is used to delete a file.
Example
Delete the file temp.c
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]delete temp.c
250 DELE command successful
[ftp]
dir
Syntax
dir [ filename [ localfile ]]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
filename: File name to be queried.
localfile: Saved local file name.
327
328
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Description
Use the dir command to query a specified file.
If no parameter of this command is specified, then all the files in the directory will
be displayed.
Example
Query the file temp.c and save the results in the file temp1.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]dir temp.c temp1
200 Port command okay.
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for temp.c.
....226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 63 byte(s) received in 6.700 second(s) 9.00 byte(s)/sec.
[ftp]
disconnect
Syntax
disconnect
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Using the disconnect command, subscribers can disconnect FTP client side from
FTP server side without exiting FTP client side view.
This command terminates the control connection and data connection with the
remote FTP Server at the same time.
Example
Terminate connection with the remote FTP Server and stay in FTP Client view.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]disconnect
FTP Client Commands
329
221 Server closing
[ftp]
ftp
Syntax
ftp [ ipaddress [ port ] ]
View
User view
Parameter
ipaddress: IP address of the remote FTP Server.
port: Port number of remote FTP Server.
Description
Use the ftp command to establish control connection with the remote FTP Server
and enter FTP Client view.
Example
Connect to FTP Server at the IP address 1.1.1.1
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in.
[ftp]
get
Syntax
get remotefile [ localfile ]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
localfile: Local file name.
remotefile: Name of a file on the remote FTP Server.
Description
Use the get command to download a remote file and save it locally.
If no local file name is specified, it will be considered the same as that on the
remote FTP Server.
Example
Download the file temp1.c and saves it as temp.c
330
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]get temp1.c temp.c
200 Port command okay.
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for temp1.c.
..226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 1709 byte(s) received in 2.176 second(s) 0.00 byte(s)/sec.
[ftp]
lcd
Syntax
lcd
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the lcd command to display local working path of FTP Client.
Example
Show local working path.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]lcd
% Local directory now flash:/temp
[ftp]
ls
Syntax
ls [ remotefile [ localfile ]]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
remotefile: Remote file to be queried.
FTP Client Commands
331
localfile: Saved local file name.
Description
Use the ls command to query a specified file.
If no parameter is specified, all the files will be shown.
Example
Query file temp.c
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]ls temp.c
200 Port command okay.
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for temp.c.
temp.c
226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 8 byte(s) received in 0.133 second(s) 60.00byte(s)/sec.
[ftp]
mkdir
Syntax
mkdir pathname
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
pathname: Directory name.
Description
Use the mkdir command to create a directory on the remote FTP Server.
User can perform this operation as long as the remote FTP server has authorized
the operation.
Example
Create the directory flash:/lanswitch on the remote FTP Server.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]mkdir flash:/lanswitch
332
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
257 &quot;flash:/lanswitch&quot; new directory created.
[ftp]
passive
Syntax
passive
undo passive
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the passive command to set the data transmission mode to be passive
mode. Use the undo passive command to set the data transmission mode to be
active mode.
By default, the data transmission mode is passive mode
Example
Set the data transmission to passive mode.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]passive
% Passive is on
[ftp]
put
Syntax
put localfile [ remotefile ]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
localfile: Local file name.
remotefile: File name on the remote FTP Server.
Description
Use the put command to upload a local file to the remote FTP Server.
If the user does not specify the filename on the remote server, the system will
consider it the same as the local file name by default.
FTP Client Commands
333
Example
Upload the local file temp.c to the remote FTP Server and saves it as temp1.c.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]put temp.c temp1.c
200 Port command okay.
150 Opening ASCII mode data connection for temp1.c.
226 Transfer complete.
FTP: 1709 byte(s) sent in 0.316 second(s) 5.00Kbyte(s)/sec.
[ftp]
pwd
Syntax
pwd
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the pwd command to display the current directory on the remote FTP Server.
Example
Show the current directory on the remote FTP Server.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]pwd
257 &quot;flash:/temp&quot; is current directory.
[ftp]
quit
Syntax
quit
View
FTP Client view
334
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter
None
Description
Use the quit command to terminate the connection with the remote FTP Server
and return to user view.
Example
Terminate connection with the remote FTP Server and return to user view.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]quit
221 server closing
&lt;SW5500&gt;
remotehelp
Syntax
remotehelp [ protocol-command ]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
protocol-command: FTP protocol command.
Description
Use the remotehelp command to display help information about the FTP protocol
command.
Example
Show the syntax of the protocol command user.
&lt;SW5500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]remotehelp user
214 Syntax: USER &lt;sp&gt; &lt;username&gt;
[ftp]
FTP Client Commands
rmdir
Syntax
rmdir pathname
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
pathname: Directory name of remote FTP Server.
Description
Use the rmdir command to delete the specified directory from FTP Server.
Example
Delete the directory flash:/temp1 from FTP Server.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]rmdir flash:/temp1
200 RMD command successful.
[ftp]
user
Syntax
user username [ password ]
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
username: Logon username.
password: Logon password.
Description
Use the user command to register an FTP user.
Example
Log in the FTP Server with username tom and password hello.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
335
336
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
[ftp]user tom hello
331 Password required for tom.
230 User logged in.
[ftp]
verbose
Syntax
verbose
undo verbose
View
FTP Client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the verbose command to enable verbose. Use the undo verbose command
to disable verbose.
By default, verbose is disabled.
Example
Enable verbose.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ftp 1.1.1.1
Trying ...
Press CTRL+K to abort
Connected.
220 FTP service ready.
User(none):hello
331 Password required for hello.
Password:
230 User logged in
[ftp]verbose
% Verbose is on
[ftp]
TFTP Configuration
Commands
tftp get
This section describes the Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) Commands on your
Switch 4500.
Syntax
tftp tftpserver get source-file [ dest-file ]
View
User view
Parameter
tftp-server: IP address or host name of the TFTP server. The name of the TFTP
server should be a string ranging from 1 to 20 characters.
source-file: Specify the filename of the source file on the TFTP server.
MAC Address Table Management Commands
337
dest-file: Specify the filename of the destination file which will be saved on the
switch.
Description
Use the tftp get command to download a file from the specified directory of the
TFTP server and save it with a different name on the switch.
Related command: tftp put.
Example
Download the file LANSwitch.app from the TFTP server at 1.1.3.214 and save it
as vxWorks.app on the local switch.
&lt;SW4500&gt;tftp 1.1.3.214 get LANSwitch.app vxWorks.app
tftp put
Syntax
tftp tftp-server put source-file [ dest-file ]
View
User view
Parameter
tftp-server: IP address or hostname of the TFTP server. The name of the TFTP
server should be a string ranging from 1 to 20 characters.
source-file: Specify the filename of the source file which is saved on the switch.
dest-file: Specify the filename of the destination file which will be saved on the
TFTP server.
Description
Use the tftp put command to upload a file from the switch to the specified
directory on the TFTP server and save it with a new name.
Related commands: tftp get.
Example
&lt;SW5500&gt;tftp 1.1.3.214 put sw5500cfg.txt temp.txt
MAC Address Table
Management
Commands
display mac-address
This section describes the commands you can use to manage the MAC Address
Table on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
display mac-address [ mac-addr [ vlan vlan-id ] | [ static | dynamic
| blackhole ] [ interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num } ] [ vlan vlan-id ] [ count ] ]
View
All views
338
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter
mac-addr: Specify the MAC address.
vlan-id: Specify the VLAN ID.
static: Static table entry, lost after resetting switch.
dynamic: Dynamic table entry, which will be aged.
blackhole: Blackhole table entry, the packet with this destination MAC address
will be discarded.
interface-type: Specify the interface type.
interface-num: Specify the interface number.
interface-name: Specify the interface name.
For details about the interface-type, interface-num and interface-name
parameters, refer to the Port Configuration in this manual.
count: the display information will only contain the number of MAC addresses in
the MAC address table if the user enters this parameter when using this
command.
Description
Use the display mac-address command to display MAC address table
information.
When managing the Layer-2 addresses of the switch, the administrator can
perform this command to view such information as the Layer-2 address table,
address status (static or dynamic), Ethernet port of the MAC address, VLAN of the
address, and system address aging time.
For the related commands, see mac-address, mac-address timer.
Example
Show the information of the entry with MAC address at 00e0-fc01-0101
&lt;SW4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]display mac-address 00e0-fc01-0101
MAC ADDR
VLAN ID
STATE
PORT INDEX
00e0-fc01-0101 1
Learned
Ethernet1/0/1
display mac-address
aging-time
Syntax
display mac-address aging-time
View
All views
Parameter
None
AGING TIME(s)
300
MAC Address Table Management Commands
339
Description
Use the display mac-address aging-time command to display the aging time
of the dynamic entry in the MAC address table.
For the related commands, see mac-address, mac-address timer, display
mac-address.
Examples
Display the aging time of the dynamic entry in the MAC address table.
&lt;SW4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]display mac-address aging-time
mac-address aging-time: 300s
The above information indicates that the aging time of the dynamic entry in the
MAC address is 300s.
&lt;SW4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500] display mac-address aging-time
mac-address aging-time: no-aging
The above information indicates that the dynamic entry in the MAC address table
is no-aging.
mac-address
Syntax
mac-address { static | dynamic | blackhole } mac-address interface {
interface-name | interface-type interface-num } vlan vlan-id
undo mac-address [ { static | dynamic | blackhole } mac-address
interface { interface-name | interface-type interface-num ] vlan
vlan-id ]
View
System view
Parameter
static: Static table entry, lost after resetting switch.
dynamic: Dynamic table entry, which will be aged.
blackhole: Blackhole table entry, the packet with this destination MAC address
will be discarded.
mac-addr: Specify the MAC address.
interface-type: Specify the interface type.
interface-num: Specify the interface number.
interface-name: Specify the interface name.
vlan-id: Specify the VLAN ID.
340
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Description
Use the mac-address command to add/modify the MAC address table entry. Use
the undo mac-address command to delete MAC address table entry
If the input address has been existing in the address table, the original entry will be
modified. That is, replace the interface pointed by this address with the new
interface and the entry attribute with the new attribute (dynamic entry and static
entry).
All the (MAC unicast) addresses on a certain interface can be deleted. User can
choose to delete any of the following addresses: address learned by system
automatically, dynamic address configured by user, static address configured by
user.
For the related commands, see display mac-address.
Example
Configure the port number corresponding to the MAC address 00e0-fc01-0101 as
Ethernet1/0/1 in the address table, and sets this entry as static entry.
&lt;SW4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]mac-address static 00e0-fc01-0101 interface Ethernet 1/0/1
vlan 2
mac-address
max-mac-count
Syntax
mac-address max-mac-count count
undo mac-address max-mac-count
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
count: Enter a value in the range 0 to 32768 to specify how many MAC
addresses a port can learn. 0 means that the port is not allowed to learn MAC
addresses.
Description
Use the mac-address max-mac-count command to configure the maximum
number of MAC addresses that can be learned by a specified Ethernet port. The
port stops learning MAC addresses when the specified limit is reached.
Use the undo mac-address-table max-mac-count command to cancel the
maximum limit on the number of MAC addresses learned by an Ethernet port. This
is the default. If you set no maximum limit, the MAC address table controls the
number of MAC addresses a port can learn.
Related commands: mac-address, mac-address timer
MAC Address Table Management Commands
341
Examples
To configure the port “Ethernet 1/0/3” to learn at most 600 MAC addresses, enter
the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/3
[SW4500-Ethernet1/0/3]mac-address max-mac-count 600
To cancel the maximum limit on the number of MAC addresses learned by the
port “Ethernet1/0/3”, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/3
[SW4500-Ethernet1/0/3]undo mac-address max-mac-count
mac-address timer
Syntax
mac-address timer { aging age | no-aging }
undo mac-address timer aging
View
System view
Parameter
aging age: Specifies the aging time (measured in seconds) of the Layer-2
dynamic address table entry, ranging from 10 to 1000000; by default, the aging
time is 300 seconds.
no-aging: No aging time.
Description
Use the mac-address timer command to configure the aging time of the Layer-2
dynamic address table entry. Use the undo mac-address timer command to
restore the default value.
Setting the aging time on the switch to be too long or too short will cause the
switch to broadcast data packets without MAC addresses, this will affect the
operational performance of the switch.
If the aging time is set too long, the switch will store out-of-date MAC address
tables. This will consume MAC address table resources and the switch will not be
able to update MAC address table according to the network change.
If aging time is set too short, the switch may delete valid MAC address table
entries.
Example
Configure the entry aging time of Layer-2 dynamic address table to be 500
seconds.
&lt;SW4500&gt;sys
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]mac-address timer aging 500
342
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Device Management
Commands
boot boot-loader
This section describes the device management commands available on your Switch
4500.
Syntax
boot boot-loader file-path
View
User view
Parameter
file-path: Path and name of APP file.
Description
Use the boot boot-loader command to specify the app file used for booting next
time.
You can not specify the app file stored in another Unit as the boot application of a
Unit.
Example
Specify the APP application used for booting next time.
&lt;SW4500&gt;boot boot-loader unit1&gt;flash:/PLATV100R002B09D002.APP The
specified file will be booted next time!
&lt;SW4500&gt;
boot bootrom
Syntax
boot bootrom file-path
View
User view
Parameter
file-path: File path and file name of Bootrom.
Description
Use the boot bootrom command to upgrade bootrom.
Example
Upgrade bootrom of the switch.
&lt;SW4500&gt;boot bootrom PLATV100R002B09D002.btm
display boot-loader
Syntax
display boot-loader [unit unit-id]
View
All views
Device Management Commands
343
Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of the switch.
Description
Use the display boot-loader command to display APP file used for this boot
and the next boot.
Example
&lt;SW4500&gt;display boot-loader
The app to boot at the next time is: flash:/platform.app
The app to boot of board 0 at this time is:
flash:/PLATV100R002B09D002.APP
display cpu
Syntax
display cpu [ unit unit-id ]
View
All views.
Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of the switch.
Description
Use the display cpu command to display CPU occupancy.
Example
To display CPU occupancy, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;display cpu
The information displays in the following format:
Unit 1
Board 0 CPU busy
11% in last 5
12% in last 1
14% in last 5
status:
seconds
minute
minutes
Table 32 Display information
display device
Field
Description
Board 0 CPU busy status
The busy status of the Switch
11% in last 5 seconds
The CPU occupancy rate is 11% at last 5 seconds
12% in last 1 minute
The CPU occupancy rate is 12% at last 1 minute
14% in last 5 minutes
The CPU occupancy rate is 14% at last 5 minutes
Syntax
display device [ unit unit-id ]
344
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
View
All views
Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of the switch.
Description
Use the display device command to display the module type and working status
information of a card, including physical card number, physical daughter card
number, number of ports, hardware version number, FPGA version number,
version number of BOOTROM software, application version number, address
learning mode, interface card type and interface card type description, etc.
Example
Show device information.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display device
Unit 1
SlotNo SubSNo PortNum PCBVer FPGAVer CPLDVer BootRomVer AddrLM Type State
0
0
24
REV.A NULL
000
200
IVLMAIN Norma
display fan
Syntax
display fan [ unit unit-id ]
View
All views
Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of the switch
Description
Use the display fan command to display the working state of the built-in fans.
Example
Display the working state of the fans.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display fan
Unit 1
Fan 1 State: Normal
The above information indicates that the fan works normally.
display memory
Syntax
display memory [ unit unit-id ]
View
All views
Device Management Commands
345
Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of the switch
Description
Use the display memory command to display the current system memory status.
Example
To display the current memory status, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;display memory
The information displays in the following format:
Unit 1
System Available Memory(bytes): 31608192
System Used Memory(bytes): 14723652
Used Rate: 46%
Table 33 Display information
display power
Field
Description
System Available Memory (bytes)
The Total Memory of switch, unit in byte
System Used Memory (bytes)
The Total used Memory of switch, unit in byte
Used Rate
The memory used rate
Syntax
display power [ unit unit-id ][ power-ID ]
View
All views
Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of the switch
power-ID: Power ID.
Description
Use the display power command to display the working state of the built-in
power supply.
Example
Show power state.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display power 1
Unit1
power 1 State: Normal
display schedule reboot
Syntax
display schedule reboot
View
Any view
346
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display schedule reboot command to check the configuration of
related parameters of the switch schedule reboot terminal service.
Related command: reboot, schedule reboot at, schedule reboot delay,
undo schedule reboot.
Example
Display the configuration of the schedule reboot terminal service parameters of
the current switch.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display schedule reboot
System will reboot at 03:41 2000/04/02 (in 1 hours and 27 minutes).
reboot
Syntax
reboot [ unit unit-id ]
View
User view
Parameter
unit unit-id: Specify the Unit ID of the switch
Description
Use the reboot command to reset the Switch when failure occurs.
Example
Reboots the Switch.
&lt;SW4500&gt;reboot
This will reboot device. Continue? [Y/N]
schedule reboot at
Syntax
schedule reboot at hh:mm [ yyyy/mm/dd ]
undo schedule reboot
View
User view
Parameter
hh:mm: Reboot time of the switch, in the format of &quot;hour: minute&quot; The hh ranges
from 0 to 23, and the mm ranges from 0 to 59.
yyyy/mm/dd: Reboot date of the switch, in the format of &quot;year/month/day. The
yyyy ranges from 2000 to 2099, the mm ranges from 1 to 12, and the value of dd
is related to the specific month.
Device Management Commands
347
Description
Use the schedule reboot at command to enable the timing reboot function of
the switch and set the specific reboot time and date.
Use the undo schedule reboot command to disable the timing reboot function.
By default, the timing reboot switch function is disabled.
If the schedule reboot at command sets specified date parameters, which
represents a data in the future, the switch will be restarted in specified time, with
error not more than 1 minute.
If no specified date parameters are configured, two cases are involved: If the
configured time is after the current time, the switch will be restarted at the time
point of that day; if the configured time is before the current time, the switch will
be restarted at the time point of the next day.
It should be noted that the configured date should not exceed the current date
more than 30 days. In addition, after the command is configured, the system will
prompt you to input confirmation information. Only after the &quot;Y&quot; or the &quot;y&quot; is
entered can the configuration be valid. If there is related configuration before, it
will be covered directly.
After the schedule reboot at command is configured and the system time is
adjusted by the clock command, the former configured schedule reboot at
parameter will go invalid.
For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot delay, display
schedule reboot.
Example
Set the switch to be restarted at 22:00 that night (the current time is 15:50).
&lt;SW4500&gt;schedule reboot at 22:00
Reboot system at 22:00:00 2000/04/02 (in 19 hours and 47 minutes)
confirm? [Y/N]:y
%Apr 2 02:12:20:72 2000 3Com CMD/5/REBOOT:- 1 aux0: schedule reboot parameters at 02:12:20 2000/04/02. And system
will reboot at 22:00 2000/04/02.
&lt;SW4500&gt;
schedule reboot delay
Syntax
schedule reboot delay { hhh:mm | mmm }
undo schedule reboot
View
User view
Parameter
hhh:mm: Waiting time for rebooting a switch, in the format of &quot;hour: minute&quot; The
hhh ranges from 0 to 720, and the mm ranges from 0 to 59.
348
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
mmm: Waiting delay for rebooting a switch, in the format of &quot;absolute minutes&quot; .
Ranging from 0 to 43200,
Description
Use the schedule reboot delay command to enable the timing reboot switch
function and set the waiting time. Use the undo schedule reboot command to
disable the timing reboot function.
By default, the timing reboot switch function is disabled.
Two formats can be used to set the waiting delay of timing reboot switch, namely
the format of &quot;hour: minute&quot; and the format of &quot;absolute minutes&quot;. But the total
minutes should be no more than 30&times;24&times;60 minutes, or 30 days.
After this command is configured, the system will prompt you to input
confirmation information. Only after the &quot;Y&quot; or the &quot;y&quot; is entered can the
configuration be valid. If there is related configuration before, it will be covered
directly.
After the schedule reboot at command is configured, and the system time is
adjusted by the clock command, the original schedule reboot at parameter will
become invalid.
For the related command, see reboot, schedule reboot at, undo schedule
reboot, display schedule reboot
Example
Configure the switch to be restarted after 88 minutes (the current time is 21:32).
&lt;SW4500&gt;schedule reboot delay 88
Reboot system at 03:41 2000/04/02 (in 1 hours and 28 minutes)
Confirm? [Y/N]:y
%Apr 2 02:13:10:09 2000 3Com CMD/5/REBOOT:- 1 aux0: schedule reboot parameters at 02:13:10 2000/04/02. And system
will reboot at 03:41 2000/04/02.
&lt;SW5500&gt;
Basic System Configuration and Management Commands
Basic System
Configuration and
Management
Commands
clock datetime
349
This section describes the basic system configuration and system management
commands available on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
clock datetime time date
View
User view
Parameters
time : Enter the current time in HH:MM:SS format . HH can be in the range 0 to
23. MM and SS can be in the range 0 to 59.
date : Enter the current year in MM/DD/YYYY or YYYY/MM/DD format . YYYY can be
in the range 2000 to 2099. MM can be in the range 1 to 12. DD can be in the range
1 to 31.
Description
Use the clock datetime command to set the current system time and date. The
default is 23:55:52, 2000/4/1.
Related command: display clock
Example
To set the system time and date to 09:30:00, 2004/1/1, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;clock datetime 09:30:00 2004/01/01
clock summer-time
Syntax
clock summer-time zone_name { one-off | repeating } start_time
start_date end_time end_date offset_time
undo clock summer-time
View
User view
Parameters
zone_name: Enter the name of the summer time zone, up to 32 characters in
length.
one-off: Specifies that the summer time is set for the selected year.
repeating: Specifies that the summer time is set for every year, starting from the
selected year.
start_time: Enter the start time of summer time, in the format HH:MM:SS.
start_date: Enter the start date of summer time, in the format YYYY/MM/DD.
350
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
end_time: Enter the end time of summer time, in the format HH:MM:SS.
end_date: Enter the end date of summer time, in the format YYYY/MM/DD.
offset_time: Enter the offset time, that is the amount of time added, in the
format HH:MM:SS.
Description
Use the clock summer-time command to set the name, start date and time, and
end date and time of summer time.
Use the undo clock summer-time command to cancel the currently configured
summer time.
Use the display clock command to check the summer time settings.
Related command: clock timezone
Example
To set the summer time for zone 2 to start at 06:00:00 on 08/06/2002, and end at
06:00:00 on 01/09/2002, with a time added of one hour, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;clock summer-time z2 one-off 06:00:00 2002/06/08 06:00:00
2002/09/01 01:00:00
To set the summer time for zone 2 to start at 06:00:00 on 08/06, and end at
06:00:00 on 01/09 in each year starting in 2002, with a time added of one hour,
enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;clock summer-time z2 repeating 06:00:00 2002/06/08 06:00:00
2002/09/01 01:00:00
clock timezone
Syntax
clock timezone zone_name { add | minus } HH:MM:SS
undo clock timezone
View
User view
Parameter
zone_name: Enter the name of the time zone, up to 32 characters in length.
add: Specifies that time is ahead of UTC.
minus: Specifies that time is behind UTC.
HH:MM:SS: Enter the time difference between the time zone and UTC.
Description
Use the clock timezone command to set local time zone information.
System Status and System Information Display Commands
351
Use the undo clock timezone command to return to the default, which is
Universal Time Coordinated (UTC).
Use the display clock command to check the summer time settings.
Related command: clock summer-time
Example
To set the local time zone as zone 5, and configure the local time to be 5 hours
ahead of UTC, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;clock timezone z5 add 05:00:00
sysname
Syntax
sysname sysname
undo sysname
View
System view
Parameter
sysname: Specify the hostname with a character string with the length ranging
from1 to 30 characters.
Description
Use the sysname command to set the system name of the Switch.
Using undo sysname command, you can restore the default value of the system
name.
By default, the system name of the Switch is SW4500.
Changing the system name of the Switch will affect the prompt of the command
line interface. For example, the system name of the Switch is SW4500, and the
prompt in user view is &lt;SW4500&gt;.
Example
Set the hostname of the Switch to be LANSwitch.
&lt;5500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]sysname LANSwitch
[LANSwitch]
System Status and
System Information
Display Commands
display clock
This sections describes the system status and system information display
commands on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
display clock
352
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display clock command to obtain information about system data and
time from the terminal display..
For the related commands, see clock.
Example
View the current system date and clock.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display clock
15:50:45 UTC Mon 01/01/2001
display config-agent
Syntax
display config-agent unit-id unit-id
View
Any view
Parameter
unit-id: Unit ID of current switch, in the range of 1 to 8.
Description
Use the display config-agent unit-id command to view statistics of the
configuration agent.
Configuration agent is one of the XRN features. You can log into one switch of
the fabric to configure and manage the fabric by the configuration agent. The
functions of the configuration agent include;
■
Distributing configuration commands to the right destination switches or
processing modules based on the resolution result of the commands input.
■
Sending output information of the commands from the switch you have
logged into to your terminal.
■
Supporting simultaneous configuration of multiple users.
You cannot configure the configuration agent, but can view the statistics of the
configuration agent.
Example
To display statistics of the configuration agent on switch 1, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;display config-agent unit-id 1
Config-agent statistic information on Unit1
Message type
Successful
Config message recv:
0
Failed on
0
System Status and System Information Display Commands
Config message send:
Notification message recv:
Notification message send:
Information message recv:
Information message send:
display debugging
0
0
0
0
0
353
0
0
0
0
0
Syntax
display debugging [ interface { interface-name | interface-type
interface-num } ] [ module-name ]
View
All views
Parameter
interface-name: Specify the Ethernet port name.
interface-type: Specify the Ethernet port type.
interface-num: Specify the Ethernet port number.
module-name: Specify the module name.
Description
Use the display debugging command to display the enabled debugging process.
Show all the enabled debugging when there is no parameter.
For the related commands, see debugging.
Example
Show all the enabled debugging.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display debugging
IP packet debugging switch is on.
display version
Syntax
display version
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display version command to view the software version, issue date and
the basic hardware configuration information.
Example
Display the information about the system version.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display version
354
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
System Debug
Commands
debugging
This section describes the system debugging options, and the system diagnostics
information that can be displayed on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
debugging module-name [ debugging-option ]
undo debugging { all | module-name [ debugging-option ] }
View
User view
Parameter
all: Disable all the debugging.
timeout interval: The interval during which the debugging command is valid.
The interval value can range from 1 to 1440 minutes.
module-name: Specify the module name.
debugging-option: Debugging option.
Description
Use the debugging command to enable the system debugging. Use the undo
debugging command to disable the system debugging.
By default, all the debugging processes are disabled.
The Switch provides various kinds of debugging functions for technical support
personnel and experienced maintenance staff to troubleshoot the network.
Enabling the debugging will generate a large amount of debugging information
and decrease the system efficiency. If the debugging all command is used, it will
adversely affect the operational performance of the network. Use the undo
debugging all command to disable all debugging.
By default, if multiple devices form a fabric, the debugging information of the
master is broadcasted within the fabric and the debugging information of the
slave is only displayed on the slave device. You can view the debugging
information including that of the master and the device in which the login port
resides.
You can enable the logging, debugging and trap information switches within the
fabric by executing the info-center switch-on all command. Synchronization
is a process that each switch sends its own information to the other switches in
the fabric, and meantime receives information from others to update local
information, ensuring the consistency of logging, debugging and trap information
in a fabric.
After the synchronization of the whole fabric, a great deal of terminal display is
generated. You are recommended not to enable the information synchronization
switch of the whole fabric. If you enabled the information synchronization switch,
Network Connection Test Commands
355
after the synchronization information statistics and detection, you must execute
the undo info-center switch-on command to disable the switch in time.
For the related commands, see display debugging.
Example
Enable IP Packet debugging.
&lt;SW4500&gt;debugging ip packet
IP packet debugging switch is on.
display
diagnostic-information
Syntax
display diagnostic-information
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display diagnostic-information command to view the configuration
information on all currently running modules. This information helps you to
monitor and troubleshoot your Switch 4500.
Example
To display system information on all currently running modules, enter the
following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;display diagnostic-information
Network Connection
Test Commands
end-station polling
ip-address
This section describes the network connection test commands available on your
Switch 4500.
Syntax
end-station polling ip-address ip-address
undo end-station polling ip-address ip-address
View
System view
Parameter
ip-address: Specify the IP address.
Description
Use the end-station polling ip-address command to configure the IP address
requiring periodic testing.
356
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Use the undo end-station polling ip-address command to delete the IP
address requiring periodic testing.
The switch can ping an IP address every one minute to test if it is reachable. Three
PING packets can be sent at most for every IP address in every testing with a time
interval of five seconds. If the switch cannot ping successfully the IP address after
the three PING packets, it assumes that the IP address is unreachable.
You can configure up to 50 IP addresses by using the command repeatedly.
Related command: ping, tracert.
Example
Configure 202.38.160.244 requiring periodical testing.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]end-station polling ip-address 202.38.160.244
ping
Syntax
ping [ -a ip-address ] [-c count ] [ -d ] [-h tll ][ -i
{interface-type interface-num | interface-name } ][ ip ] [ -n ] [ - p
pattern ] [ -q ] [ -r ] [ -s packetsize ] [ -t timeout ] [-tos tos ]
[ -v ] string
View
User view
Parameter
-a ip-address: Specify the source IP address to transmit ICMP ECHO-REQUEST.
-c: count specify how many times the ICMP ECHO-REQUEST packet will be
transmitted, ranging from 1 to 4294967295.
-d: Configure the socket to be in DEBUGGING mode.
-h ttl: Configure TTL value for echo requests to be sent, range from 1 to 255
-i: Configure to choose packet sent on the interface.
interface-type: Specify the interface type.
interface-num: Specify the interface number.
interface-name: Specify the interface name.
ip: Choose IP ICMP packet.
-n: Configure to take the host parameter as IP address without domain name
resolution.
-p: pattern is the hexadecimal padding of ICMP ECHO-REQUEST, e.g. -p ff pads
the packet completely with ff.
Network Connection Test Commands
357
-q: Configure not to display any other detailed information except statistics.
-r: Record route.
-s packetsize: Specify the length of ECHO-REQUEST (excluding IP and ICMP
packet header) in bytes.
-t timeout: Maximum waiting time after sending the ECHO-REQUEST (measured
in ms).
-tos tos: Specify TOS value for echo requests to be sent, range from 0 to 255.
-v: Show other received ICMP packets (non ECHO-RESPONSE).
string: Destination host domain name or IP address.
Description
Use the ping command to check the IP network connection and the reachability
of the host.
By default, when the parameters are not specified:
■
the ECHO-REQUEST message will be sent for 5 times,
■
socket is not in DEBUGGING mode,
■
the TTL value for echo requests is 255,.
■
host will be treated as IP address first. If it is not an IP address, perform domain
name resolution,
■
the default padding operation starts from 0x01 and ends on 0x09
(progressively), then performs again,
■
show all the information including statistics,
■
routes are not recorded,
■
send ECHO-REQUEST according to route selection,
■
default length of ECHO-REQUEST is 56 bytes.,
■
default timeout of ECHO-RESPONSE is 2000ms,
■
do not display other ICMP packets (non ECHO-RESPONSE),
■
the TOS value of echo requests is 0.
The ping command sends ICMP ECHO-REQUEST message to the destination. If
the network to the destination works well, then the destination host will send
ICMP ECHO-REPLY to the source host after receiving ICMP ECHO-REQUEST.
Perform the ping command to troubleshoot the network connection and line
quality. The output information includes:
■
Responses to each of the ECHO-REQUEST messages. If the response message is
not received until timeout, output &quot;Request time out&quot;. Or display response
message bytes, packet sequence number, TTL and response time.
358
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
■
The final statistics, including number of sent packets, number of response
packets received, percentage of non-response packets and
minimal/maximum/average value of response time.
If the network transmission rate is too low to increase the response message
timeout.
For the related commands, see tracert.
Example
Check whether the host 202.38.160.244 is reachable.
&lt;SW4500&gt;ping 202.38.160.244
ping 202.38.160.244 : 56 data bytes
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56
Reply from 202.38.160.244 : bytes=56
--202.38.160.244 ping statistics-5 packets transmitted
5 packets received
0% packet loss
round-trip min/avg/max = 1/2/3 ms
tracert
sequence=1
sequence=2
sequence=3
sequence=4
sequence=5
ttl=255
ttl=255
ttl=255
ttl=255
ttl=255
time
time
time
time
time
=
=
=
=
=
1ms
2ms
1ms
3ms
2ms
Syntax
tracert [[ -a source-ip] -f first-TTL ] [ -m max-TTL ] [ -p port ] [
-q nqueries ] [ -w timeout ] string
View
All views
Parameter
-a source-IP: Configure the source IP address used by tracert command.
-f: Configure to verify the -f switch, first-TTL specifies an initial TTL, ranging
from 0 to the maximum TTL.
-m: Configure to verify the -m switch, max-TTL specifies a maximum TTL larger
than the initial TTL.
-p: Configure to verify the -p switch, port is an integer host port number.
Generally, user need not modify this option.
-q: Configure to verify the -q switch, nqueries is an integer specifying the
number of query packets sent, larger than 0.
-w: Configure to verify the -w switch, timeout is an integer specifying IP packet
timeout in seconds, larger than 0.
string: IP address of the destination host or the hostname of the remote system.
Network Connection Test Commands
359
Description
Use the tracert command to check the reachability of network connection and
troubleshoot the network. User can test gateways passed by the packets
transmitted from the host to the destination.
By default, when the parameters are not specified,
first-TTL is 1,
max-TTL is 30,
port is 33434,
nqueries is 3 and
timeout is 5s.
The tracert command sends a packet with TTL 1, and the first hop will send an
ICMP error message back to indicate this packet cannot be transmitted (because
of TTL timeout). Then this packet will be sent again with TTL 2, and the second
hop will indicate a TTL timeout error. Perform this operation repeatedly till
reaching the destination. These processes are operated to record the source
address of each ICMP TTL timeout so as to provide a path to the destination for an
IP packet.
After the ping command finds some error on the network, perform tracert to
locate the error.
The output of the tracert command includes IP address of all the gateways to
the destination. If a certain gateway times out, output &quot;***&quot;.
Example
Test the gateways passed by the packets to the destination host at 18.26.0.115.
&lt;SW4500&gt;tracert 18.26.0.115
tracert to allspice.lcs.mit.edu (18.26.0.115), 30 hops max
1 helios.ee.lbl.gov (128.3.112.1) 0 ms 0 ms 0 ms
2 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 19 ms 19 ms 19 ms
3 lilac-dmc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.216.1) 39 ms 19 ms 19 ms
4 ccngw-ner-cc.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.136.23) 19 ms 39 ms 39 ms
5 ccn-nerif22.Berkeley.EDU (128.32.168.22) 20 ms 39 ms 39 ms
6 128.32.197.4 (128.32.197.4) 59 ms 119 ms 39 ms
7 131.119.2.5 (131.119.2.5) 59 ms 59 ms 39 ms
8 129.140.70.13 (129.140.70.13) 80 ms 79 ms 99 ms
9 129.140.71.6 (129.140.71.6) 139 ms 139 ms 159 ms
10 129.140.81.7 (129.140.81.7) 199 ms 180 ms 300 ms
11 129.140.72.17 (129.140.72.17) 300 ms 239 ms 239 ms
12 * * *
13 128.121.54.72 (128.121.54.72) 259 ms 499 ms 279 ms
14 * * *
15 * * *
16 * * *
17 * * *
18 ALLSPICE.LCS.MIT.EDU (18.26.0.115) 339 ms 279 ms 279 ms
360
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Log Commands
display channel
This section displays the logging options available on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
display channel [ channel-number | channel-name ]
View
All views
Parameter
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, the system has
ten channels.
channel-name: Specify the channel name, the name can be console, monitor,
loghost, trapbuffer, logbuffer, snmpagent, channel6, channel7,
channel8, channel9. Where console is channel 0, monitor is channel 1, loghost
is channel 2, trapbuffer is channel 3, logbuffer is channel 4 and snmpagent is
channel 5.
Description
Use the display channel command to display the details about the information
channel.
Without a parameter, the display channel command shows the configurations
of all the channels.
Example
Show details about the information channel 0.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display channel 0
channel number:0, channel name:console
MODU_ID NAME
ffff0000 default
display info-center
ENABLE
Y
LOG_LEVEL ENABLE
warning
Y
TRAP_LEVEL
debugging
ENABLE DEBUG_LEVEL
Y
debugging
Syntax
display info-center
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display info-center command to display the configuration of system
log and the information recorded in the memory buffer.
If the information in the current log/trap buffer is less than the specified sizeval,
display the actual log/trap information.
Log Commands
361
For the related commands, see info-center enable, info-center loghost,
info-center logbuffer, info-center console channel, info-center
monitor channel.
Example
Show the system log information.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display info-center
Information Center: enabled
Log host:
173.168.1.10, channel number:2, channel name:loghost,
language:english , host facility local:7
Console:
channel number:0, channel name:console
Monitor:
channel number:1, channel name:monitor
SNMP Agent:
channel number:5, channel name:snmpagent
Log buffer:
enabled, max buffer size:1024, current buffer size:256
current messages:6, channel number:4, channel name:logbuffer
dropped messages:0, overwrote messages:0
Trap buffer:
enabled, max buffer size:1024, current buffer size:256
current messages:0, channel number:3, channel
name:trapbuffer
dropped messages:0, overwrote messages:0
Information timestamp setting:
log - date, trap - date, debug - boot
XRN SWITCH OF this Device: LOG = disable; TRAP = disable; DEBUG =
enable
info-center channel
name
Syntax
info-center channel channel-number name channel-name
undo info-center channel channel-number
View
System view
Parameter
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Specify the channel name with a character string not exceeding
30 characters, excluding &quot;-&quot;, &quot;/&quot; or &quot;\&quot;.
Description
Use the info-center channel name command to rename a channel specified by
the channel-number as channel-name. . Using the undo info-center channel
command, you can restore the channel name.
Note that the channel name cannot be duplicated.
362
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Example
Rename channel 0 as execconsole.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center channel 0 name execconsole
[SW4500]
info-center console
channel
Syntax
info-center console channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center console channel
View
System view
Parameter
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten
channels.
channel-name: : Specify the channel name. The name can be channel6,
channel7, channel8, channel9, console, logbuffer, loghost, monitor,
snmpagent, trapbuffer.
Description
Use the info-center console channel command to configure the channel
through which the log information is output to the console.
By default, the Switch 4500 does not output log information to the console.
This command takes effect only after system logging is started.
For the related commands, see info-center enable, display info-center.
Example
Configure to output log information to the console through channel 0.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center console channel 0
[SW4500]
info-center enable
Syntax
info-center enable
undo info-center enable
View
System view
Log Commands
363
Parameter
None
Description
Use the info-center enable command to enable the system log function. Use
the undo info-center enable command to disable system log function.
By default, system log function is enabled.
Only after the system log function is enabled can the system output the log
information to the info-center loghost and console, etc.
For the related commands, see info-center loghost, info-center logbuffer,
info-center console channel, info-center monitor channel, display
info-center.
Example
Enable the system log function.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center enable
% Information center is enabled
[SW4500]
info-center logbuffer
Syntax
info-center logbuffer [ channel { channel-number | channel-name } |
size buffersize ]
undo info-center logbuffer [ channel | size ]
View
System view
Parameter
channel: Configure the channel to output information to buffer.
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Specify the channel name. The name can be channel6,
channel7, channel8, channel9, console, logbuffer, loghost, monitor,
snmpagent, trapbuffer.
size: Configure the size of buffer.
buffersize: Size of buffer (number of messages which can be kept); The default
size of the buffer is 512.
Description
Use the info-center logbuffer command to configure to output information
to the memory buffer. Use the undo info-center logbuffer command to
cancel the information output to buffer
364
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
This command takes effect only after the system logging is enabled.
For the related commands, see info-center enable, display info-center.
Example
Send log information to buffer and sets the size of buffer as 50.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center logbuffer 50
[SW4500]
info-center loghost
Syntax
info-center loghost host-ip-addr [ channel { channel-number |
channel-name } | facility local-number | language { chinese | english
} ]
undo info-center loghost host-ip-addr
View
System view
Parameter
host-ip-addr: IP address of info-center loghost.
channel: Configure information channel of the info-center loghost.
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, system has ten
channels.
channel-name: Specify the channel name. The name can be channel6,
channel7, channel8, channel9, console, logbuffer, loghost, monitor,
snmpagent, trapbuffer.
facility: Configure the recording tool of info-center loghost.
local-number: Record tool of info-center loghost, ranging from local0 to local7.
language: Set the logging language.
chinese, english: Language used in log file.
Description
Use the info-center loghost command to set the IP address of the info-center
loghost to send information to it. Use the undo info-center loghost command
to cancel output to info-center loghost.
By default, switches do not output information to info-center loghost.
This command takes effect only after the system logging is enabled.
For the related commands, see info-center enable, display info-center.
Log Commands
365
Example
Configure to send log information to the UNIX workstation at 202.38.160.1.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center loghost 202.38.160.1
[SW4500]
info-center loghost
source
syntax
info-center loghost source interface-name
undo info-center source
View
System view
Parameter
source interface-name: Sets the source address of packets sent to the loghost
as the address of the interface specified by interface-name. Normally, the
interface is a VLAN interface.
Description
Use the info-center loghost source command to set the source address of
packets sent to the loghost as the address of the interface specified by the
interface-name parameter.
Use the undo info-center loghost source command to cancel the setting of
the source address of the packets sent to the loghost.
This command takes effect only after the system logging is enabled.
Related commands: info-center enable, display info-center.
Example
Set the source address of the packets sent to the loghost as the address of the
VLAN interface 1.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center loghost source vlan-interface 1
[SW4500]
info-center monitor
channel
Syntax
info-center monitor channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center monitor channel
View
System view
Parameter
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, the system has
ten channels.
366
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
channel-name: Specify the channel name. The name can be channel6,
channel7, channel8, channel9, console, logbuffer, loghost, monitor,
snmpagent, trapbuffer.
Description
Use the info-center monitor channel command to set the channel to output
the log information to the user terminal.
Use undo info-center monitor channel command to restore the channel to
output the log information to the user terminal to the default value.
By default, switches do not output log information to user terminal.
This command takes effect only after system logging is started.
For the related commands, see info-center enable, display info-center.
Example
Configure channel 0 to output log information to user terminal.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center monitor channel 0
[SW4500]
info-center snmp
channel
Syntax
info-center snmp channel { channel-number | channel-name }
undo info-center snmp channel
View
System view
Parameter
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, the system has
ten channels. By default, channel 5 is used.
channel-name: Specify the channel name. The name can be channel6,
channel7, channel8, channel9, console, logbuffer, loghost, monitor,
snmpagent, trapbuffer.
Description
Use the info-center snmp channel command to specify new channel for
transmitting the SNMP information.
Use undo info-center snmp channel command to restore the channel for
transmitting the SNMP information to default value.
Related commands: display snmp.
Example
Configure channel 6 as the SNMP information channel.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
Log Commands
367
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center snmp channel 6
[SW4500]
info-center source
Syntax
info-center source { modu-name | default } channel { channel-number |
channel-name } [ debug { level severity | state state }* | log {
level severity | state state }* | trap { level severity | state state
} ] *
undo info-center source { modu-name | default } channel {
channel-number | channel-name }
View
System view
Parameter
modu-name: Module name. See Table 34.
default: All the modules.
log: Log information.
trap: Trap information.
debugging: Debugging information.
level: Level.
severity: Information level, do not output information below this level. By
default, the log information level is warnings, the trap information level is
debugging, the debugging information level is debugging.
Information at different levels is as follows:
emergencies: Level 1 information, which cannot be used by the system.
alerts: Level 2 information, to be reacted immediately.
critical: Level 3 information, critical information.
errors: Level 4 information, error information.
warnings: level 5 information, warning information.
notifications: Level 6 information, showed normally and important.
informational: Level 7 information, notice to be recorded.
debugging: Level 8 information, generated during the debugging progress.
If you only specify the level for one or two of the three types of information, the
level(s) of the unspecified type(s) return to the default. For example, if you only
define the level of the log information, then the levels of the trap and debugging
information return to the defaults.
channel-number: Channel number to be set.
368
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
channel-name: Channel name to be set. The name can be channel6, channel7,
channel8, channel9, console, logbuffer, loghost, monitor, snmpagent,
trapbuffer.
state: Set the state of the information.
state: Specify the state as on or off.
Table 34 Module names in logging information
Module name
Description
8021X
802.1X module
ACL
Access control list module
AM
Access management module
ARP
Address resolution protocol module
CFAX
Configuration proxy module
CFG
Configuration management platform module
CFM
Configuration file management module
CMD
Command line module
COMMONSY
Common system MIB module
DEV
Device management module
DHCC
DHCP Client module
DHCP
Dynamic host configuration protocol module
DRV
Driver module
DRV_MNT
Driver maintenance module
ESP
End-station polling module
ETH
Ethernet module
FIB
Forwarding module
FTM
Fabric topology management module
FTMCMD
Fabric topology management command line
module
FTPS
FTP server module
HA
High availability module
HTTPD
HTTP server module
IFNET
Interface management module
IGSP
IGMP snooping module
IP
IP module
IPC
Inter-process communication module
IPMC
IP multicast module
L2INF
Interface management module
LACL
LANswitch ACL module
LQOS
LANswitch QoS module
LS
Local server module
MPM
Multicast port management module
NTP
Network time protocol module
PPRDT
Protocol packet redirection module
PTVL
Driver port, VLAN (Port &amp; VLAN) module
Log Commands
369
Table 34 Module names in logging information
Module name
Description
QACL
QoS/ACL module
QOSF
Qos profile module
RDS
Radius module
RM
Routing management
RMON
Remote monitor module
RSA
Revest, shamir and adleman encryption system
RTPRO
Routing protocol
SHELL
User interface
SNMP
Simple network management protocol
SOCKET
Socket
SSH
Secure shell module
STP
Spanning tree protocol module
SYSMIB
System MIB module
TELNET
Telnet module
UDPH
UDP helper module
VFS
Virtual file system module
VTY
Virtual type terminal module
WCN
Web management module
XM
XModem module
Description
Use the info-center source command to add/delete a record to the information
channel. Use the undo info-center source command to delete the contents of
the information channel.
For example, for the filter of IP module log output, you can configure to output
the logs at a level higher than warnings to the log host and output those higher
than informational to the log buffer. You can also configure to output the trap
information on the IP module to a specified trap host, etc.
The channels for filtering in all the directions are specified by this configuration
command. All the information will be sent to the corresponding directions
through the specified channels. You can configure the channels in the output
direction, channel filter information, filtering and redirecting of all kinds of
information.
At present, the system distributes an information channel in each output direction
by default, shown as follows:
Table 35 Information Channel in Each Output Direction by Default
Output direction
Information channel name
Console
console
Monitor
monitor
Info-center loghost
loghost
Log buffer
logbuffer
370
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Table 35 Information Channel in Each Output Direction by Default
Trap buffer
trapbuffer
snmp
snmpagent
In addition, each information channel has a default record with the module name
“all” and module number as 0xffff0000. However, for different information
channel, the default log, trap and debugging settings in the records may be
different with one another. Use default configuration record if a module does not
have any specific configuration record in the channel.
Example
Configure to enable the log information of STP module in SNMP channel and
allows the output of the information with a level no higher than emergencies.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center source stp channel snmpagent log level
emergencies
[SW4500]
info-center switch-on
Syntax
info-center switch-on { unit-id | master | all } [ debugging |
logging | trapping ]*
undo info-center switch-on { unit-id | master | all } [ debugging |
logging | trapping ]*
View
System view
Parameter
unit-id: Unit ID of switch.
master: Master switch of Fabric.
all: All switches of Fabric.
debugging: Debugging information.
logging: Log information.
trapping: Trap information.
Description
Use the info-center switch-on command to turn on the information
synchronization switch of the specified switch.
Use the undo info-center switch-on command to turn off the information
synchronization switch of the specified switch.
By default, the debugging information synchronization switch on master unit is
enabled, log information and trap information switches on master unit are
disabled, all information synchronization switches on slave unit are disabled.
Log Commands
371
After the forming of a Fabric by switches which support the XRN, the log,
debugging and trap information among the switches is synchronous. The
synchronization process is as follows: each switch sends its own information to
other switches in the Fabric and meantime receives the information from others,
and then the switch updates the local information to ensure the information
coincidence within the Fabric.
The switch provides command line to turn on/off the synchronization switch in
every switch. If the synchronization switch of a switch is turned off, it does not
send information to other switches but still receives information from others.
Example
To turn on the trapping information synchronization switch of the unit 2, enter
the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center switch-on 2 trapping
[SW4500]
info-center timestamp
Syntax
info-center timestamp { log | trap | debugging } { boot | date | none
}
undo info-center timestamp { log | trap | debugging }
View
System view
Parameter
log: Log information.
trap: Trap information.
debugging: Debugging information.
boot: Time elapsing after system starts. Format: xxxxxx.yyyyyy, xxxxxx is the high
32 bits of the elapsed time (in milliseconds) after system starts, and yyyyyy is the
low 32 bits.
date: Current system date and time. It shows as yyyy/mm/dd-hh:mm:ss in
Chinese environment and mm/dd/yyyy-hh:mm:ss in Western language
environment.
None: No timestamp format.
Description
Use the info-center timestamp command to configure the timestamp output
format in debugging/trap information. Use the undo info-center timestamp
command to disable the output of timestamp field.
By default, datetime stamp is used.
372
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Example
Configure the debugging information timestamp format as boot.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center timestamp debugging boot
[SW4500]
info-center trapbuffer
Syntax
info-center trapbuffer [ size buffersize ] [ channel { channel-number
| channel-name } ]
undo info-center trapbuffer [ channel | size ]
View
System view
Parameter
size: Configure the size of the trap buffer.
buffersize: Size of trap buffer (numbers of messages).
channel: Configure the channel to output information to trap buffer.
channel-number: Channel number, ranging from 0 to 9, that is, the system has
ten channels.
channel-name: Specify the channel name.
Description
Use the info-center trapbuffer command to output information to the trap
buffer. Use the undo info-center trapbuffer command to cancel output
information to trap buffer.
By default, output information is transmitted to trap buffer and size of trap buffer
is 256.
This command takes effect only after the system logging is enabled.
Related commands: info-center enable, display info-center.
Example
Send information to the trap buffer and sets the size of buffer as 30.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]info-center trapbuffer size 30
[SW4500]
reset logbuffer
Syntax
reset logbuffer
Log Commands
373
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset logbuffer command to clear information in log buffer.
Example
Clear information in log buffer.
&lt;SW4500&gt;reset logbuffer
reset trapbuffer
Syntax
reset trapbuffer
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the reset trapbuffer command to clear information in trap buffer.
Example
Clear information in trap buffer.
&lt;SW4500&gt;reset trapbuffer
terminal debugging
Syntax
terminal debugging
undo terminal debugging
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the terminal debugging command to configure to display the debugging
information on the terminal. Use the undo terminal debugging command to
configure not to display the debugging information on the terminal.
By default, the displaying function is disabled.
Related commands: debugging.
374
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Example
Enable the terminal display debugging.
&lt;SW4500&gt;terminal debugging
% Current terminal debugging is on
&lt;SW4500&gt;
terminal logging
Syntax
terminal logging
undo terminal logging
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the terminal logging command to start logging the information displayed
on the terminal. Use the undo terminal logging command to disable terminal
log information display.
By default, this function is enabled.
Example
Disable the terminal log display.
&lt;SW4500&gt;undo terminal logging
% Current terminal logging is off
&lt;SW4500&gt;
terminal monitor
Syntax
terminal monitor
undo terminal monitor
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the terminal monitor command to enable the log debugging/log/trap on
the terminal monitor. Use the undo terminal monitor command to disable
these functions.
By default, enable these functions for the console user and disable them for the
terminal user.
SNMP Configuration Commands
375
This command only takes effect on the current terminal where the commands are
input. The debugging/log/trap information can be output to the current terminal,
beginning in user view. When the terminal monitor is shut down, no
debugging/log/trap information will be displayed in local terminal, which is equals
to having performed the undo terminal debugging, undo terminal logging,
undo terminal trapping commands. When the terminal monitor is enabled to use
terminal debugging / undo terminal debugging, terminal logging /
terminal logging and terminal trapping / undo terminal trapping
respectively to enable or disable the corresponding functions.
Example
Disable the terminal monitor.
&lt;SW4500&gt;undo terminal monitor
% Current terminal monitor is off
&lt;SW4500&gt;
terminal trapping
Syntax
terminal trapping
undo terminal trapping
View
User view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the terminal trapping command to enable terminal trap information
display. Use the undo terminal trapping command to disable this function.
By default, this function is enabled.
Example
Enable trap information display.
&lt;SW4500&gt;terminal trapping
% Current terminal trapping is on
&lt;SW4500&gt;
SNMP Configuration
Commands
display snmp-agent
This section displays the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP)
commands available on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
display snmp-agent { local-engineid | remote-engineid }
View
All views
376
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter
local-engineid: local engine ID.
remote-engineid: remote engine ID.
Description
Use the display snmp-agent engineid command to view the engine ID of
current device.
SNMP engine is the core of SNMP entity. It performs the function of sending,
receiving and authenticating SNMP message, extracting PDU, packet
encapsulation and the communication with SNMP application, etc.
Example
Display the engine ID of current device.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display snmp-agent engineid
Local SNMP engineID: 00000009020000000C025808
display snmp-agent
community
Syntax
display snmp-agent community [ read | write ]
View
All views
Parameter
read: display read-only community information.
write: display read-write community information.
Description
Use the display snmp-agent community command to display the currently
configured community names.
Example
Display the currently configured community names.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display snmp-agent community
community name:public
group name:public
storage-type: nonVolatile
community name:tom
group name:3Com
storage-type: nonVolatile
display snmp-agent
group
Syntax
display snmp-agent group [ group-name ]
View
All views
SNMP Configuration Commands
377
Parameter
groupname: Group name, ranging from 1 to 32 bytes.
Description
Use the display snmp-agent group command to display group name, safe
mode, state of various views and storage modes.
Example
Display SNMP group name and safe mode.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display snmp-agent group
groupname: public
Security model: v2c noAuthnoPriv
readview:v1default
writeview: no writeview specified
notifyview: *tv.FFFFFFFF
storage-type: volatile
The following table describes the output fields.
Table 36 Output description of the display snmp-agent group command
display snmp-agent
mib-view
Field
Description
groupname
SNMP Group name of the user
Security model
The security model adopted by SNMP
readview
Read-only MIB view name corresponding to that group
writeview
Writable MIB view corresponding to that group
notifyview
The name of the notify MIB view corresponding to that group
storage-type
Storage type
Syntax
display snmp-agent mib-view [ exclude | include | viewname mib-view ]
View
All views
Parameter
exclude: Display the SNMP mib view excluded.
include: Display the SNMP mib view included.
viewname: Display the SNMP mib view according to the mib view name.
mib-view: Specify the mib view name.
Description
The display snmp-agent mib-view command is used to view the MIB view
configuration information of the Switch.
Example
Display the information about the currently configured MIB view.
378
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
&lt;SW4500&gt;display snmp-agent mib-view
View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:snmpUsmMIB
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:excluded
View status:active
View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:snmpVacmMIB
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:excluded
View status:active
View name:ViewDefault
MIB Subtree:snmpModules.18
Subtree mask:
Storage-type: nonVolatile
View Type:excluded
View status:active
If the SNMP Agent is disabled, &quot;Snmp Agent disabled&quot; will be displayed after you
execute the above display commands.
display snmp-agent
statistics
Syntax
display snmp-agent statistics
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display snmp-agent statistics command to view the current state of
SNMP communication.
This command provides a counter for SNMP operations.
Example
Display the current state of SNMP communication.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display snmp-agent statistics
0 Messages delivered to the SNMP entity
0 Messages which were for an unsupported version
0 Messages which used an unknown community name
0 Messages which represented an illegal operation for the community
supplied
0 ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of decoding
0 MIB objects retrieved successfully
0 MIB objects altered successfully
0 Get-request PDUs accepted and processed
0 Get-next PDUs accepted and processed
0 Set-request PDUs accepted and processed
SNMP Configuration Commands
3
0
0
0
0
0
3
379
Messages passed from the SNMP entity
SNMP PDUs which had a tooBig error (Maximum packet size 1500)
SNMP PDUs which had a noSuchName error
SNMP PDUs which had a badValue error
SNMP PDUs which had a general error
Response PDUs accepted and processed
Trap PDUs accepted and processed
The following table describes the output fields.
Table 37 Output description of the display snmp-agent statistics command
Field
Description
0 Messages delivered to the SNMP entity Total number of the input SNMP packets
0 Messages which were for an
unsupported version
Number of packets with version information error
0 Messages which used an unknown
community name
Number of packets with community name error
0 Messages which represented an illegal Number of packets with authority error
operation for the community supplied
corresponding to the community name
0 ASN.1 or BER errors in the process of
decoding
Number of SNMP packets with encoding error
0 MIB objects retrieved successfully
Number of variables requested by NMS
0 MIB objects altered successfully
The number of variables set by NMS
0 Get-request PDUs accepted and
processed
Number of the received packets requested by get
0 Get-next PDUs accepted and
processed
Number of the received packets requested by
get-next
0 Set-request PDUs accepted and
processed
Number of the received packets requested by set
3 Messages passed from the SNMP
entity
Total number of the output SNMP packets
0 SNMP PDUs which had a tooBig error
(Maximum packet size 1500)
Number SNMP packet with too_big error
0 SNMP PDUs which had a noSuchName Number of the packets requesting nonexistent MIB
error
objects
0 SNMP PDUs which had a badValue
error
Number of SNMP packets with Bad_values error
0 SNMP PDUs which had a general error Number of SNMP packets with General_errors
0 Response PDUs accepted and
processed
Number of the response packets sent
3 Trap PDUs accepted and processed
Number of the sent Trap packets
380
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
display snmp-agent
sys-info
Syntax
display snmp-agent sys-info [ contact | location | version ]*
View
All views
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display snmp-agent sys-info command to view the system
information of SNMP configuration. The information includes the character string
sysContact (system contact), the character string describing the system location,
the version information about the running SNMP in the system.
Example
Display the character string sysContact (system contact).
&lt;SW4500&gt;display snmp-agent sys-info contact
The contact person for this managed node:
Mr.Smith -Tel:3306
Display the system location.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display snmp-agent sys-info location
The physical location of this node:
Boston USA
Display the version information of running SNMP
&lt;SW4500&gt;display snmp-agent sys-info version
SNMP version running in the system:
SNMPv3
display snmp-agent
usm-user
Syntax
display snmp-agent usm-user [ engineid engineid | group groupname |
username username ]
View
All views
Parameter
engineid: display user information with specified engine ID.
username: display user information with specified user name.
groupname: display user information of specified group.
Description
Use the display snmp-agent usm-user command to view information of all the
SNMP usernames in the group username list.
SNMP Configuration Commands
381
Example
Display the information of all the current users.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display snmp-agent usm-user
User name: hello
Group name: hellogroup
Engine ID: 800007DB00E0FC0039006877
Storage-type: nonVolatile
UserStatus: active
Acl:2000
display snmp-proxy unit
Syntax
display snmp-proxy unit unit-id
View
Any view
Parameter
unit-id:Unit ID of the switch.
Description
Using display snmp-proxy unit command, you can view statistics information
of SNMP proxy.
Example
View statistics information of SNMP proxy on unit 1.
&lt;SW4500&gt; display snmp-proxy unit 1
Number of GetReq msgs received :0
Number of GetReq msgs sent :0
Number of GetNextReq msgs Received :0
Number of GetNextReq msgs sent :0
Number of GetResp msgs received :0
Number of GetResp msgs sent :0
Number of GetNextResp msgs received :0
Number of GetNextResp msgs sent :0
Number of SnmpMibSync msgs received :0
Number of SnmpMibSync msgs sent :0
Number of SnmpMibGetCntrReq msgs received :0
Number of SnmpMibGetCntrReq msgs sent :0
Number of SnmpMibGetCntrResp msgs received :0
Number of SnmpMibGetCntrResp msgs sent :0
enable snmp trap
Syntax
enable snmp trap updown
undo enable snmp trap updown
382
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
None.
Description
Use the enable snmp trap updown command to enable the current port to
transmit the LINK UP and LINK DOWN trap information.
Use the undo enable snmp trap updown command to disable the current port to
transmit the LINK UP and LINK DOWN trap information.
Example
Enable the current port Ethernet1/0/1 to transmit the LINK UP and LINK DOWN
trap information.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]interface Ethernet 1/0/1
[SW4500-Ethernet1/0/1]enable snmp trap updown
[SW4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
snmp-agent community
Syntax
snmp-agent community { read | write } community-name [ mib-view
view-name ] [ acl acl-list ] ]
undo snmp-agent community community-name
View
System view
Parameter
read: Indicate that MIB object can only be read.
write: Indicate that MIB object can be read and written.
community-name: Community name character string.
view-name: MIB view name.
acl acl-list: set access control list for specified community.
Description
Use the snmp-agent community command to set the community access name and
enable access to SNMP. Use the undo snmp-agent community command to
cancel the settings of community access name.
Example
Configure community name as comaccess and with read-only access permission.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
SNMP Configuration Commands
383
[SW4500]snmp-agent community read comaccess
[SW4500]
Configure community name as mgr and read-write access permission.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent community write mgr
[SW4500]
Delete the community name comaccess.
[SW4500]undo snmp-agent community comaccess
snmp-agent group
Syntax
snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group_name [ read-view read-view ] [
write-view write-view ] [ notify-view notify-view ] [ acl acl-list ]
undo snmp-agent group { v1 | v2c } group-name
snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ] [
read-view read-view ] [ write-view write-view ] [ notify-view
notify-view ] [ acl acl-list ]
undo snmp-agent group v3 group-name [ authentication | privacy ]
View
System view
Parameter
group-name: Enter a group name, up to 32 characters in length.
authentication: Specifies that the packet is authenticated without encryption.
privacy: Specifies that the packet is authenticated and encrypted.
read-view: Configures read-only view settings.
read-view: Enter a read-only view name, up to 32 characters in length.
write-view: Configures read and write view settings.
write-view: Enter a read and write view name, up to 32 characters in length.
notify-view: Configures notify view settings.
notify-view: Enter a notify view name, up to 32 characters in length.
acl acl-list: Enter the access control list for this group name.
v3: Configures SNMP version 3.
Description
Use the snmp-agent group command to configure a new SNMP group, that is,
map an SNMP user to SNMP view.
Use the undo snmp-agent group command to delete a specified SNMP group.
384
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
3Com recommends that you do not use the notify-view parameter when
configuring an SNMP group, for the following reasons:
■
The snmp-agent target-host command automatically generates a
notify-view for a user, and adds it to the corresponding group.
■
Any change of the SNMP group notify-view will affect all the users related to
this group.
Example
To create an SNMP group named 3Com, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent group v3 3Com
[SW4500]
snmp-agent
local-engineid
Syntax
snmp-agent local-engineid engineid
undo snmp-agent local-engineid
View
System view
Parameter
local-engineid: Specify an engineID for the local SNMPv3 entity
engineid: Specify the engine ID with a character string, only composed of
hexadecimal numbers between 5 and 32 inclusive. The default value is &quot;Enterprise
Number + device information&quot;.
Description
Use the snmp-agent local-engineid command to configure a name for a local
or remote SNMP engine on the Switch. Use the undo snmp-agent
local-engineid command to restore the default setting of engine ID.
Device information is determined according to different products. It can be IP
address, MAC address or user defined text. However, you must use numbers in
hexadecimal form.
Example
Configure the ID of a local or remote device as 1234512345.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
&lt;SW4500&gt;snmp-agent local-engineid 1234512345
&lt;SW4500&gt;
snmp-agent mib-view
Syntax
snmp-agent mib-view { included | excluded } view-name oid-tree
undo snmp-agent mib-view view-name
SNMP Configuration Commands
385
View
System view
Parameter
included: Include this MIB subtree.
excluded: Exclude this MIB subtree.
view-name: Specify the view name, with a character string, ranging from 1 to 32
characters.
oid-tree: MIB object subtree. It can be a character string of the variable OID, or a
variable name, ranging from 1 to 255 characters.
Description
Use the snmp-agent mib-view command to create or update the view
information. Use the undo snmp-agent mib-view command to delete the view
information
By default, the view name is v1default. OID is 1.3.6.1.
Both the character string of OID and the node name can be input as parameter.
Example
Create a view that consists of all the objects of MIB-II.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent mib-view included mib2 1.3.6.1.3
[SW4500]
snmp-agent packet
max-size
Syntax
snmp-agent packet max-size byte-count
undo snmp-agent packet max-size
View
System view
Parameter
byte-count: Specify the size of SNMP packet (measured in bytes), ranging from
484 to 17940; the default size is 1500 bytes.
Description
Use the snmp-agent packet max-size command to configure the size of SNMP
packet that the Agent can send/receive. Use the undo snmp-agent packet
max-size command to restore the default size of SNMP packet.
The sizes of the SNMP packets received/sent by the Agent are different in different
network environments.
386
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Example
Set the size of SNMP packet to 1042 bytes.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent packet max-size 1042
[SW4500]
snmp-agent sys-info
Syntax
snmp-agent sys-info { contact sysContact | location sysLocation |
version { { v1 | v2c | v3 } * | all } }
undo snmp-agent sys-info [ { contact | location }* | version { { v1 |
v2c | v3 }* | all } ]
View
System view
Parameter
sysContact: Specify a character string describing the system maintenance
contact (in bytes), with a length ranging from 1 to 255. The default contact
information is &quot;3Com Marlborough USA&quot;.
sysLocation: Specify a character string to describe the system location. By
default, the character string is &quot;Marlborough USA&quot;.
version: version of running SNMP.
v1: SNMP v1.
v2c: SNMP v2C.
v3: SNMP v3.
all: all SNMP version (includes SNMP v1, SNMP v2C, SNMP v3).
Description
Use the snmp-agent sys-info command to set system information such as
geographical location of the device, contact information for system maintenance
and version information of running SNMP. Use the undo snmp-agent sys-info
location command to restore the default value.
Example
Set system location as Building 3/Room 214.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent sys-info location Building 3/Room 214
[SW4500]
snmp-agent target-host
Syntax
snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain host-addr [ udp-port
udp-port-number ] params securityname community-string [ v1 | v2c |
v3 [ authentication | privacy ] ]
SNMP Configuration Commands
387
undo snmp-agent target-host host-addr securityname community-string
View
System view
Parameter
trap: Specifies the host to receive traps or notifications
address: Specifies the transport address to be used in the generation of SNMP
messages.
udp-domain: Specifies the transport domain over UDP for the target address.
host-addr: Enter the IP address of the destination host.
udp-port udp-port-number: Enter the UDP port number of the host to receive
the SNMP notification.
params: Specifies the SNMP target information to be used in the generation of
SNMP messages.
community-string: Enter the community name, up to 32 characters in length.
v1: Specifies SNMP version v1.
v2c: Specifies SNMP version v2C.
v3: Specifies SNMP version v3.
authentication: Specifies that the packet is authenticated without encryption.
privacy: Specifies that the packet is authenticated and encrypted.
community-string: Specifies the community name. The character string ranges
from1 to 32 bytes.
Description
Use the snmp-agent target-host command to select and configure the host that
you want to receive SNMP notification.
Use the undo snmp-agent target-host command to cancel the host currently
configured to receive SNMP notification.
You must enter the snmp-agent trap enable command before you enter the
snmp-agent target-host command. The snmp-agent trap enable command
enables the device to transmit Trap packets. To send Trap messages, at least one
snmp-agent target-host command should be configured.
Example
To enable Trap messages to be sent to 2.2.2.2 with a community name of
comaccess, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent trap enable
388
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
[SW4500]snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 2.2.2.2
params securityname comaccess
[SW4500]
To enable Trap messages to be sent to 2.2.2.2 with a community name of
public, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent trap enable
[SW4500]snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 2.2.2.2
params securityname public
[SW4500]
snmp-agent trap enable
Syntax
snmp-agent trap enable [ configuration | flash | ospf [ process-id ]
[ ospf-trap-list ] | standard [ authentication | coldstart | linkdown
| linkup | warmstart ]* | system ]
undo snmp-agent trap enable [ bgp [ backwardtransition ] [
established ] | configuration | flash | ospf [ process-id ] [
ospf-trap-list ] | standard [ authentication | coldstart | linkdown |
linkup | warmstart ]* | system ]
View
System view
Parameter
configuration: Configure to send SNMP configuration Trap packets.
flash: Configure to send SNMP flash Trap packets.
ospf [ process-id ] [ ospf-trap-list ]: Configure to send the OSPF trap
packets. process-id is the ID of the OSPF process, ranging from 1 to 65535.
ospf-trap-list is the list of OSPF trap information.
standard [ authentication | coldstart | linkdown | linkup | warmstart
]*: Configure to send standard Trap messages.
authentication: Configure to send SNMP authentication Trap messages
when authentication fails.
coldstart: Configure to send SNMP cold start Trap messages when switch is
rebooted.
linkdown: Configure to send SNMP link down Trap messages when switch
port turns down.
linkup: Configure to send SNMP link up Trap messages when switch port
turns up.
warmstart: Configure to send SNMP warm start Trap messages when snmp is
re-enabled.
system: Configure to send SysMib trap messages.
SNMP Configuration Commands
389
Description
Use the snmp-agent trap enable command to enable the device to send Trap
message. Use the undo snmp-agent trap enable command to disable Trap
message sending.
By default, Trap message sending is disabled.
The snmp-agent trap enable command and the snmp-agent target-host
command should be used at the same time. The snmp-agent target-host
command specifies which hosts can receive Trap message. To send Trap messages,
at least one snmp-agent target-host command should be configured.
Example
Enable to send the trap packet of SNMP authentication failure to 10.1.1.1. The
community name is 3Com.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent trap enable standard authentication
[SW4500]snmp-agent target-host trap address udp-domain 10.1.1.1
param securityname 3Com
[SW4500]
snmp-agent trap life
Syntax
snmp-agent trap life seconds
undo snmp-agent trap life
View
System view
Parameter
seconds: Specify the timeouts, ranging from 1 to 2592000 seconds. By default,
the timeout interval is 120 seconds.
Description
Use the snmp-agent trap life command to set the timeout of Trap packets. Use
the undo snmp-agent trap life command to restore the default value.
The set timeout of Trap packet is represented by seconds. If time exceeds
seconds, this Trap packet will be discarded.
For the related commands, see snmp-agent trap enable,
snmp-agent target-host.
Example
Configure the timeout interval of Trap packet as 60 seconds.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent trap life 60
[SW4500]
390
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
snmp-agent trap
queue-size
Syntax
snmp-agent trap queue-size length
undo snmp-agent trap queue-size
View
System view
Parameter
length: Length of queue, ranging from 1 to 1000; the default length is 100.
Description
Use the snmp-agent trap queue-size command to configure the information
queue length of Trap packet sent to destination host. Use the undo snmp-agent
trap queue-size command to restore the default value.
For the related commands, see snmp-agent trap enable,
snmp-agent target-host, snmp-agent trap life.
Example
Configure the queue length to 200.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent trap queue-size 200
[SW4500]
snmp-agent trap source
Syntax
snmp-agent trap source vlan-interface vlan-id
undo snmp-agent trap source
View
System view
Parameter
vlan-id: Specify the VLAN interface ID, ranging from 1 to 4094.
Description
Use the snmp-agent trap source command to specify the source address for
sending Traps. Use the undo snmp-agent trap source command to cancel the
source address for sending Traps.
Example
Configure the IP address of the VLAN interface 1 as the source address for
transmitting the Trap packets.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent trap source vlan-interface 1
[SW4500]
SNMP Configuration Commands
snmp-agent usm-user
391
Syntax
snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } username groupname [ acl acl-list ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user { v1 | v2c } username groupname
snmp-agent usm-user v3 username groupname [ authentication-mode {
md5 | sha } authpassstring [ privacy-mode { des56 privpassstring }]]
[ acl acl-list ]
undo snmp-agent usm-user v3 username groupname { local | engineid
engine-id }
View
System view
Parameter
username: Enter the user name, up to 32 characters in length.
groupname: Enter the group name corresponding to that user, up to 32 characters
in length.
v1: Specifies the use of v1 safe mode.
v2c: Specifies the use of v2c safe mode.
v3: Specifies the use of v3 safe mode.
authentication-mode: Specifies the use of authentication.
md5: Specifies that the MD5 algorithm is used in authentication. MD5
authentication uses a128-bit password. The computation speed of MD5 is faster
than that of SHA
sha: Specifies that the SHA algorithm is used in authentication. SHA
authentication uses a 160-bit password. The computation speed of SHA is slower
than that of MD5, but SHA offers higher security.
authpassstring: Enter the authentication password, up to 64 characters in
length.
privacy-mode: Specifies the use of authentication and encryption.
des 56: Specifies that the DES encryption algorithm is used. Must be entered if
you enter the privacy-mode parameter.
privpassstring: Enter the encryption password with a character string, ranging
from 1 to 64 bytes.
acl acl-list: Enter the access control list for this user, based on USM name.
Description
Use the snmp-agent usm-user command to add a new community name or, if
you use the V3 parameter, a new user to an SNMP group.
392
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Use the undo snmp-agent usm-user command to delete a user from an SNMP
group.
SNMP engineID (for authentication) is required when configuring remote users.
This command will not be effective if engineID is not configured.
For v1 and v2C, this command will add a new community name. For v3, it will add
a new user for an SNMP group. See Related Commands below.
Related commands: display snmp-agent, snmp-agent local engineid
Example
To add a user named “JohnQ” to the SNMP group “3Com”, then configure the
use of MD5, and set the authentication password to “pass”, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]snmp-agent usm-user v3 JohnQ 3Com authentication-mode md5
pass
[SW4500]
undo snmp-agent
Syntax
undo snmp-agent
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the undo snmp-agent command to disable all versions of SNMP running on
the server.
Any snmp-agent command will enable SNMP Agent.
Example
Disable the running SNMP agents of all SNMP versions.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]undo snmp-agent
[SW4500]
RMON Configuration Commands
RMON Configuration
Commands
display rmon alarm
This section describes the Remote Monitoring (RMON) configuration commands
available on your Switch 4500.
Syntax
display rmon alarm [ alarm-table-entry ]
View
All views
Parameter
alarm-table-entry: Alarm table entry index.
Description
Use the display rmon alarm command to view RMON alarm information.
For the related commands, see rmon alarm.
Example
Display the RMON alarm information.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display rmon alarm
Alarm table 1 owned by 3COM is VALID.
Samples absolute value : 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1
&lt;etherStatsOctets.1&gt;
Sampling interval
: 10(sec)
Rising threshold
: 1000(linked with event 1)
Falling threshold
: 100(linked with event 1)
When startup enables
: risingOrFallingAlarm
Latest value
: 0
Table 38 Output description of the display rmon alarm command
display rmon event
393
Field
Description
Alarm table 1
Index 1 in the alarm table
3Com
Owner
VALID
The entry corresponding to the index is valid
Samples absolute value
Sampling the absolute value of the node
1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1
Sampling interval
The interval of sampling the value
Rising threshold1
Rising threshold. When sampling value rises from
normal value to this threshold, rising threshold alarm
will be triggered.
Falling threshold
Falling threshold. When sampling value decreases from
normal value to this threshold, falling threshold alarm
will be triggered.
startup
The first trigger
risingOrFallingAlarm
The type of the first alarm: Specifies to alarm when
exceeding the rising threshold or the falling threshold
Syntax
display rmon event [ event-table-entry ]
394
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
View
All views
Parameter
event-table-entry: Entry index of event table.
Description
Use the display rmon event command to view RMON events.
The display includes event index in event table, owner of the event, description to
the event, action caused by event (log or alarm information), and occurrence time
of the latest event (counted on system initiate/boot time in centiseconds).
Related command: rmon event.
Example
Show the RMON event.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display rmon event
Event table 1 is VALID, and owned by 3COM.
Description: null.
Will cause log-trap when triggered, last triggered at 0days
00h:02m:27s.
Table 39 Output description of the display rmon event command
display rmon eventlog
Field
Description
Event table 1
Index 1 in event table
VALID
The entry corresponding to the index is valid
3COM
Owner
Description
Event description
Will cause log-trap when triggered,
last triggered at 0days 00h:02m:27s
When the event is triggered, it will cause the log-trap.
And the last triggered time is 00h:02m:27s
Syntax
display rmon eventlog [ event-number ]
View
All views
Parameter
event-number: Entry index of event table.
Description
Use the display rmon eventlog command to display RMON event log.
The display includes description about event index in event table, description to
the event, and occurrence time of the latest event (counted on system
initiate/boot time in centiseconds).
Example
Show the RMON event log.
RMON Configuration Commands
395
&lt;SW4500&gt;display rmon eventlog 1
Event table 1 owned by 3Com is VALID.
Generates eventLog 1.1 at 0days 00h:01m:39s.
Description: The 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1 defined in alarm table 1,
less than(or =) 100 with alarm value 0. Alarm sample type is
absolute.
Generates eventLog 1.2 at 0days 00h:02m:27s.
Description: The alarm formula defined in private alarm table 1,
less than(or =) 100 with alarm value 0. Alarm sample type is
absolute.
Table 40 Output description of the display rmon eventlog command
display rmon history
Field
Description
Event table 1
Index 1 in event table
3Com
Owner
VALID
The entry corresponding to the index is valid
Description
Event description
less than (or =) 100 with alarm
value 0
The alarm sample value is less than or equal to 100
Alarm sample type is absolute
The type of alarm sampling is absolute
Generates eventLog 1.2 at 0days
00h:02m:27s
The eventlog corresponding to the index 1.2 is
generated at 0days 00h:02m:27s.
Syntax
display rmon history [ port-num ]
View
All views
Parameter
port-num: Ethernet port name.
Description
Use the display rmon history command to view the latest RMON history
sampling information (including utility, error number and total packet number).
For the related commands, see rmon history.
Example
Show the RMON history information.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display rmon history ethernet 2/0/1
History control entry 1 owned by 3Com is VALID,
Samples interface
: Ethernet1/0/1&lt;ifEntry.642&gt;
Sampling interval
: 10(sec) with 10 buckets max
Latest sampled values :
Dropevents
:0
, octets
packets
:0
, broadcast packets
multicast packets :0
, CRC alignment errors
undersize packets :0
, oversize packets
fragments
:0
, jabbers
collisions
:0
, utilization
:0
:0
:0
:0
:0
:0
396
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Table 41 Output description of the display rmon history command
display rmon prialarm
Field
Description
History control table
Index number in history control table
3COM
Owner
VALID
The entry corresponding to the index is valid
Samples interface
The sampled interface
Sampling interval
Sampling interval
buckets
Records in history control table
dropevents
Dropping packet events
octets
Sent/received octets in sampling time
packets
Packets sent/received in sampling time
broadcastpackets
Number of broadcast packets
multicastpackets
Number of multicast packets
CRC alignment errors
Number of CRC error packets
undersized
Number of undersized packets
oversized packets
Number of oversized packets
fragments
Number of undersized and CRC error packets
jabbers
Number of oversized and CRC error packets
collisions
Number of collision packets
utilization
Utilization
Syntax
display rmon prialarm [ prialarm-table-entry ]
View
All views
Parameter
prialarm-table-entry: entry of extended alarm table.
Description
Use the display rmon prialarm command to display information about
extended alarm table.
Related command: rmon prialarm.
Example
Display alarm information about extended RMON.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display rmon prialarm
Prialarm table 1 owned by 3Com is VALID.
Samples
absolute value : .1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1
Sampling interval
: 10(sec)
Rising threshold
: 1000(linked with event 1)
Falling threshold
: 100(linked with event 1)
When startup enables
: risingOrFallingAlarm
This entry will exist
: forever.
Latest value
: 0
RMON Configuration Commands
397
Table 42 Output description of the display rmon prialarm command
Field
Description
Prialarm table 1
Index of extended alarm entry.
owned by 3COM
Creator of the extended alarm entry.
VALID
The entry corresponding to the index is valid
Samples absolute value
Sampling the absolute value of the node 1.3.6.1.2.1.16.1.1.1.4.1
Rising threshold
Rising threshold. When sampling value rises from normal value to
this threshold, rising threshold alarm will be triggered.
Falling threshold
Falling threshold. When sampling value decreases from normal
value to this threshold, falling threshold alarm will be triggered.
linked with event 1
Corresponding event index of ring and falling threshold alarm.
When startup enables:
risingOrFallingAlarm
Kind of first alarm. It may trigger rising threshold alarm or falling
threshold alarm or both.
This entry will exist forever The lifespan of this alarm entry which can be forever or a specified
period of time.
Latest value : 0
display rmon statistics
The value of the latest sampling.
Syntax
display rmon statistics [ port-num ]
View
All views
Parameter
port-num: Ethernet port number.
Description
Use the display rmon statistics command to display RMON statistics.
The displayed information includes collision, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) and
queue, undersized or oversized packet, timeout, fragment, broadcast, multicast,
unicast, and bandwidth utility.
Related command: rmon statistics.
Example
Show RMON statistics.
&lt;SW4500&gt;display rmon statistics Ethernet 1/0/1
Statistics entry 1 owned by 3Com is VALID.
Interface : Ethernet1/0/1&lt;ifEntry.642&gt;
Received :
octets
:0
, packets
:0
broadcast packets
:0
, multicast packets:0
undersized packets :0
, oversized packets:0
fragments packets
:0
, jabbers packets :0
CRC alignment errors:0
, collisions
:0
Dropped packet (insufficient resources):0
Packets received according to length (octets):
64
:0
, 65-127 :0
, 128-255 :0
256-511:0
, 512-1023:0
, 1024-1518:0
398
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Table 43 Output description of the display rmon statistics command
rmon alarm
Field
Description
Interface
Port
3Com
Owner
VALID
The entry corresponding to the index is valid
octets
Received/Sent octets in sampling time
packets
Packets received/sent in sampling time
broadcast packets
Number of broadcast packets
multicast packets
Number of multicast packets
undersized packets
Number of undersized packets
oversized packets
Number of oversized packets
fragments packets
Number of undersized and CRC error packets
jabbers
Number of oversized and CRC error packets
CRC alignment errors
Number of CRC error packets
collisions
Number of collision packets
Dropped packet
(insufficient resources)
Dropping packet events
Syntax
rmon alarm entry-number alarm-variable sampling-time { delta |
absolute } rising-threshold threshold-value1 event-entry1
falling-threshold threshold-value2 event-entry2 [ owner text ]
undo rmon alarm entry-number
View
System view
Parameter
entry-number: Number of the entry to be added/deleted, ranging from 1 to
65535.
alarm-variable: Specifies the alarm variable with a character string, ranging
from 1 to 256, in the OID dotted format, like 1.3.6.1.2.1.2.1.10.1 (or ifInOctets.1).
sampling-time: Specifies the sampling interval, ranging from 5 to 65535
(measured in seconds).
delta: Sampling type is delta.
absolute: Sampling type is absolute.
rising-threshold threshold-value1: Rising threshold, ranging from 0 to
2147483647.
event-entry1: Event number corresponding to the upper limit of threshold,
ranging from 0 to 65535.
RMON Configuration Commands
399
falling-threshold threshold-value2: Falling threshold, ranging from 0 to
2147483647.
event-entry2: Event number corresponding to the falling threshold, ranging
from 0 to 65535.
owner text: Specifies the creator of the alarm. Length of the character string
ranges from 1 to 127.
Description
Use the rmon alarm command to add an entry to the alarm table. Use the undo
rmon alarm command to delete an entry from this table.
In this way, the alarm event can be triggered in the abnormal situations and then
decides to log and send trap to the NM station.
Example
Delete the information of entry 15 from the alarm table.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]undo rmon alarm 15
[SW4500]
rmon event
Syntax
rmon event event-entry [ description string ] { log | trap
trap-community | log-trap log-trapcommunity | none } [ owner
rmon-station ]
undo rmon event event-entry
View
System view
Parameter
event-entry: Number of the entry to be added/deleted, ranging from 1 to
65535.
description string: Event description. Length of the character string ranges
from 1 to 255.
log: Log event.
trap: Trap event.
trap-community: The community of the Network Management station that the
trap message is sent to.
log-trap: Log and trap event.
log-trapcommunity: The community of the Network Management station that
the trap message is sent to.
none: neither log nor trap event.
400
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
owner rmon-station: Name of the network management station that creates
this entry. The length of the character string ranges from 1 to 127.
Description
Use the rmon event command to add an entry to the event table. Use the undo
rmon event command to delete an entry from this table.
Event management of RMON defines the way to deal with event number and
event-log, send trap message or log while sending trap message. In this way,
alarm events may obtain corresponding treatment
Example
Add the entry 10 to the event table and mark it as log event.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]rmon event 10 log
[SW4500]
rmon history
Syntax
rmon history entry-number buckets number interval sampling-interval
[ owner text-string ]
undo rmon history entry-number
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
entry-number: Number of the entry to be added/deleted, ranging from 1 to
65535.
buckets number: Capacity of the history table corresponding to the control line.
interval sampling-interval: Sampling interval, ranging from 5 to 3600
(measured in seconds).
owner text-string: Creator of the line. Length of the character string ranges from
1 to127.
Description
Use the rmon history command to add an entry to the history control table. Use
the undo rmon history command to delete an entry from history control table.
Perform this command to sample, set sample parameter (sample time interval) and
storage amounts for a port. RMON will periodically perform data collection and
save for query on this port. Sample information includes utility, error number and
total packet number.
Example
Delete the entry 15 from the history control table.
&lt;SW4500SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
RMON Configuration Commands
401
[SW4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[SW4500-Ethernet1/0/1]undo rmon history 15
[SW4500-Ethernet1/0/1]
rmon prialarm
Syntax
rmon prialarm entry-number alarm-var [ alarm-des ] sampling-timer {
delta | absolute | changeratio } rising-threshold threshold-value1
event-entry1 falling-threshold threshold-value2 event-entry2
entrytype { forever | cycle cycle-period } [ owner text ]
undo rmon prialarm entry-number
View
System view
Parameter
entry-number: Specifies the entry number, ranging from 1 to 65535.
alarm-var: Specifies the alarm variable, which can be an arithmetic expression of
several integer MIB node instances. The node can be OID in dotted notation.
alarm-des: Specifies the alarm description with a length ranging from 0 to
0-127;
sampling-timer: Sets the sampling interval, ranging from 10 to 65535 and
measured in seconds.
delta | absolute | changeratio: Specifies the sampling type as delta ratio or
absolute ratio.
threshold-value1: Rising threshold value, specified with a number greater than
0.
event-entry1: Corresponding event number to the upper limit threshold value,
ranging from 0 to 65535.
threshold-value2: Falling threshold value, specified with a number greater than
0.
event-entry2: Event number corresponding to the falling threshold, ranging
from 0 to 65535.
forever | cycle cycle-period: Specifies the type of the alarm instance line.
cycle-period specifies the functional cycle of the instance.
owner text: Specifies the creator of the line. Length of the character string
ranges from 1 to 127.
Description
Use the rmon prialarm command to add an entry to the extended RMON alarm
table. Use the undo rmon prialarm command to delete an entry from the
extended RMON alarm table.
402
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
The number of instances can be created in the table depends on the hardware
resource of the product.
Example
Delete line 10 from the extended RMON alarm table.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]undo rmon prialarm 10
[SW4500]
rmon statistics
Syntax
rmon statistics entry-number [ owner text-string ]
undo rmon statistics entry-number
View
Ethernet port view
Parameter
entry-number: Number of the entry to be added/deleted, ranging from 1 to
65535.
owner text-string: Creator of the entry. Length of the character string ranges
from 1 to127.
Description
Use the rmon statistics command to add an entry to the statistic table. Use the
undo rmon statistics command to delete an entry from statistic table.
RMON statistic management concerns the statistics and monitoring of the usage
and error on a port. Statistics includes collision, CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
and queue, undersized or oversized packet, timeout, fragment, broadcast,
multicast, unicast, and bandwidth utility.
Example
Add the statistics of Ethernet 1/0/1to entry 20 of the statistics table.
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]interface Ethernet1/0/1
[SW4500-ethernet1/0/1]rmon statistics 20
[SW4500-ethernet1/0/1]
SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands
SSH Terminal Service
Configuration
Commands
debugging ssh server
403
This section describes the SSH configuration commands available on your Switch
4500.
Syntax
debugging ssh server { VTY vty-num | all}
undo debugging ssh server {VTY vty-num | all}
View
User View
Parameter
vty-num: SSH channel to be debugged whose value is dictated by VTY numbers
ranging from 0 to 4.
all: All SSH channels
Description
Use the debugging ssh server command to send information regulated by the
SSH2.0 protocol, such as the negotiation procedure, to the information center in
the format of debugging information. You can also use it to debug a user
interface individually.
Use the undo debugging ssh server command to disable debugging.
By default, the debugging is disabled.
Related commands: ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server
rekey-interval, ssh server timeout.
Example
To print debugging information in running SSH, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;debugging ssh server vty 0
00:23:20: SSH0: starting SSH control process
00:23:20: SSH0: sent protocol version id SSH-1.5-SW4500-1.25
00:23:20: SSH0: protocol version id is - SSH-1.5-1.2.26
00:23:20: SSH0: SSH_SMSG_PUBLIC_KEY msg
00:23:21: SSH0: SSH_CMSG_SESSION_KEY msg - length 112, type 0x03
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt started
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt finished
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt started
00:23:21: SSH: RSA decrypt finished
display rsa local-key-pair
public
Syntax
display rsa local-key-pair public
View
All views
404
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display rsa local-key-pair public command to display the public
key of the server’s host key pair and server key pair. If no key has been created,
you will see a prompt similar to the following: “RSA keys not found”.
Related command: rsa local-key-pair create.
Example
To display local key pair and public key of the server, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;display rsa local-key-pair public
Time of Key pair created: 16:44:2 2005/1/27
Key name: Quidway_Host
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
30818B
028183
D7F7F364 D295C8DA 7F40E7C6 2DF7E206 6ECB0077
3376F051 A4B5F1CA AF3C3A31 4F1AE7B0 D88444C6
84599A56 BA951BD0 8E067DCA 934448D8 6B1452E2
3FBA337A B4CD65CD FD21FDE6 6C09A65F 07A06769
31C7F57D 40FD073E 5826B98E 65B2079B B75750A9
4D459577 CB265D98 3CC07B8E B1DE032B ACDCA78F
079752A0 49808AEB D03CED
0203
010001
Host public key for PEM format code:
---- BEGIN SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAhADX9/Nk0pXI2n9A58Yt9+IGbssAdzN28FGk
tfHKrzw6MU8a57DYhETGhFmaVrqVG9COBn3Kk0RI2GsUUuI/ujN6tM1lzf0h/eZs
CaZfB6BnaTHH9X1A/Qc+WCa5jmWyB5u3V1CpTUWVd8smXZg8wHuOsd4DK6zcp48H
l1KgSYCK69A87Q==
---- END SSH2 PUBLIC KEY ---Public key code for pasting into OpenSSH authorized_keys file:
ssh-rsa
AAAAB3NzaC1yc2EAAAADAQABAAAAhADX9/Nk0pXI2n9A58Yt9+IGbssAdzN28FGktfHK
rzw6
MU8a57DYhETGhFmaVrqVG9COBn3Kk0RI2GsUUuI/ujN6tM1lzf0h/eZsCaZfB6BnaTHH
9X1A/Qc+WCa5
jmWyB5u3V1CpTUWVd8smXZg8wHuOsd4DK6zcp48Hl1KgSYCK69A87Q== rsa-key
=====================================================
Time of Key pair created: 8:41:49 2005/2/3
Key name: Quidway_Server
Key type: RSA encryption Key
=====================================================
Key code:
3067
0260
SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands
BF7EA2AD
8EEE29EE
1295377B
83A932E7
580FF838
0203
010001
display rsa
peer-public-key
F4D6DA17
F498077B
0237906F
BD9C6B6A
BD002C32
4481BC34
055A88E2
C6261160
19F804F3
B8E04919
C14875ED
B4EF5582
68A6E033
350D882B
B36868A3
405
B826A23B
2D883C82
983F6ECD
6CF493B8
Syntax
display rsa peer-public-key [ brief | name keyname ]
View
All views
Parameter
brief: Displays brief information about all client public keys.
keyname: Specifies the public key name of the client to be displayed which is a
string consisting of 1 to 64 characters.
Description
Use the display rsa peer-public-key command to display the public key of
RSA key pair specified by the client. If you do not specify the keyname argument,
all public keys will be displayed.
Related command: rsa local-key-pair create.
Example
To display a designated RSA public key, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;display rsa peer-public-key
Address
Bits
Name
1023
abcd
1024
hq
To display information about the public key of the client named abcd, enter the
following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;display rsa peer-public-key name abcd
Key name: abcd
Key address:
=====================================
Key Code:
308186
028180
739A291A BDA704F5 D93DC8FD F84C4274 631991C1 64B0DF17
3591C7D4 7D5381D0 9CE82913 D7EDF9C0 8511D83C A4ED2B30
B0D1F52D 045DE408 61B74A0E 135523CC D74CAC61 F8E58C45
A0DCC48E 3306367F E187BDD9 44018B3B 69F3CBB0 A573202C
ACF3EC8F 828D55A3 6F1CDDC4 BB45504F
0201
25
8C55FA83
B809808E
2B2F3F2D
16BB2FC1
406
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
display ssh server
Syntax
display ssh server { status | session }
View
All views
Parameter
status: Displays the SSH status information
session: Displays the SSH session information
Description
Use the display ssh server command to display the status information or
session information of an SSH server.
Related commands: ssh server authentication-retries, ssh server
rekey-interval, ssh server timeout, ssh server compatible_ssh1x
enable
Example
To display the status information of the SSH server, enter the following:
[SW4500]display ssh server status
SSH version : 2.0
SSH connection timeout : 60 seconds
SSH server key generating interval : 0 hours
SSH Authentication retries : 3 times
SFTP Server: Disable
To display SSH sessions:
[SW4500]display ssh server session
Connection
Version
Encryption
VTY0
2.0
DES
display ssh
user-information
State
Session started
Username
SW4500
Syntax
display ssh user-information [ username ]
View
All views
Parameter
username: A valid SSH username which is a string consisting of 1 to 80 characters.
Description
Use the display ssh user-information command to display information about
the current SSH user, including username, authentication mode, corresponding
key name and the types of authorized services. If you specify username in the
command, the user information about the specified username will be displayed.
Related commands: ssh user username assign rsa-key, ssh user username
authentication-type.
SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands
407
Example
To display the current user information, enter the following:
[SW4500]display ssh user-information
The contents of SSH User: abc
Authentication-type: null
User-public-key-name: null
Service-type: stelnet|sftp
The contents of SSH User: u123
Authentication-type: null
User-public-key-name: null
Service-type: stelnet|sftp
The contents of SSH User: user
Authentication-type: null
User-public-key-name: hello
Service-type: sftp
peer-public-key end
Syntax
peer-public-key end
View
Public key view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the peer-public-key end command to exit from the public key view and
return to the system view.
Related commands: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin.
Example
To quit public key view, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[SW4500]rsa peer-public-key 3COM003
[SW4500-rsa-public-key]peer-public-key end
[SW4500]
protocol inbound
Syntax
protocol inbound { all | ssh | telnet }
View
VTY user interface view
Parameter
all: Supports all protocols, including Telnet and SSH.
ssh: Supports the SSH protocol only.
408
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
telnet: Supports the Telnet protocol only.
Description
Use the protocol inbound command to specify the protocol supported by the
current user interface.
By default, all protocols are supported.
The configuration takes effect at the next login. After enabling SSH you cannot
login through SSH if the client RSA key is not configured.
If the supported protocol configured in the user interface is SSH, you must ensure
you configure the corresponding authentication mode to authentication-mode
scheme (using AAA authentication mode).
If the authentication mode is configured as authentication-mode password or
authentication-mode none, the configuration of protocol inbound ssh will
fail. However, if a user interface is configured to support the SSH protocol, you will
be unable to configure authentication-mode password and
authentication-mode none.
Related command: user-interface vty.
Example
To set VTY 0 to 4 to support SSH protocol only, enter the following:
[SW4500]user-interface vty 0 4
[SW4500-ui-vty0-4]protocol inbound ssh
To disable the Telnet function of VTY 0 and make it support SSH only:
[SW4500]user-interface vty 0
[SW4500-ui-vty0]protocol inbound ssh
public-key-code begin
Syntax
public-key-code begin
View
Public key edit view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the public-key-code begin command to enter the public key edit view and
input the public key of the client.
When inputting the public key, you may type spaces between the characters (the
system will delete the spaces automatically), or press Enter and continue to input
the key. Note that the public key must be a hexadecimal string coded in the public
key format and is randomly generated by the SSH 2.0-enabled client software.
Related commands: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code end.
SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands
409
Example
To enter the public key edit view and input the key, enter the following:
[SW4500]rsa peer-public-key quidway003
[SW4500-rsa-public-key]public-key-code begin
[SW4500-key-code]308186028180739A291ABDA704F5D93DC8FDF84C427463
[SW4500-key-code]1991C164B0DF178C55FA833591C7D47D5381D09CE82913
[SW4500-key-code]D7EDF9C08511D83CA4ED2B30B809808EB0D1F52D045DE4
[SW4500-key-code]0861B74A0E135523CCD74CAC61F8E58C452B2F3F2DA0DC
[SW4500-key-code]C48E3306367FE187BDD944018B3B69F3CBB0A573202C16
[SW4500-key-code]BB2FC1ACF3EC8F828D55A36F1CDDC4BB45504F020125
[SW4500-key-code]public-key-code end
[SW4500-rsa-public-key]
public-key-code end
Syntax
public-key-code end
View
Public key edit view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the public-key-code end command to return from the public key edit view
to the public key view and save the public key entered.
After this command is performed to end the public key edit procedure, the system
will check the validity of the key before saving the input public key. If the public
key string contains any illegal character, the system will prompt the failure of the
configuration and the configured key will be discarded; otherwise, the key is valid
and will be saved to the user public key list.
Related command: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin.
Example
To exit the public key edit view and save the configuration, enter the following:
[SW4500-rsa-key-code]public-key-code end
[SW4500-rsa-public-key]
rsa local-key-pair create
Syntax
rsa local-key-pair create
View
System view
Parameter
None
410
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Description
Use the rsa local-key-pair create command to generate the RSA key pair
(including the host key and server key) of the server.
When configuring by this command, if the RSA key pair already exists, you receive
get a warning asking if you want to replace the existing one. Note that the host
key and the server key must have a difference of 128 bits at least, and that the
minimum and maximum lengths for the host key and the server key are 512 bits
and 2048 bits respectively.
When the client version is SSH 2.0, the RSA key of the SSH server must be no less
than 1024 bits in length, otherwise the authentication will fail
Generating the RSA key pair of the server is the first step to perform after SSH
login. You will not need to generate the RSA key pair after rebooting the Switch.
Related command: rsa local-key-pair destroy.
Example
To generate the local RSA key pair, enter the following:
[SW4500]rsa local-key-pair create
The key name will be: SW4500
% RSA keys defined for SW4500_Host already exist.
Confirm to replace them? [Y/N]:y
The range of public key size is (512 ~ 2048).
NOTES: If the key modulus is greater than 512,
It will take a few minutes.
Input the bits in the modulus[default = 512]:
Generating keys...
...........++++++++++++
rsa local-key-pair
destroy
Syntax
rsa local-key-pair destroy
View
System view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the rsa local-key-pair destroy command to destroy all the RSA key pairs
of the server, including the host keys and server keys.
Related command: rsa local-key-pair create.
Example
To destroy all the RSA key pairs of the server, enter the following:
[SW4500]rsa local-key-pair destroy
% The name for the keys which will be destroyed is SW4500_Host .
% Confirm to destroy these keys? [Y/N]:y
SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands
rsa peer-public-key
411
Syntax
rsa peer-public-key key-name
View
System view
Parameter
key-name: The name of the public key which is a string consisting of 1 to 64
characters.
Description
Use the rsa peer-public-key command to enter the public key view.
When using this command together with the public-key-code begin command to
configure the public key at the client, which is generated randomly by the client
program supporting SSH1.5.
Related commands: public-key-code begin, public-key-code end.
Example
To enter the public key view name 3Com002, enter the following:
[SW4500]rsa peer-public-key 3COM002
[SW4500-rsa-public-key]
ssh server
authentication-retries
Syntax
ssh server authentication-retries times
undo ssh server authentication-retries
View
System view
Parameter
times: Specifies authentication retry times, in the range of 1~5.
Description
Use the ssh server authentication-retries command to define SSH
authentication retry times value, which takes effect at next logon.
Use the undo ssh server authentication-retries command to restore the
default retry value.
By default, it is 3.
Related command: display ssh server.
Example
To define the authentication retry times value as 4, enter the following:
[SW4500]ssh server authentication-retries 4
412
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
ssh server rekey-interval
Syntax
ssh server rekey-interval hours
undo ssh server rekey-interval
View
System view
Parameter
hours: Defines key update interval, in the range of 1~24 hours.
Description
Use the ssh server rekey-interval command to define update interval of the
server key.
Use the undo ssh server rekey-interval command to cancel the current
setting.
By default, the system does not update the server key.
Example
To define the update interval of a server key as 3 hours, enter the following:
[SW4500]ssh server rekey-interval 3
ssh server timeout
Syntax
ssh server timeout seconds
undo ssh server timeout
View
System view
Parameter
seconds: Specifies the login timeout (in seconds) in the range 1 to 120.
Description
Use the ssh server timeout command to set the authentication timeout of SSH
connections.
Use the undo ssh server timeout command to restore the default value.
By default, the timeout value is 60 seconds.
Related command: display ssh server.
Example
To define the registration timeout value as 80 seconds, enter the following:
[SW4500]ssh server timeout 80
ssh user assign rsa-key
Syntax
ssh user username assign rsa-key keyname
SSH Terminal Service Configuration Commands
413
undo ssh user username assign rsa-key
View
System view
Parameter
username: A valid SSH username, which is a string consisting of 1 to 80
characters.
keyname: A name of the client public key which is a string consisting of 1 to 54
characters.
Description
Use the ssh user username assign rsa-key command to assign an existing
public key for the specified SSH user.
Use the undo ssh user username assign rsa-key command to delete the
association.
For a user who has been associated with a public key, the command associates
him/her with the new public key.
The new public key takes effect at the next login.
Related command: display ssh user-information.
Example
To associate the key 1 with jsmith, enter the following:
[SW4500]ssh user jsmith assign rsa-key key1
ssh user
authentication-type
Syntax
ssh user username authentication-type { password | rsa |
password-publickey }
undo ssh user username authentication-type
View
System View
Parameter
username: A valid SSH username which is a string consisting of 1 to 80 characters.
password: Forces the user’s authentication mode to password authentication.
rsa: Forces the user’s authentication mode to RSA public key authentication.
password-publickey: Forces the user’s authentication mode to password
authentication plus RSA public key authentication.
all: Specifies authentication type as password and RSA.
414
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Description
Use the ssh user username authentication-type command to define
authentication type for a designated user.
Use the undo ssh user username authentication-type command to restore
the default mode in which logon fails.
By default, user cannot logon to the Switch through SSH or TELNET, you need to
specify the authentication type for a new user. The new configuration takes
effects at the next logon.
Related commands: display ssh user-information.
Example
To specify jsmith’s authentication type as password, enter the following:
[SW4500]ssh user jsmith authentication-type password
SSH Client
Configuration
Commands
display ssh server-info
This section describes the SSH client configuration commands available on your
Switch 4500.
Syntax
display ssh server-info
View
Any View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display ssh server-info command to view the corresponding
relationship between the client's public key of the servers and servers.
Example
To display the corresponding relationship between the client's servers and public
keys, enter the following:
[SW4500]display ssh server-info
Server Name(IP)
Server public key name
______________________________________________________
192.168.0.1
192.168.0.2
peer-public-key end
Syntax
peer-public-key end
abc_key01
abc_key02
SSH Client Configuration Commands
415
View
Public key view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the peer-public-key end command to exit from the public key view and return
to the system view.
Related commands: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin.
Example
To exit the public key view, enter the following:
[SW4500]rsa peer-public-key SW4500003
[SW4500-rsa-public-key]peer-public-key end
[SW4500]
public-key-code begin
Syntax
public-key-code begin
View
Public key view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the public-key-code begin command to enter the public key edit view and
input the public key of the server.
When inputting the public key, you may type spaces between the characters (the
system will delete the spaces automatically), or press &lt;Enter&gt; and then continue
to input the key.
The public key must be a hexadecimal string coded in the public key format. The
public key of the server is generated by the rsa local-key-pair create command.
Related commands: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code end
Example
To enter the public key edit view and input the public key of the server, enter the
following:
[SW4500]rsa peer-public-key SW4500003
[SW4500-rsa-public-key]public-key-code begin
[SW4500-key-code]308186028180739A291ABDA704F5D93DC8FDF84C427463
416
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
[SW4500-key-code]1991C164B0DF178C55FA833591C7D47D5381D09CE82913
[SW4500-key-code]D7EDF9C08511D83CA4ED2B30B809808EB0D1F52D045DE4
[SW4500-key-code]0861B74A0E135523CCD74CAC61F8E58C452B2F3F2DA0DC
[SW4500-key-code]C48E3306367FE187BDD944018B3B69F3CBB0A573202C16
[SW4500-key-code]BB2FC1ACF3EC8F828D55A36F1CDDC4BB45504F020125
[SW4500-key-code]public-key-code end
[SW4500-rsa-public-key]
public-key-code end
Syntax
public-key-code end
View
Public key edit view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the public-key-code end command to return from the public key edit view
to the public key view and save the public key of the server entered.
After this command is performed to end the public key edit procedure, the system
will check the validity of the key before saving the input public key. If the public
key string contains any illegal character, the system will prompt the failure of the
configuration and the configured key will be discarded; otherwise, the key is valid
and will be saved.
Related commands: rsa peer-public-key, public-key-code begin
Example
To exit the public key edit view and save the public key of the server, enter the
following:
[SW4500-rsa-key-code]public-key-code end
[SW4500-rsa-public-key]
quit
Syntax
quit
View
User View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the quit command to terminate the connection with the remote SSH server.
SSH Client Configuration Commands
417
Example
To terminate the connection with the remote SSH server, enter the following:
&lt;SW4500&gt;quit
rsa peer-public-key
Syntax
rsa peer-public-key key-name
View
System View
Parameter
key-name: The name of the public key of the server, which is a string consisting of
1 to 64 characters.
Description
Use the rsa peer-public-key command to enter the public key view.
Performing this command, you can enter the public key view. Then you can use
the public-key-code begin command to configure the public key of the server
on the client. The public key of the server is generated by the rsa
local-key-pair create command.
Related commands: public-key-code begin, public-key-code end
Example
To enter the public key view named SW4500002, enter the following:
[SW4500]rsa peer-public-key SW4500002
[SW4500-rsa-public-key]
ssh client assign rsa-key
Syntax
ssh client { server-ip | server-name } assign rsa-key keyname
undo ssh client server-ip assign rsa-key
View
System View
Parameter
server-ip: The IP address of the SSH server.
server-name: The name of the SSH server, which is a string consisting of 1 to 80
characters.
keyname: The name of the public key of the server, which is a string consisting of
1 to 64 characters.
418
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Description
Use the ssh client assign rsa-key command to specify the public key of the
server to connect with on the client, so that the client authenticates if the server is
trustworthy.
Use the undo ssh client assign rsa-key command to cancel the specified
relationship with the public key of the server.
Example
To specify abc as the public key name of the server with IP address 192.168.0.1 on
the client, enter the following:
[SW4500]ssh client 192.168.0.1 assign rsa-key abc
ssh client first-time
enable
Syntax
ssh client first-time enable
undo ssh client first-time
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the ssh client first-time enable command to set the SSH client to
perform the first-time authentication of the SSH server to be accessed.
Use the undo ssh client first-time command to cancel the first-time
authentication.
The first-time authentication means that when the SSH client accesses the server
for the first time in the case that there is no local copy of the server's public key,
the user can proceed to access the server and save a local copy of the server's
public key; when the client accesses the server next time, it uses the saved public
key to authenticate the server.
If the first-time authentication is not supported, when there is no local copy of the
public key of the connected server, the client assumes that the server is illegal and
will refuse to access the server. The user can save a copy of the server's public key
locally by other means beforehand.
By default, the client perform the first-time authentication.
Example
To set the SSH client to perform the first-time authentication of the SSH server to
be accessed, enter the following:
SSH Client Configuration Commands
419
[SW4500]ssh client first-time enable
ssh2
Syntax
ssh2 { host-ip | host-name } [ port-num ] [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 |
dh_exchange_group } ] [ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ]
[ prefer_stoc_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] [ prefer_ctos_hmac {
sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] [ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96
| md5 | md5_96 } ]
View
System View
Parameter
host-ip: IP address of the server.
host-name: The name of the server. It is a string with a length of 1 to 20
characters.
port-num: The port number of the server, ranging from 0 to 65535. By default,
the port number is 22.
prefer_kex: Preferred key exchange algorithm, which can be one of the two
algorithms.
dh_group1: Key exchange algorithm diffie-hellman-group1-sha1, which is the
default algorithm.
dh_exchange_group: Key exchange algorithm
diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1.
prefer_ctos_cipher: Preferred encryption algorithm from the client to the
server. The default algorithm is aes128.
prefer_stoc_cipher: Preferred encryption algorithm from the server to the
client. The default algorithm is aes128.
des: Encryption algorithm des_cbc.
3des: Encryption algorithm 3des_cbc.
aes128: Encryption algorithm aes_128.
prefer_ctos_hmac: Preferred HMAC algorithm from the client to the server. The
default algorithm is sha1_96.
prefer_stoc_hmac: Preferred HMAC algorithm from the server to the client. The
default algorithm is sha1_96.
sha1: HMAC algorithm hmac-sha1.
sha1_96: HMAC algorithm hmac-sha1-96.
md5: HMAC algorithm hmac-md5.
420
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
md5_96: HMAC algorithm hmac-md5-96.
Description
Use the ssh2 command to enable the connection between the SSH client and the
server, and specify the preferred key exchange algorithm, encryption algorithm
and HMAC algorithm of the client and the server.
Example
To log in to the remote SSH2 server with the IP address 10.214.50.51, and
configure encryption algorithms as follows:
■
Preferred key exchange algorithm: dh_exchange_group
■
Preferred encryption algorithm from the client to the server: 3DES-CBC
■
Preferred HMAC algorithm from the client to the server: HMAC-MD5
■
Preferred encryption algorithm from the server to the client: AES-128
■
Preferred HMAC algorithm from the server to the client: HMAC-SHA1-96
[SW4500]ssh2 10.214.50.51 prefer_kex dh_exchange_group
prefer_ctos_cipher 3des prefer_ctos_hmac md5
SFTP Server Configuration Commands
SFTP Server
Configuration
Commands
sftp server enable
421
This section describes the SFTP server configuration commands available on your
Switch 4500.
Syntax
sftp server enable
undo sftp server
View
System View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the sftp server enable command to start the SFTP server.
Use the undo sftp server command to shutdown the SFTP server.
By default, the SFTP server is shutdown.
Example
To start the SFTP server, enter the following:
[SW4500]sftp server enable
To shutdown the SFTP server, enter the following:
[SW4500]undo sftp server
ssh user service-type
Syntax
ssh user username service-type { stelnet | sftp | all }
undo ssh user username service-type
View
System View
Parameter
username: Local username or username defined by the remote RADIUS/TACACS
server. It is a string with a length of 1 to 80 characters.
stelnet: Specifies the service type as secure Telnet.
sftp: Specifies the service type as secure FTP.
all: Includes both stelnet and sftp service types.
422
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Description
Use the ssh user service-type command to specify the service type for a
particular user.
Use the undo ssh user service-type command to restore the default service
type.
By default, the service type is stelnet.
Related command: display ssh user-information
Example
To specify the service type to be SFTP for user J Smith, enter the following:
[SW4500]ssh user jsmith service-type sftp
SFTP Client
Configuration
Commands
This section describes the SFTP client configuration commands available on your
Switch 4500.
bye
Syntax
bye
View
SFTP Client View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the bye command to terminate the connection with the remote SFTP server
and return to the system view.
This command has the same functionality as the exit and quit commands.
Example
To terminate the connection with the remote SFTP server, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;bye
[SW4500]
cd
Syntax
cd [ remote-path ]
View
SFTP Client View
SFTP Client Configuration Commands
423
Parameter
remote-path: The name of a path on the server.
Description
Use the cd command to change the current path on the SFTP server. If you do not
specify the remote-path argument, the current path will be displayed.
Example
To change the current path to d:/temp, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;cd d:/temp
cdup
Syntax
cdup
View
SFTP Client View
Parameter
None
Description
Use the cdup command to change the current path to its upper directory.
Example
To change the current path to its upper directory, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;cdup
delete
Syntax
delete remote-file
View
SFTP Client View
Parameter
remote-file:The name of a file on the server.
Description
Use the delete command to delete the specified file from the server.
This command has the same functionality as the remove command.
424
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
Example
To delete the file temp.c from the server, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;delete temp.c
dir
Syntax
dir[remote-path]
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
remote-path:The name of the directory to view.
Description
Use the dir command to view the files in the specified directory.
If remote-path is not specified, the files in the current directory will be displayed.
This command has the same functionality as the ls command.
Example
To view the directory, flash:/, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;dir flash:/
-rwxrwxrwx
1 noone
-rwxrwxrwx
1 noone
-rwxrwxrwx
1 noone
-rwxrwxrwx
1 noone
drwxrwxrwx
1 noone
drwxrwxrwx
1 noone
-rwxrwxrwx
1 noone
exit
nogroup
nogroup
nogroup
nogroup
nogroup
nogroup
nogroup
1759
225
283
225
0
0
225
Aug
Aug
Aug
Sep
Sep
Sep
Sep
23
24
24
28
28
28
28
06:52
08:01
07:39
08:28
08:24
08:18
08:30
vrpcfg.cfg
pubkey2
pubkey1
pub1
new1
new2
pub2
Syntax
exit
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the exit command to terminate the connection with the remote SFTP server
and return to the System view.
This command has the same functionality as the bye and quit commands.
SFTP Client Configuration Commands
425
Example
To terminate the connection with the remote SFTP server, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;exit
[SW4500]
get
Syntax
get remote-file [ local-file ]
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
remote-file: The name of a file on the remote SFTP server.
local-file: The name of a local file.
Description
Use the get command to download a file from the remote server and save it
locally.
By default, if no local file name is specified, it is assumed that the local file has the
same name as the file on the SFTP server.
Example
To download file temp1.c and save it with name temp.c, enter the following
sftp-client&gt;get temp1.c temp.c
help
Syntax
help [ command ]
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
command: The name of a command.
Description
Use the help command to view the help information for SFTP client commands.
If the command argument is not specified, all command names will be displayed.
Example
To view the help information for the get command, enter the following:
426
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
sftp-client&gt;help get
get remote-path [local-path] Download file
Default local-path is the same with remote-path
ls
Syntax
ls [ remote-path ]
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
remote-path: The name of the directory to view.
Description
Use the ls command to view the files in the specified directory.
If remote-path is not specified, the files in the current directory will be displayed.
This command has the same functionality as the dir command.
Example
To view the directory flash:/, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;ls
-rwxrwxrwx
1
-rwxrwxrwx
1
-rwxrwxrwx
1
-rwxrwxrwx
1
drwxrwxrwx
1
drwxrwxrwx
1
-rwxrwxrwx
1
mkdir
flash:/
noone
noone
noone
noone
noone
noone
noone
nogroup
nogroup
nogroup
nogroup
nogroup
nogroup
nogroup
1759
225
283
225
0
0
225
Aug
Aug
Aug
Sep
Sep
Sep
Sep
23
24
24
28
28
28
28
06:52
08:01
07:39
08:28
08:24
08:18
08:30
vrpcfg.cfg
pubkey2
pubkey1
pub1
new1
new2
pub2
Syntax
mkdir remote-path
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
remote-path: The name of a directory on the remote SFTP server.
Description
Use the mkdir command to create a directory on the remote SFTP server.
Example
To create a directory test on the remote SFTP server, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;mkdir test
SFTP Client Configuration Commands
put
427
Syntax
put local-file [ remote-file ]
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
local-file: The name of a local file.
remote-file: The name of a file on the remote SFTP server.
Description
Use the put command to upload a local file to the remote SFTP server.
By default, if the name of the file on the remote server is not specified, it is
assumed that the file on the remote server has the same name as the local file.
Example
To upload local file temp.c to the remote SFTP server and save it with the name
temp1.c, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;put temp.c temp1.c
pwd
Syntax
pwd
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the pwd command to display the current directory on the SFTP server.
Example
To display the current directory on the SFTP server, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;pwd
flash:
quit
Syntax
quit
428
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the quit command to terminate the connection with the remote SFTP server
and return to the System view.
This command has the same functionality as the bye and exit commands.
Example
To terminate the connection with the remote SFTP server, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;quit
[SW4500]
remove
Syntax
remove remote-file
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
remote-file: The name of a file on the server.
Description
Use the remove command to delete the specified file from the server.
This command has the same functionality as the delete command.
Example
To delete the file temp.c from the server, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;remove temp.c
rename
Syntax
rename oldname newname
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
oldname: Original file name.
SFTP Client Configuration Commands
429
newname: New file name.
Description
Use the rename command to change the name of the specified file on the SFTP
server.
Example
To change the name of the file temp1 on the SFTP server to temp2, enter the
following:
sftp-client&gt;rename temp1 temp2
rmdir
Syntax
rmdir remote-path
View
SFTP client view
Parameter
remote-path: The name of a directory on the remote SFTP server.
Description
Use the rmdir command to delete the specified directory from the SFTP server.
Example
To delete the directory D:/temp1 from the SFTP server, enter the following:
sftp-client&gt;rmdir D:/temp1
sftp
Syntax
sftp { host-ip | host-name } [ port-num ] [ prefer_kex { dh_group1 |
dh_exchange_group } ] [ prefer_ctos_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ]
[ prefer_stoc_cipher { des | 3des | aes128 } ] [ prefer_ctos_hmac {
sha1 | sha1_96 | md5 | md5_96 } ] [ prefer_stoc_hmac { sha1 | sha1_96
| md5 | md5_96 } ]
View
System view
Parameter
host-ip: The IP address of the server.
host-name: The name of the server. It is a string with a length of 1 to 20
characters.
port-num: The port number of the server, ranging from 0 to 65535. By default,
the port number is 22.
430
CHAPTER 12: USING SYSTEM MANAGEMENT COMMANDS
prefer_kex: Preferred key exchange algorithm, which can be either
diffie-hellman-group1-sha1 or diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1.
dh_group1: Key exchange algorithm diffie-hellman-group1-sha1, which is default
algorithm.
dh_exchange_group: Key exchange algorithm
diffie-hellman-group-exchange-sha1.
prefer_ctos_cipher: Preferred encryption algorithm from the client to the
server. The default algorithm is aes128.
prefer_stoc_cipher: Preferred encryption algorithm from the server to the
client. The default algorithm is aes128.
des: Encryption algorithm des_cbc.
3des: Encryption algorithm 3des_cbc.
aes128: Encryption algorithm aes_128.
prefer_ctos_hmac: Preferred HMAC algorithm from the client to the server. The
default algorithm is sha1_96.
prefer_stoc_hmac: Preferred HMAC algorithm from the server to the client. The
default algorithm is sha1_96.
sha1: HMAC algorithm hmac-sha1.
sha1_96: HMAC algorithm hmac-sha1-96.
md5: HMAC algorithm hmac-md5.
md5_96: HMAC algorithm hmac-md5-96.
Description
Use the sftp command to establish the connection with the remote SFTP server
and enter the SFTP client view.
Example
To connect to the SFTP server with IP address 10.1.1.2 using the default
encryption algorithm, enter the following:
[SW4500]sftp 10.1.1.2
13
CONFIGURING PASSWORD CONTROL
This chapter describes how to use the following password control commands:
display
password-control
■
display password-control
■
display password-control blacklist
■
display password-control super
■
password
■
password-control
■
password-control enable
■
password-control super
■
reset password-control history-record
■
reset password-control history-record super
■
reset password-control blacklist
Syntax
display password-control
View
Any view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the display password-control command to display the information about
the global password control for all users.
Example
# Display the information about the current global password control for all users.
[4500] display password-control
Global password settings for all users:
Password Aging:
Enabled (90 days)
Password Length:
Enabled (10 Characters)
Password History:
Enabled
(Max history-record
Password alert-before-expire : 7 days
Password Authentication-timeout : 60 seconds
Password Attemp-failed action : Disable
Password History was last reset 38 days ago.
num : 6)
432
CHAPTER 13: CONFIGURING PASSWORD CONTROL
Table 44 describes the output fields of the display password-control command.
Table 44 Fields in Display Password- Control Command
Field
Description
Password Aging
Password aging time
Password Length
Minimum password length
Password History
History password recording
Password alert-before-expire
Alert time before password expiration
Password
Authentication-timeout
Timeout for password authentication
Password Attemp-failed action Password attempts limitation
History password was last reset Time when the history password was last cleared
38 days ago
display
password-control
blacklist
Syntax
display password-control blacklist [ username username | ipaddress
ip-address ]
View
Any view
Parameter
■
username: Name of a user who has been added to the blacklist.
■
ip-address: IP address of a user who has been added to the blacklist.
Description
Use the display password-control blacklist command to display the information
about one or all users who have been added to the blacklist because of password
attempt failure.
Example
# Display the information about all the users who have been added to the blacklist
because of password attempt failure.
[4500] display password-control blacklist
USERNAME
IP
Jack
10.1.1.2
The number of users in blacklist is :1
display
password-control super
Syntax
display password-control super
View
Any view
Parameter
None
433
Description
Use the display password-control super command to display the information
about the password control for super passwords, including the password aging
time and the minimum password length.
Example
# Display the information about the password control for super passwords.
&lt;4500&gt;display password-control super
Super's password settings:
Password Aging:
Enabled(90 days)
Password min-Length:
Enabled(10 Characters)
password
Syntax
password
View
Local user view
Parameter
None
Description
Use the password command to configure or change the system login password for
a user.
Example
# Configure the system login password for user test to 9876543210.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500]local-user test
New local user added.
[4500-luser-test]password
Password:**********
confirm:**********
# Change the system login password for user test to 0123456789.
[4500-luser-test]password
Password:**********
Confirm :**********
Updating the password file ,please wait ...
password-control
Syntax
password-control aging aging-time
password-control length length
password-control login-attempt login-times [ exceed { lock | unlock
| locktime time } ]
password-control history max-record-num
password-control alert-before-expire alert-time
password-control authentication-timeout authentication-timeout
undo password-control { aging | length | login-attempt | exceed |
history | alert-before-expire | authentication-timeout }
434
CHAPTER 13: CONFIGURING PASSWORD CONTROL
View
System view
Parameter
■
aging-time: Password aging time. It ranges from 1 day to 365 days and
defaults to 90 days.
■
length: Minimum password length. It ranges from 4 characters to 32
characters and defaults to 10 characters.
■
login-times: Login attempt times allowed for each user. It ranges from 2 to 10
and defaults to 3.
■
max-record-num: Maximum number of history records allowed for each user. It
ranges from 2 to 10 and defaults to 4.
■
alert-time: Alert time. When the remaining usable time of a password is no
more than this time, the user is alerted to the forthcoming password
expiration. It ranges from 1 day to 30 days and defaults to 7 days.
■
authentication-timeout: Timeout time for user authentication. It ranges from
30 seconds to 120 seconds and defaults to 60 seconds.
■
exceed: Used to configure the procession mode used after login failures.
■
lock: A procession mode. In this mode, a login-failure user is added to the
blacklist and inhibited from re-login; only after the administrator manually
remove this user from the blacklist, this user is allowed to log in the switch
again.
■
locktime time: A procession mode. In this mode, a login-failure user is inhibited
from login in a certain time period, which ranges from 3 to 360 minutes and
defaults to 120 minutes; only after this time passes, the user is allowed to log
in the switch again.
■
unlock: A procession mode. In this mode, a login-failure user is allowed to log
in the switch again and again without any inhibition.
By default, the system operates in locktime mode after a password
authentication fails.
Description
Use the password-control aging aging-time command to configure an aging
time for system login passwords.
Use the password-control length length command to configure the minimum
password length for the system login passwords.
Use the password-control login-attempt login-times command to configure
the maximum password attempt times allowed for each user.
Use the password-control history max-record-num command to configure
the maximum number of history password records allowed for each user.
Use the password-control alert-before-expire alert-time command to
configure the alert time, that is, the number of days when users are alerted ahead
of their password expiration.
435
Use the password-control authentication-timeout
authentication-timeout command to configure the timeout time for user
password authentication.
Use the password-control exceed command to configure the procession mode
used after password attempt failure.
Example
# Configure the password aging time of the system login passwords to 100 days.
&lt;4500&gt;system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500] password-control aging 100
# Configure the minimum password length of the system login passwords to eight
characters.
[4500] password-control length 8
# Configure the maximum password attempts times allowed for each user to five.
[4500] password-control login-attempt 5
# Configure the maximum number of history password records allowed for each
user to 10.
[4500] password-control history 10
# Configure the alert time when users are alerted to their forthcoming expiration
to seven days ahead of their expiration times.
[4500] password-control alert-before-expire
7
# Configure the timeout time of the user password authentication to 100 seconds.
[4500] password-control authentication-timeout 100
# Configure the maximum password attempt times to five, and configure the
system to allow the attempt failure user to re-log in the switch 360 minutes after
the failure.
[4500] password-control login-attempt 5 exceed locktime 360
password-control enable
Syntax
password-control { aging | length | history } enable
undo password-control { aging | length | history } enable
View
System view
Parameter
None
436
CHAPTER 13: CONFIGURING PASSWORD CONTROL
Description
Use the following password-control enable commands to enable the various
password control functions of the system:
■
Use the password-control aging enable command to enable password
aging.
■
Use the password-control length enable command to enable the limitation
of the minimum password length.
■
Use the password-control history enable command to enable the history
password recording.
When a password used to log in the switch expires, the switch requires the
user to update the password, and automatically saves the history (old)
password to a file in the flash memory. In this way, the switch can prevent any
user from using one single password for a long time or an old password that
was once used to enhance the security.
■
Use the undo password-control { aging | length | history } enable
command to disable password control.
By default, password aging, limitation of minimum password length, and
history password recording are all enabled.
Related command: password-control.
Example
# Enable password aging.
[4500]password-control aging enable
Password aging enabled for all users. Default: 90 days.
# Enable the limitation of the minimum password length.
[4500]password-control length enable
Password minimum length enabled for all users. Default: 10
characters.
# Disable password aging.
[4500]undo password-control aging
Password aging disabled for all users.
# Enable history password recording.
[4500]password-control history enable
Password history enabled for all users.
# Disable history password recording.
[4500]undo password-control history
Password history disabled for all users.
password-control super
Syntax
password-control super { aging aging-time | length min-length }
undo password-control super { aging | length }
437
View
System view
Parameter
■
aging-time: Aging time for super passwords. It ranges from 1 day to 365 days
and defaults to 90 days.
■
min-length: Minimum length for super passwords. It ranges from 4 characters
to 16 characters and defaults to 10 characters.
Description
Use the password-control super command to configure the parameters related
with the supper passwords, including the password aging time and the minimum
password length.
Use the undo password-control super command to restore the default settings
for the super passwords.
The super passwords are used for the user who has logged in the switch and
wants to change from a lower privilege level to a higher privilege level.
Example
# Configure the aging time of the super passwords to 10 days.
&lt;4500&gt; system-view
System View: return to User View with Ctrl+Z.
[4500] password-control super aging 10
reset password-control
history-record
Syntax
reset password-control history-record [ username username ]
View
User view
Parameter
username: Name of a user whose history password records will be deleted.
Description
Use the reset password-control history-record command to delete the
history password records of all users.
Use the reset password-control history-record username username
command to delete the history password records of a specific user.
Example
# Delete the history password records of all users
&lt;4500&gt; reset password-control history-record
Are you sure to delete all the history record?[Y/N]
If you input “Y”, the system deletes all the history password records of all users
and gives the following prompt:
All historical passwords have been cleared for all users.
438
CHAPTER 13: CONFIGURING PASSWORD CONTROL
# Delete the history password records of user test
&lt;4500&gt; reset password-control history-record username test
Are you sure to delete all the history record of user test ?[Y/N]
If you input &quot;Y&quot;, the system deletes all the history password records of the
specified user and gives the following prompt:
All historical passwords have been cleared for
reset password-control
history-record super
user test.
Syntax
reset password-control history-record super [ level level-value ]
View
User view
Parameter
level-value: Privilege level, the history records of the super password for the users
at this level will be deleted. This value ranges from 1 to 3.
Description
Use the reset password-control history-record super level level-value
command to delete the history records of the super password for the users at the
specified level.
Use the reset password-control history-record super command to delete
the history records of all super passwords.
Example
# Delete the history records of the super password for the users at level 2.
&lt;4500&gt;reset password-control history-record super level 2
Are you sure to clear the specified-level super password history
records?[Y/N]
If you input “Y”, the system deletes the history records of the super password for
the users at level 2.
reset password-control
blacklist
Syntax
reset password-control blacklist [ username username ]
View
User view
Parameter
username username: Specifies a user name.
Description
Use the reset password-control blacklist command to delete all the user
entries in the blacklist.
439
Use the reset password-control blacklist username username command to
delete one specific user entry in the blacklist.
Example
# Check the user information in the blacklist; as you can see, the blacklist contains
three users: test, tes, and test2.
&lt;4500&gt;display password-control blacklist
USERNAME
IP
test
192.168.30.25
tes
192.168.30.24
test2
192.168.30.23
# Delete user test from the blacklist
&lt;4500&gt; reset password-control blacklist user-name test
Are you sure to delete the blacklist-users ?[Y/N]y
All the blacklist users have been cleared.
# Check the current user information in the blacklist; as you can see, user test
does not exist in the blacklist now.
[4500]display password-control blacklist
USERNAME
IP
tes
192.168.30.24
test2
192.168.30.23
440
CHAPTER 13: CONFIGURING PASSWORD CONTROL
A
Accessing the
Bootrom Interface
BOOTROM INTERFACE
During the initial boot phase of the Switch the following prompt is displayed with
a five second countdown timer allowing access to the bootrom:
Starting......
*******************************************************
*
* SuperStack 4 Switch 4500 50-Port BOOTROM, Version 1.0
*
******************************************************
Copyright 2003-2005 3Com Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Creation date
: Jan 31 2005, 22:31:29
CPU type
: BCM4704
CPU Clock Speed : 200MHz
BUS Clock Speed : 33MHz
Memory Size
: 64MB
Mac Address
: 000fcbb77740
Press Ctrl-B to enter Boot Menu... 3
Before the countdown reaches 0, enter &lt;CTRL&gt;B
The timer is followed by a password prompt. The default is no password.
Press Enter to display the following boot menu:
442
APPENDIX A: BOOTROM INTERFACE
BOOT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
0.
MENU
Download application file to flash
Select application file to boot
Display all files in flash
Delete file from flash
Modify bootrom password
Enter bootrom upgrade menu
Skip current configuration file
Set bootrom password recovery
Set switch startup mode
Reboot
Enter your choice(0-9): 1
Boot Menu
Download Application
File to Flash
The following section describes the various options available in the boot menu.
This option enables you to download all files into flash. Enter 1 at the prompt to
display the following menu options:
1.
2.
3.
0.
Set TFTP protocol parameter
Set FTP protocol parameter
Set XMODEM protocol parameter
Return to boot menu
For further information on downloading see “Boot Menu File Download
Commands” on page 445.
Select Application File to
Boot
Select Option 2 at the prompt to display the following:
Select application file to boot
1. set application files
2. set configuration files
3. set web files
0. return
Enter your choice(0-3):
Boot Menu
443
Enter Option 1 at the prompt to display the following:
File Number
File
Size(bytes)
File Name
=================================================
1(*)
4649088
s4h03_01_04s168.app
Free Space: 10491904 bytes
(*)-with main attribute;(b)-with backup attribute
(*b)-with both main and backup attribute
Please input the file number to be change:
An asterisk (*) indicates the current main boot file.
A similar screen will be displayed for the configuration files and the web files.
In each case, the file is given the attribute “main” or “backup”.
Display all Files in Flash
Select Option 3 at the prompt to display the following:
File Number
File
Size(bytes)
File Name
=================================================
1
4
snmpboots
2
151
private-data.txt
3(*)
4649088
s4b03_01_04s168.app
4
576218
s4h03_04.web
5
10301
3comoscfg.def
6
10369
3comoscfg.cfg
7
10369
[test.cfg]
Free Space: 10460160 bytes
The current application file is s4b03_01_04s168.app
(*)-with main attribute;(b)-with backup attribute
(*b)-with both main and backup attribute
The current application file is name and an * indicates the file in the list.
If the filename is in brackets, for example [test.cfg], this indicates that the file
has been deleted from the CLI but is still present in the recycle-bin.
Delete File from Flash
Select Option 4 at the prompt to display the following:
File Number
File
Size(bytes)
File Name
=================================================
1
4
snmpboots
2
151
private-data.txt
3(*)
4649088
s4b03_01_04s168.app
444
APPENDIX A: BOOTROM INTERFACE
File Number
File
Size(bytes)
File Name
4
576218
s4h03_04.web
5
10301
3comoscfg.def
6
10369
3comoscfg.cfg
7
10369
[test.cfg]
Free Space: 10460160 bytes
The current application file is s4b03_01_04s168.app
(*)-with main attribute;(b)-with backup attribute
(*b)-with both main and backup attribute
Please input the file number to delete:
The current application file is name and an * indicates the file in the list.
If the filename is in brackets, for example [test.cfg], this indicates that the file
has been deleted from the CLI but is still present in the recycle-bin.
Modify Bootrom
Password
Select Option 5 at the prompt to allow the bootrom access password to be
changed as follows:
Old password:
New password: XXXX
Confirm password: XXXX
Current password has been changed successfully!
Enter Bootrom Upgrade
Menu
Select Option 6 at the prompt to allow a bootrom file to be downloaded to Flash
and then automatically upgrade the bootrom to the new version as follows:
Bootrom update menu:
1. Set TFTP protocol parameter
2. Set FTP protocol parameter
3. Set XMODEM protocol parameter
0. Return to boot menu
For further information on downloading see “Boot Menu File Download
Commands” on page 445.
Skip Current
Configuration File
Select Option 7 at the prompt to allow the Switch to be rebooted without loading
the current configurations as follows:
The current setting is running configuration file when reboot.
Are you sure to skip current configuration file when reboot?
Yes or No(Y/N)
The Switch will reboot using the factory defaults.
Set Bootrom Password
Recovery
Enter Option 8 at the prompt to allow the bootrom super password to be disabled
or enabled. The following is displayed:
Warning: if disable the bootrom password recovery, the super
password based on switch mac address is invalid!
The current mode is enable bootrom password recovery.
Boot Menu
445
Are you sure to disable bootrom password recovery? Yes or
No(Y/N) n
If the bootrom super password is disabled and the bootrom password (set at Boot
Menu Option 5) is lost, bootrom access is no longer possible. If access to the
bootrom menu is required, the Switch will need to be returned to 3Com for repair.
The super password is a fixed password that is based on the hardware of the
Switch. Once the Switch has been registered with 3Com, this password can be
supplied to the registered owner by contacting 3Com technical support.
Set Switch Startup Mode
Enter Option 9 at the prompt to allow the Power on Self Test (POST) mode to be
selected. The following is displayed:
The current mode is fast startup mode!
Are you sure to change it to full startup mode? Yes or
No(Y/N)n
Full startup mode supplies additional POST information via the console.
Reboot
Enter Option 0 at the prompt to reboot the Switch. The following is displayed:
Starting......
Boot Menu File
Download Commands
Enter Option 1 from the Boot menu to display the following download options:
Selecting a TFTP download
1.
2.
3.
0.
Set TFTP protocol parameter
Set FTP protocol parameter
Set XMODEM protocol parameter
Return to boot menu
Enter your choice(0-3): 1
Load File name
:s4b03_01_04s168.app
Switch IP address
:10.1.1.200
Server IP address
:10.1.1.177
Are you sure to download file to flash? Yes or No(Y/N)
Attached TCP/IP interface to netdrv0.
0x83fbb6a0 (tNetTask): arp info overwritten for a147a5b2 by
00:0d:54:9a:fa:20
Attaching network interface lo0...done.
Loading......................................................
...................
..............done
Free flash Space: 10491904 bytes
Writing
flash........................................................
...........
..done!
Please input the file attribute (main/backup/none):none
done!
446
APPENDIX A: BOOTROM INTERFACE
Selecting a FTP download
1.
2.
3.
0.
Set TFTP protocol parameter
Set FTP protocol parameter
Set XMODEM protocol parameter
Return to boot menu
Enter your choice(0-3): 2
Load File name:s4b03_01_04s168.app
Switch IP address:10.1.1.200
Server IP address:10.1.1.177
FTP User Name
:anonymous
FTP User Password
:pass
Are you sure to download file to flash? Yes or No(Y/N) y
Loading.....done
Free flash Space: 10456064 bytes
Writing flash....done!
Please input the file attribute (main/backup/none):none
done!
Selecting an XModem download
1.
2.
3.
0.
Set TFTP protocol parameter
Set FTP protocol parameter
Set XMODEM protocol parameter
Return to boot menu
Enter your choice(0-3): 3
Please select your download baudrate:
1. 9600
2.* 19200
3. 38400
4. 57600
5. 115200
0. Return
Enter your choice(0-5): 2
Download baudrate is 19200 bps
Please change the terminal's baudrate to 19200 bps and select
XMODEM protocol
Press enter key when ready
Now please start transfer file with XMODEM protocol
If you want to exit, Press &lt;Ctrl+X&gt;
Loading ...CCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCCC
Please input the file attribute (main/backup/none):none
done!
">

Hello! I am an AI chatbot specifically trained to assist you with the 3com SuperStack 3 Switch 4500 Reference guide. I have thoroughly reviewed the document and can help you locate the exact information you need or explain the content in clear and simple terms. Whether you’re looking for guidance on specific features, troubleshooting steps, or general usage, feel free to ask your questions. The more details you provide about your concerns or needs, the more accurately and effectively I can assist you!

Show related prompts

Assistant typing

Assistant is out of keyboard. Please, try again later.

Key features

VLAN support
Quality of Service (QoS)
Power over Ethernet (PoE)
Link aggregation
Spanning Tree Protocol (STP)
802.1x authentication
AAA and RADIUS support
Static routing
RIP routing
Multicast protocol support

Frequently asked questions

VLANs allow you to segment your network into smaller logical networks. This can improve security, performance, and manageability.

QoS allows you to prioritize different types of traffic, ensuring that critical applications have the bandwidth they need.

Static routing requires you to manually configure routes, while dynamic routing protocols allow routers to automatically exchange routing information.

SNMP allows you to monitor and manage the switch remotely using a network management system.